U>*FficaU£4*»MW»*V«ttWkfc*fi!MB4 I ■— W WW I »> ■ — 1 | « U*»4«Ut<((; ASIA UNITED STATES COAST PILOT PHILIPPINE ISLANDS IP-A-RT 1 LUZON, MSPDOBO, AND YISAYAS m — i m ww«»m —»! W> »e » > « *■»« w y w ti' i p iiw i fci a t Mi *!**** »wjM^iwaj|iwwinrnBtttt«4«tiWE«JW»a ■■I— umin—mniMi 1 1 mr» i »ni CORNELL UNIVERSITY LIBRARY Cornell University Library VK 911.U58 v.1 United States coast pilot, Philippine Is 3 1924 007 510 633 Cornell University Library The original of this book is in the Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924007510633 Serial No. 104 DEPAKTME!N"T OF OOMMEEOE U. S. COAST AND GEODETIC SURVEY E. LESTER JONES, Superintendent UNITED STATES COAST PILOT PHILIPPINE ISLANDS PAET I LUZON, MINDORO, AND VISAYAS FIKST EDITION" PRICE, 50 CENTS WASHINGTON GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 1919 CONTENTS. Page. Introductory 5 Note 6 Navigational aids and the use of charts 7 Index map of charts 22 General information 22 Storm warnings 28 Radio service 29 Variation of the compass 31 Tides and currents 31 Coastwise navigation 34 Islands and channels north of Luzon 37 Batan Islands 38 The Babuyan Islands 41 Luzon 44 North coast of Luzon 44 West coast of Luzon 48 Cape Bojeador to Lingayen Gulf 48 Lingayen Gulf 56 Cape Bolinao to Manila Bay. . 60 ManilaBay 70 Manila Bay to Cape Santiago. . 75 Southwest coast of Luzon 77 BalayanBay 77 Batangas Bay 78 Mataco Point to Bantigui Point 80 Tayabas Bay 81 Tayabas Bay to Ragay Gulf. . 85 Marinduque Island 89 RagayGulf 94 Burias Island 99 South coast of Luzon 101 East coast of Luzon 106 Cape Engano to Lamon Bay. . 106 PoKllo Island 110 Lamon Bay 115 Lamon Bay to Lagonoy Gulf. . 121 Catanduanes Island 138 East coast of Catanduanes. . 143 Lagonoy Gulf 149 AlbayGulf 154 Mindoro and Lubang Islands 158 Lubang Islands 158 North coast of Mindoro 161 East coast of Mindoro 1 168 Semirara Islands 173 Mindoro Strait 176 West coast of Mindoro 177 Page. Visayan Islands and waters 183 Sibuyan Sea 183 Tablas Island 186 Romblon Island 190 Sibuyan Island 191 West coast of Masbate 193 South coast of Masbate 195 Islands south of Masbate 196 Northeast coast of Masbate 197 Ticao Island 199 East coast of Masbate 202 Islands between Masbate and Samar 203 West coast of Panay 206 South coast of Panay 209 North coast of Panay 215 East coast of Panay 220 North coast of Negros 227 West coast of Negros 232 South coast of Negros 234 East coast of Negros 238 Islands off the north end of Cebu. 246 West coast of Cebu 247 East coast of Cebu 254 North coast of Bohol 266 DanajonBank 268 West coast of Bohol 271 South coast of Bohol 279 East coast of Bohol 282 Channel between Danajon Bank and Leyte 284 Siquijor Island 285 North coast of Samar 287 East coast of Samar 293 South coast of Samar 309 West coast of Samar 314 North coast of Leyte 323 Biliran and adjacent islands. . 324 West coast of Leyte 326 South coast of Leyte 331 East coast of Leyte 333 Appendix: Coast Pilots, Sailing Directions (Philippine Islands), and. Field Stations of the Coast and Geodetic Survey 339 Coastpilots 339 Sailing Directions, Philippine Islands 339 Field Stations 339 Harbor regulations 340 Index 351 3 INTRODUCTORY. Department of Commerce, United States Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. C, June 1£, 1919. This publication covers the coasts of Luzon, Mindoro, and the Visayan Islands with the adjacent islands and waters. It is based mainly upon the work of the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey. The waters north and northeast of Luzon have not yet been surveyed, and the notes relating to those waters have been compiled from a variety of sources, principally from the Spanish Derrotero and from reconnaissances by United States and Philippine Islands Government vessels. This volume covers the area formerly included in Sections I to IV, Philippine Islands Sailing Directions, compiled by John Dow, nau- tical expert in the Manila suboffice of the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey, and it consists of a rearrangement and revision of the fourth edition of that publication, together with a large amount of new information gathered by the various field officers of the Survey. The present (first) edition has been prepared in the office of the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey at Manila by K. J. Christman, Acting Chief of Chart Division, under the supervision of Fremont Morse, Director of Coast Surveys. The aids to naviga- tion are corrected to July 1, 1918. Navigators are requested to notify the Director of Coast Surveys, Manila, P. I., of any errors or omis- sions they may find in this publication or of additional matter which they think should be inserted for the information of mariners. E. Lester Jones, Superintendent. NOTE. The true courses and bearings are given in degrees, reading clock- wise from 0° at north to 360°, and are followed by the equivalent magnetic value from 0° at magnetic north to 360°, in parentheses. Bearings relating to the visibility of lights are given from sea- ward. Heights for lights are given in feet above high water; for other features, above mean sea level. Distances are in nautical miles, unless otherwise stated, and may be converted approximately to statute miles by adding 15 per cent to the distances given. ■Depths are referred to the mean of lower low waters. Currents are expressed in knots, which are nautical miles per hour, and are referred to by the direction toward which they set. Winds are referred to by the direction from which they blow. All charts referred to are published by the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey. The aids to navigation described in this volume are corrected to July 1, 1918. Notices to Mariners affecting the Charts and Sailing Directions of the Philippine Islands are published quarterly, and may be obtained free of charge on application to the Director of Coast Surveys, Manila, P. I. 6 Missing Page PHILIPPINE COAST PILOT. PART I— LUZON, MINDORO, AND THE VISAYAS. NAVIGATIONAL AIDS AND THE USE OF CHARTS. The Coast and Geodetic Survey is charged with the survey of the coasts, harbors, and tidal estuaries of the United States and its insular possessions, and issues the following publications relating to these waters as guides to navigation: Charts, Coast Pilots, Tide Tables, a catalogue of these publications, and Notices to Mariners, the last named published weekly by the Bureau of Lighthouses and the Coast and Geodetic Survey. Charts bear three dates which should be understood by persons using them: (1) the date (month and year) of the edition, printed on the late charts below the border in a central position, and on the older ones on the face of the chart; (2) the date of the latest correction to the chart plate, printed in the lower left-hand corner below the border ; (3) the date of issue, stamped below the border and just to the left of the subtitle. Charts show all necessary corrections as to lights, beacons, buoys, and dangers, which have been received to the date of issue, being hand corrected since the latest date printed in the lower left-hand corner. All small but important corrctions occurring subsequent to. the date of issue of the chart are published in Notices to Mariners, and should ; be applied by hand to the chart immediately after the receipt of the notices. The date of the edition of the chart remains unchanged until an extensive correction is made on the plate from which the chart is printed. The date is then changed and the issue is known as a new edition. When a correction not of sufficient importance to require a new edition is made to a chart plate, the year, month, and day are noted f.he lower left-hand corner. 11 the notes on a chart should be read carefully, as in some cases /' relate to the aids to navigation or to dangers that can not be jirly charted. he charts are various in character, according to the objects to ich they are designed to subserve. The most important distinc- ns are the following : :. Sailing charts, mostly on a scale of approximately ^ohooci ) -«'; ich exhibit the approaches to a large extent of coast, give the off- .';■ >re soundings and enable the navigator to identify his position as lie approaches from the open sea. 7 8 NAVIGATIONAL, AIDS. 2. General charts of the coast, on scales of 400*000 and - zoo^oo ) i 11 " tended especially for coastwise navigation. 3. Coast charts, on a scale of - so&oo ? hy means of which the navi- gator is enabled to avail himself of the channels for entering the larger bays and harbors. 4. Harbor charts, on larger scales, intended to meet the needs of local navigation. Note. — General charts of the Philippine Islands are on scales i6ooooo > aoo^oo ; and 400*000 '> coast charts are on scales rouW an d 200000- . Coast Phots, relating to surveyed waters of the United States, Porto Eico, and Alaska, and Sailing Directions of the Philippine Islands, contain full nautical descriptions of the coast, harbors, dan- gers, and directions for coasting and entering harbors. Similar in- formation relating to Hawaii is published in Coast Pilot Notes. Coast Pilots are corrected for important information received to the date of issue, which is stamped on the correction sheets accom- panying the volume. From time to time, as the material accumulates, supplements are issued, containing the more important corrections since the publication of the volume. The supplements are printed on one side of the paper only, so that they may be cut and pasted in the appropriate places in the volume. Supplements and other corrections for any volume can be furnished, free of charge, on application to the Coast and Geodetic Survey. Washington, D. C, provided the volume itself has not been superseded by a subsequent edition. Tide Tables. — The Coast and Geodetic Survey Tide Tables are issued annually in advance of the year for which they are made and contain the predicted time and height of the tides for each day in the year at the principal ports of the world, including the United States and its possessions. A table of tidal differences is given by means of which the tides at more than 3,000 intermediate ports may be obtained. Separate reprints from the general Tide Tables are issued! for the Atlantic and Pacific coasts of the United States and its dependencies. Agencies for the sale of the Charts, Coast Pilots, and Tide Tables of the Coast and Geodetic Survey are established in many ports of the United States and in some f oreignports. They can also be pur-j chased in the office of the Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. C, or any of the suboffices. If ordered by mail, prepayment is obligatory. Eemittances should be made by postal money order or express order, payable to the " Coast and Geodetic Survey." Postage stamps, checks, and drafts can not be accepted. The sending of monev in an unregistered letter is unsafe. Only catalogue numbers of charts need be mentioned. The catalogue of charts and other publications of the Survey can be obtained free of charge on application at anyl i the sale agencies or to the Coast and Geodetic Survey Office, W"M- ington, D. C. ^ Other Publications. — A List of Lights, Buoys, Beacons, and DU / marks of the Philippine Islands, and Notices to Mariners, showirtj ' changes and additions to the same, are published by the Bureau oY' Commerce and Industry, and may be obtained free of charge on ap- plication to the Director, Bureau of Commerce and Industry, Manila, P. I. Notice to Mariners, relating to Philippine waters, is published NAVIGATIONAL, AIDS. 9 quarterly by the Coast and Geodetic Survey, and may be obtained free of charge on application to the Director of Coast Surveys, Manila, P. I. TSE OF CHARTS. Acctjract of Chaet. — The value of a chart depends upon the char- acter and accuracy of the survey on which it is based, and the larger the scale of the chart the more important do these become. In these respects the source from which the information has been compiled is a good guide. This applies particularly to the charts of the Alaska Peninsula, Aleutian Islands, Arctic Ocean, and parts of Bering Sea and the Philippine Islands. The early Russian and Spanish surveys were not made with great accuracy, and until they are replaced by later surveys these charts must be used with caution. With respect to these regions the fullness or scantiness of the sound- ings is another method of estimating the completeness of a chart. When the soundings are sparse or unevenly distributed it may be taken for granted that the survey was not in great detail. A wide berth should therefore be given to every rocky shore or patch, and this rule should invariably be followed, viz, that instead of considering a coast to be clear unless it is shown to be foul, the con- trary should be assumed. With respect to a well-surveyed coast only a fractional part of the soundings obtained are shown on the chart, a sufficient number being selected to clearly indicate the contour of the bottom. When the bot- tom is uneven the soundings will be found grouped closely together, and when the slopes are gradual fewer soundings are given. Each sounding represents an actual measure of depth and location at the time the survey was made. Shores and shoals where sand and mud prevail, and especially bar harbors and the entrances of bays and rivers exposed to strong tidal currents and a heavy sea, are subject to continual change of a greater or less extent, and important ones may have taken place since the date of the last survey. In localities which are noted for frequent and radical changes, such as the entrance to a number of estuaries on the Atlantic, Gulf, and Pacific coasts, notes are printed on the charts calling attention to the fact. It should also be remembered that in coral regions and where rocks abound it is always possible that a survey with lead and line, however detailed, may have failed to find every small obstruction. For these reasons when navigating such waters the customary sailing lines and channels should be followed and those areas avoided where the irregu- lar and sudden changes in depth indicate conditions which are asso- ciated with pinnacle rocks or coral heads. Dredged Channels. — These are generally shown on the chart by two broken lines to represent the side limits of the improvement. Before completion of the project the depth given is that shown by the latest survey received from the engineer in charge. After com- pletion the depth given is the one proposed to be maintained by redredging when necessary. The actual depth of a completed channel may be greater than the charted depth shortly after dredging, and less when shoaling occurs 10 NAVIGATIONAL AIDS. as a result of storms or other causes. These changes are of too fre- quent occurrence and uncertain duration to chart. Therefore when a vessel's draft approximates the charted depth of a dredged channel, the latest information should be obtained before entering. Danger Curves. — The curves of depth will be found useful in giv- ing greater prominence to outlying dangers. It is a good plan to trace out with a colored pencil the curve next greater than the draft of the vessel using the chart and regard this as a " danger curve," which is not to be crossed without precaution. Isolated soundings shoaler than surroundings depths should be avoided, as there is always the possibility that the shoalest spot may not have been found. Caution in Using Small-Scale Charts. — It is obvious that dan- gers to navigation can not be shown with the same amount of detail on small scale as on those of larger scale ; therefore, in approaching the land or dangerous banks regard should be had to the scale of the chart used. A small error in laying down a position means only yards on a large-scale chart, whereas on a small scale the same amount of displacement means large fractions of a mile. For the same reason, bearings to near objects should be used in preference to objects farther off, although the latter may be more prominent, as a small error in" bearing or in laying it down on the chart has a greater effect in misplacing the position the longer the line to be drawn. Distortion or Printed Charts. — The paper on which charts are printed has to be dampened. On drying, distortion takes place from the inequalities of the paper, which varies with the paper and the amount of the original dampening; but it is not sufficient to affect ordinary navigation. It must not, however, be expected that accu- rate series of angles taken to different points will always exactly agree, when carefully plotted upon the chart, especially if the lines to objects be long. The larger the chart the greater the amount of this distortion. Buoys.— Too much reliance should not be placed on buoys always maintaining their exact position, especially when in exposed posi- tions ; it is safer, when possible, to navigate by bearings or angles to fixed objects on shore and by the use of soundings. Gas buoys and other unwatched lights can not be implicitly relied on ; the light may be altogether extinguished, or, if intermittent, the apparatus may get out of order. Lights.— The distances given in the light lists and on the charts for the visibility of lights are computed for a height of 15 feet for the observer's eye. The table of distances of visibility due to height, published in the light list, affords a means of ascertaining the effect of a greater or less height of the eye. The glare of a powerful light is often seen far beyond the limit of visibility of the actual rays of the light, but this must not be confounded with the true range. Again, refraction may often cause a light to be seen farther than under ordinary circumstances. When looking for a light the fact may be forgotten that from aloft the range of vision is increased. By noting a star immediately over the light a bearing may be afterwards obtained from the standard compass. NAVIGATIONAL AIDS. 11 The actual power of a light should be considered when expecting to make it in thick weather. A weak light is easily obscured by haze, and no dependence can be placed on its being seen. The power of a light can be estimated by its candlepower as given in the light lists and in some cases by noting how much its visibility in clear weather falls short of the range due to the height at which it is placed. Thus a light standing 200 feet above the sea and re- corded as visible only 10 miles in clear weather is manifestly of little brilliancy, as its height would permit it to be seen over 20 miles if of sufficient power. Fog Signals. — Sound is conveyed in a very capricious way through the atmosphere. Apart from the wind, large areas of silence have been found in different directions and at different distances from the origin of the sound signal, even in clear weather. Therefore, too much confidence should not be felt as to hearing a fog signal. The apparatus, moreover, for sounding the signal may require some time before it is in readiness to act. A fog often creeps imperceptibly toward the land and is not observed by those at a lighthouse until it is upon them, whereas a vessel may have been in it for many hours while approaching the land. In such a case no signal may be sounded. When sound travels against the wind it may be thrown upward ; in such a case a man aloft might hear it when it is inaudi- ble on deck. The conditions for hearing a signal will vary at the same station within short intervals of time; mariners must not, therefore, judge their distance from a fog signal by the force of the sound and must not assume that a signal is not sounding because they do not hear it. Taken together, these facts should induce the upmost caution when nearing the land or danger in fog. The lead is generally the only safe guide and should be faithfully used. Submarine Bells have an effective range of audibility greater than signals sounded in air, and a vessel equipped with receiving apparatus can determine the approximate bearing of the signal. These signals can be heard also on vessels not equipped with receiv- ing apparatus by observers below the water line, but a bearing of the signal can not then be readily determined. Tides. — A knowledge of the tide, or vertical rise and fall of the water, is of great and direct importance whenever the depth at low water approximates to or is less than the draft of the vessel and wherever docks are constructed so as to be entered and left near the time of high water. But under all conditions such knowledge may be of indirect use, as it often enables the mariner to estimate in advance whether at a given time and place the current will be run- ning flood or ebb. In using the tables slack water should not be confounded with high or low tide nor a flood or ebb current with flood or ebb tide. In some localities the rise or fall may be at a stand while the current is at its maximum velocity. The Tide Tables published by the Coast and Geodetic Survey give the predicted times and heights of high and low waters for most of the principal ports of the world and tidal differences and con- stants for obtaining the tides at all important ports. Plane or Beference for Soundings on Charts. — For the At- lantic coast of the United States and Porto Eico the plane of refer- ence for soundings is the mean of all low waters; for the Pacific 12 NAVIGATIONAL AIDS. coast of the United States and Alaska, with the exception noted below, and for the Hawaiian and Philippine Islands, it is the mean of the lower low waters. For Wrangell Strait, Alaska, it is 3 feet below mean lower low water. For the Atlantic coast of the Canal Zone, Panama, the plane of reference for soundings is mean low water, and for the Pacific coast of the same it is low-water springs. For foreign charts many different planes of reference are in use, but that most frequently adopted is low-water springs. It should be remembered that whatever plane of reference is used for a chart there may be times when the tide falls below it. When the plane is mean low water or mean lower low water there will generally be as many low waters or lower low waters below those planes as above them. Also the wind may at times cause the water to fall below the plane of reference. Tidal Currents. — In navigating coasts where the tidal range is considerable, special caution is necessary. It should be remembered that there are indrafts into all bays and bights, although the general set of the current is parallel to the shore. The turn of the tidal current offshore is seldom coincident with the time of high and low water on the shore. At the entrance to most harbors without important tributaries or branches the current turns at or soon after the times of high and low water within. The diurnal inequality in the velocity of current will be proportionately but half as great as in the height of the tides. Hence, though the heights of the tide may be such as to cause the surface of the water to vary but little in level for 10 or 12 hours, the ebb and flow will be much more regular in occurrence. A swift current often occurs in narrow openings between two bodies of water, because the water at a given instant may be at different levels. Along most shores not seriously affected by bays, tidal rivers, etc., the current usually turns soon after high and low waters. Where there is a large tidal basin with a narrow entrance, the strength of the current in the entrance may occur near the time of high and low water, and slack water at about half tide, outside. The swiftest current in straight portions of tidal rivers is usually in the mid-channel, but in curved portions the strongest current is toward the outer edge of the curve. Counter currents and eddies may occur near the shore of straits, especially in bights and near points. Tide Rips and Swirls occur in places where strong currents oc- cur, caused by a change in the direction of the current, and especially over shoals or in places where the bottom is uneven. Such places should be avoided if exposed also to a heavy sea, especially with the wind opposing the current ; when these conditions are at their worst the water is broken into heavy, choppy seas from all directions, which board the vessel, and also make it difficult to keep control owing to the baring of the propeller and rudder. Current Arrows on charts show only the usual or mean direction of a tidal stream or current. It must not be assumed that the direc- tion of the current will not vary from that indicated by the arrow. In the same manner the velocity of the current constantly varies with circumstances, and the rate given on the chart is a mean ralue, cor- NAVIGATIONAL AIDS. 13 responding to an average range of tide. At some stations but few observations have been made. Fixing Position. — The most accurate method available to the navigator of fixing a position relative to the shore is by plotting with a protractor, sextant angles between well-defined objects on the chart ; this method, based on the " three-point problem " of geometry, should be in general use. In many narrow waters, also where the objects may yet be at some distance, as in coral harbors or narrow passages among mud banks, navigation by sextant and protractor is invaluable, as a true posi- tion can in general be obtained only by its means. Positions by bear- ings are too rough to depend upon, and a small error in either taking or plotting a bearing might under such circumstances put the ship ashore. For its successful employment it is necessary, first, that the objects be well chosen; and second, that the observer be skillful and rapid in his use of the sextant. The latter is only a matter of practice. Near objects should be used either for bearings or angles for posi- tion in preference to distant ones, although the latter may be more prominent, as a small error in the bearing or angle or in laying it on the chart has a greater effect in misplacing the position the longer the line to be drawn. On the other hand, distant objects should be used for direction because less affected by a small error or change of position. The three-arm protractor consists of a graduated circle with one fixed and two movable radial arms. The zero of the graduation is at the fixed arm, and by turning the movable arms each one can be set at any desired angle with reference to the fixed arm. To plot a position, the two angles observed between the three selected objects are set on the instrument, which is then moved over the chart until the three beveled edges in case of a metal instrument, or the radial lines in the case of a transparent or celluloid instrument, pass respectively and simultaneously through the three objects. The center of the instrument will then mark the ship's position, which may be pricked on the chart or marked with a pencil point through the center hole. The tracing-paper protractor, consisting of a graduated circle printed on tracing paper, can be used as a substitute for the brass or celluloid instrument. The paper protractor also permits the laying down for simultaneous trial of a number of angles in cases of fixing important positions. Plain tracing paper may also be used if there are any suitable means of laying off the angles. The value of a determination depends- greatly on the relative posi- tions of the objects observed. If the position sought lies on the circle passing through the three objects, it will be indeterminate, as it will plot all around the circle. An approach to this condition, which is called a revolver, must be avoided. In case of doubt select from the chart three objects nearly in a straight line or with the middle object nearest the observer. Near objects are better than distant ones, and, in general, up to 90°, the larger the angles the better, remembering always that large as well as small angles may plot on or near the circle and hence be worthless. If the objects are well situated, even very small angles will give for navigating purposes a fair position, when that obtained by bearings of the same objects would be of little value. 14 NAVIGATIONAL, AIDS. Accuracy requires that the two angles be simultaneous. If under way and there is but one observer, the angle that changes less rapidly may be observed both before and after the other angle and the proper value obtained by interpolation. A single angle and a range give, in general, an excellent nx, easily obtained and plotted. _ The Compass.— It is not intended that the use of the compass to hx the position should be given up; there are many circumstances in which it may be usefully employed, but errors more readily creep into a position so fixed. Where accuracy of position is desired, angles should invariably be used, such as the fixing of a rock or shoal or ot additions to a chart, as fresh soundings or new buildings. In such cases angles should be taken to several objects, the more the better; but five objects is a good number, as the four angles thus obtained prevent any errors. When only two objects are visible, a sextant angle can be used to advantage with the compass bearings and a better fix obtained than by two bearings alone. # Doubling the Angle on the Bow. — The method of fixing by doubling the angle on the bow is invaluable. The ordinary form of it, the so-called " bow and beam bearing," the distance from the object at the latter position being the distance run between the times of taking the two bearings, gives the maximum of accuracy and is an excellent fix for a departure, but does not insure safety, as the object observed and any dangers off it are abeam before the position is obtained. By taking the bearings at two points and four points on the bow, a fair position is obtained before the object is passed, the distance of the latter at the second position being, as before, equal to the distance run in the interval, allowing for current. Taking afterwards the beam bearing gives, with slight additional trouble, the distance of the object when abeam ; such beam bearings and distances, with the times, should be continuously recorded as fresh departures, the importance of which will be appreciated in cases of being suddenly shut in by fog. A graphic solution of the problem for any two bearings of the same object is frequently used. The two bearings are drawn on the chart, and the course is then drawn by means of the parallel rulers, so that the distance measured from the chart between the lines is equal to the distance made good by the vessel between the times of taking the bearings. Danger Angle. — The utility of the danger angle in passing out- lying rocks or dangers should not be forgotten. In employing the horizontal danger angle, however, charts compiled from early Rus- sian and Spanish sources, referred to in a preceding paragraph, should not be used. Soundings. — In thick weather, when near or approaching the land or danger, soundings should be taken continuously and at regular intervals, and, with the character of the bottom, systematically re- corded. By marking the soundings on tracing paper, according to the scale of the chart, along a line representing the track of the ship, and then moving the paper over the chart parallel with the course until the observed soundings agree with those of the chart, the ship's posi- tion will in general be quite well determined. NAVIGATIONAL AIDS. 15 Sumner's Method. — Among astronomical methods of fixing a ship's position the great utility of Sumner's method should be well under- stood, and this method should be in constant use. The Sumner line — that is, the line drawn through the two positions obtained by working the chronometer observation for longitude with two assumed latitudes, or by drawing through the position obtained with one latitude a line at right angles to the bearing of the body as obtained from the azimuth tables — gives at times" invaluable information, as the ship must be somewhere on that line, provided the chronometer is correct. If directed toward the coast, it marks the bearing of a definite point ; if parallel with the coast, the distance of the latter is shown. Thus the direction of the line may often be usefully taken as a course. A sounding at the same time with the observation may often give an approximate position on the line. A very accurate position can be obtained by observing two or more stars at morning or evening twi- light, at which time the horizon is well defined. The Sumner lines thus obtained will, if the bearings of the stars differ three points or more, give an excellent result. A star or planet at twilight and the sun afterwards or before may be combined ; also two observations of the sun with sufficient interval to admit of a considerable change of bearing. In these cases one of the lines must be moved for the run of the ship. The moon is often visible during the day, and in com- bination with the sun gives an excellent fix. Change of Variation of the Compass. — The gradual change in the variation must not be forgotten in laying down positions by bearings on charts. The magnetic compasses placed on the charts for the purpose of facilitating plotting become in time slightly in error, and in some cases, such as with small scales, or when the lines are long, the displacement of position from neglect of this change may be of importance. The compasses are reengraved for every new edition if the error is appreciable. Means for determining the amount of this error are provided by printing the date of constructing the compass and the annual change in variation near its edge. The change in the magnetic variation in passing along some parts of the coast of the United States is so rapid as to materially affect the course of a vessel unless given constant attention. This is par- ticularly the case in New England and parts of Alaska, where the lines of equal magnetic variation are close together and show rapid changes in magnetic variation from place to place, as indicated by the large differences in variation given on neighboring compass roses. Local Magnetic Disturbance. — The term " local magnetic disturb- ance " or " local attraction " has reference only to the effects on the compass of magnetic masses external to the ship. Observation shows that such disturbance of the compass in a ship afloat is experienced only in a few places. Magnetic laws do not permit of the supposition that it is the visible land which causes such disturbance, because the effect of a magnetic force diminishes in such rapid proportion as the distance from it in- creases that it would require a local center of magnetic force of an amount absolutely unknown to affect a compass half a mile distant. Such deflections of the compass are due to magnetic minerals in the bed of the sea under the ship, and when the water is shallow and the force strong the compass may be temporarily deflected when passing 16 NAVIGATIONAL AIDS. over such a spot, but the area of disturbance will be small, unless there are many centers near together. The law which has hitherto been found to hold good as regards local magnetic disturbances is, that north of the magnetic equator the north end of the compass needle is attracted toward any center of disturb- ance ; south of the magnetic equator it is repelled. It is very desirable that whenever an area of local magnetic dis- turbance is noted the position should be fixed and the facts reported as far as they can be ascertained. Use of Oil foe Modifying the Effect of Breaking Waves. — Many experiences of late years have shown that the utility of oil for this purpose is undoubted and the application simple. The following may serve for the guidance of seamen, whose atten- tion is called to the fact that a very small quantity of oil skillfully applied may prevent much damage both to ships (especially of the smaller classes) and to boats by modifying the action of breaking seas. The principal facts as to the use of oil are as follows : 1. On free waves — i. e., waves in deep water — the effect is greatest. 2. In a surf, or waves breaking on a bar, where a mass of liquid is in actual motion in shallow water, the effect of the oil is uncertain, as nothing can prevent the larger waves from breaking under such cir- cumstances, but even here it is of some service. 3. The heaviest and thickest oils are most effectual. Refined kero- sene is of little use ; crude petroleum is serviceable when nothing else is obtainable ; but all animal and vegetable oils, such as waste oil from the engines, have great effect. 4. A small quantity of oil suffices, if applied in such a manner as to spread to windward. 5. It is useful in a ship or boat, either when running or lying-to, or in wearing. 6. No experiences are related of its use when hoisting a boat at sea or in a seaway, but it is highly probable that much time would be saved and injury to the boat avoided by its use on such occasions. 7. In cold water the oil, being thickened by the lower temperature and not being able to spread freely, will have its effect much reduced. This will vary with the description of oil used. 8. For a ship at sea the best method of application appears to be to hang over the side, in such a manner as to be in the water, small canvas bags, capable of holding from 1 to 2 gallons of oil, the bags being pricked with a sail needle to facilitate leakage of the oil. The oil is also frequently distributed from canvas bags or oakum inserted in the closet bowls. The positions of these bags should vary with the circumstances. Running before the wind, they should be hung on either bow — «. g., from the cathead and allowed to tow in the water. With the wind on the quarter the effect seems to be less than in any other position, as the oil goes astern while the waves come up on the quarter. Lying-to, the weather bow, and another position farther aft, seem the best places from which to hang the bags, using sufficient l'ine to permit them to draw to windward while the ship drifts. 9. Crossing a bar with a flood tide, to pour oil overboard and allow it to float in ahead of the boat, which would follow with a bag towing NAVIGATIONAL AIDS. 17 astern, would appear to be the best plan. As before remarked, under these circumstances the effect can not be so much trusted. On a bar, with the ebb tide running, it would seem to be useless to try oil for the purpose of entering. 10. For boarding a wreck, it is recommended to pour oil overboard to windward of her before going alongside. The effect in this case must greatly depend upon the set of the current and the circumstances of the depth of water. 11. For a boat riding in bad weather from a sea anchor, it is recom- mended to fasten the bag to an endless line rove through a block on the sea anchor, by which means the oil can be diffused well ahead of the boat and the bag readily hauled on board for refilling, if necessary. USE OP SOUNDING TUBES. Although of undoubted value as a navigational instrument, the sounding tube is subject to certain defects which, operating singly or in combinations, may give results so misleading as to seriously endanger the vessels whose safety is entirely dependent upon an accu- rate knowledge of the depths. Efforts have been made from time to time by the Coast and Geo- detic Survey to utilize tubes for surveying operations. The results obtained, however, have been so unsatisfactory that the general use of such tubes for surveying work has been discouraged. In practical tests, carefully made by surveying parties, where up- and-down casts of the lead were taken with tubes attached to the lead, errors in the tube amounting at times to as much as 25 per cent of the actual depths have been noted. Errors of 10 to 12 per cent of the actual depth were quite common. It is also worthy of note that in the great majority of cases the tubes gave depths greater than the true depths, which, in actual use in coastwise navigation, would usually have resulted in the conclu- sion that the ship was farther offshore than was really the case. There are various types of tubes in common use which are too well known to require detailed description here. They are all based on the general principle that air is elastic and can be compressed, and that if a column of air in a tube be lowered into the water in such a way that the air can not escape, yet, at the same time, the pressure of the water can be transmitted to it, the amount by which the air is compressed furnished a measure of the depth to which it was lowered. Theoretically this principle is sound, but when we come to apply the theory to actual practice certain elements enter which result in errors in the depth determination. It is important to note that the amount of these errors depends on the depth ; the greater the depth the greater the numerical value of the error. The causes which produce these errors are as follows : 1. In order to give correct results the bore of the tube must be ex- actly cylindrical ; in other words, the volume of air in any one inch of length of the tube must be exactly the same as in an inch in any other part. But because of the way in which glass tubes are made it is very difficult to accomplish this. The bore may taper slightly or vary in other ways from a true cylinder. If tapering, the minimum diame- 97172"— 19 2 18 NAVIGATIONAL AIDS. ter of bore may be at the top, middle, or bottom of the tube as sub- merged. If the minimum diameter be at the top, the tube will regis- ter depths less than the actual depths of water, and if at the bottom the registered depth will be greater than the true depth. This defect may be detected in a suspected tube by introducing a small quantity of mercury into the tube and comparing its length at different points along the bore. For satisfactory results the length of this column should not vary more than 5 per cent. 2. In order that even a perfect tube should give accurate results, the conditions of barometric pressure and air and water temperatures under which the sounding is being taken must be the same as those under which the scale for reading the depths was made. In making the scale a barometric pressure of 29 inches is usually assumed as normal. Then, if in actual use, the barometer registers above normal, the air in the tube is already partly compressed, and when lowered to any given depth the amount of compression due to water pressure is cor- respondingly diminished. With a barometer below normal the re- verse is true, and it therefore follows that when the barometer reads above normal the tubes will register less than the true depths, whereas if the barometer reads below normal the registered depths will be greater than the true. The amount of error introduced from this cause is about 3 per cent of the depth for each inch of barometric pressure above or below normal. The density of the air in the tube also depends directly upon its temperature. Therefore, the difference between the temperature of the air in the tube before and after submergence will affect the accu- racy of the sounding. Where the temperature of the tube in the air is greater than that of the tube in the water, the depth recorded will be greater than the actual depth, and, conversely, when the tempera- ture of the air is lower than that of the water the depth recorded will be less than the true depth. Also, the temperature of the water may vary at different depths, so that the actual amount of this error depends on the difference between the temperatures of the tube in the air and at the bottom. The amount of error introduced from this cause is about 1 per cent of the depth for each 3 degrees Fahrenheit difference in temperature. t 3. While the tubes are usually 24 inches long, and the scales are de- signed for that length of tube, the manner of closing the upper end of the tube may introduce an error. The thickness of the caps used for this purpose varies considerably in different makes of tubes, even when such caps are made of the same material. This variation in thickness results in moving the tube slightly up or down in the scale. Thus, with a thin cap the sounding read from the scale will be too deep ; with a thick cap, the sounding read will be less than the true depth. Copper caps put on with sealing wax have been found to vary sufficiently to produce errors of about 5 per cent of the depth in depths of 50 to 70 fathoms. Rubber caps seem to be more nearly uniform and to give better results when new. Rubber, however, deteriorates, and when used too long there is apt to be leakage of air. When removable caps are used care should be taken to see that they are pushed home thoroughly before sounding. NAVIGATIONAL AIDS. 19 4. The integrity of the air in the tube should be carefully pre- served. Even a slight leakage of air will result in showing a sound- ing considerably in excess of the true depth. Vessels sometimes approach dangers coming from depths of over 100 fathoms. As they approach, they begin feeling for the bottom, sounding at infrequent intervals to pick up depths of 75 to 100 fathoms. So long as they get no bottom in such depths navigators feel secure. But a leaky tube may show no bottom at 100 fathoms when the ship is actually in much less depths, possibly resulting in disaster before the error is discovered. Special precautions should, therefore, be taken on this point. Copper caps should be sealed in place with sealing wax, and rubber caps should be supplied with wire clamps, giving a tight fit. 5. Accumulated salt on the inner surface of the tube will cause the watermark to creep up and register greater than true depths. The type of tube exemplified by the well-known Bassnett sounder is based on the same principle as the ordinary glass tube, but is more complicated in design. It consists essentially of a metal case con- taining a glass tube closed at the upper end. Inside the glass tube is a metal tube, through which the water enters and is trapped by a valve at the top of the metal tube. In this device the scale is graduated directly on the glass tube, thus eliminating those errors due to thickness of cap; but, on the other hand, the possibility of errors increases directly with the number of working parts of which the sounder is made. In using sounders of this type care should be exercised to preserve perfectly gasketed joints between the bottom of the glass tube and the metal case and to keep the outlet valve well oiled and water-tight. Leaking valves and water remaining in the tube before a sounding is taken will give increased depths, while deficient depths may be recorded as a result of loss of water through suction at the inlet as the tube is being reeled in. The Bassnett type, in common with all other forms of pressure tube, is subject to the above-described errors due to variations in temperature and barometric pressure. It will be noted that wherever the amount of the various errors can be stated they are all small. Their importance lies in the fact that two or more of them, acting together, may result in considerable errors. As already stated, actual experiments show that errors of 10 to 12 per cent are not uncommon and that considerably greater errors may occur. There are certain precautions which can be taken to eliminate or reduce these errors : 1. In purchasing tubes a type should be selected which can be used until broken or lost. The navigator can then make a study of the results obtained from each individual tube and thus gain a fair idea of its accuracy under known conditions. This necessitates some per- manent means of identifying the various tubes used, which may readily be accomplished in the case of the glass tubes by means of various colored paints or threads. 2. Before undertaking the sounding necessary to make any par- ticular landfall, the vessel should be stopped for an up-and-down cast of the lead in order to test the accuracy under the prevailing condi- tions of the tubes which are to be used. For this purpose it is not 20 NAVIGATIONAL AIDS. necessary to get bottom ; simply run out 60 to 80 fathoms of wire and then see how closely the tubes register that amount. A number of tubes can be sent down at one time, and it is then possible to select one or two which register most nearly correct. It is well to keep a permanent record of the results of each tube tested. By so doing the navigator will soon obtain valuable informa- tion as to the performace of the various tubes and the degree to which they»may be trusted. Such a record should, of course, take into account the various conditions affecting the result. It will be noted that the factors which produce errors may be divided roughly into three groups: (a) Inherent : Those which occur as a result of permanent defects in the tube, such as the variation of the bore from a true cylinder, variation in the thickness of the cap, etc. (b) External: Those which occur as a result of the conditions under which the sounding was taken, variations of temperature or barometric pressure from the normal, etc. (c) Accidental: Those which affect a single sounding, due to the failure of the tube to register properly, leakage of air, loss of water from leaky valves, errors due to the presence of salt in the tube, etc. These accidental errors are probably the most serious of the three types, both because they are apt to be larger in amount and because it is impossible to foresee when they will occur. But, on the other hand, they occur only as a result of a few known causes, already enumerated, and therefore by the exercise of proper caution in the use of the tubes they may be to a large extent eliminated. If the ordinary glass tube is used, see that the bore is thoroughly dry and free from salt and that the cap makes a tight fit. If using a sounder, see that the tube is free from water and that the valves are tight and well oiled. And, above all, during the course of the sounding take an occa- sional up-and-down cast as a check, for by that means alone can one be sure that the proper results are being obtained. The smallest possible number of tubes should be used. It is obvi- ously much better to use, over and over again, one tube which is giving good results than to use a number whose errors are uncer- tain. This is particularly desirable where sounders involving valves are used. If a tube shows no bottom at 100 fathoms, examine the arming to make sure that the lead actually failed to find bottom. Finally, beware of overconfidence. Tubes which have been work- ing properly for a number of soundings suddenly develop errors. It is chiefly for this reason that they have been discarded for survey- ing operations. Assuming that the accidental errors can be reasonably controlled, the inherent and external errors present no serious difficulty. As already indicated, the bore of a tube (or at least of any tube which is capable of constant use) can be tested with mercury and those tubes rejected which show variations in bore greater than about 5 per cent. Errors due to variations in the thickness of caps can be eliminated by using a scale graduated for a true length of 24 inches (the length of the glass tube) and removing the cap before the sounding is read NAVIGATIONAL AIDS. 21 Errors due to differences between air and water temperatures can be reduced to a minimum which can usually be neglected by immers- ing the tube before using, in a bucket of sea water, newly drawn, so that its temperature has not had time to change. Care should, of course, be taken to see that no water enters the tube. When this is done, there may still remain an error due to the difference in temperature of the water at the surface and at the bottom. This may, if desired, be corrected by sending down a self -registering ther- mometer with the lead, but for the ordinary purposes of naviga- tion this is a refinement which may be ignored. There is no ready method available for correcting the error due to variations in the barometric pressure. The correction should be applied to the sounding recorded. It is interesting to note that sounding tubes which give good re- sults can readily be made from plain glass or metal tubes aboard ship — gauge glasses, for instance. One end of the tube is closed with a cork and sealing wax. A narrow strip of chart paper of uni- form width, on which a line has been ruled with an indelible pencil, is inserted the entire length of the tube. The paper is held in place by bending the projecting lower end upward along the outside of the tube and securing it with a rubber band. The height in which the water rises in the tube will be indicated by the blurring of the pencil line. If the air column in the tube is 24 inches long, the sounding may be read from any scale graduated for tubes of that length. If of a different length, a special scale must be prepared; its graduations, compared to those of the 24-inch scale, will be proportional to the comparative lengths of the two tubes. If certain precautions are taken, these tubes will give results which compare favorably with commercial tubes- The paper should be inserted uniformly in the tube, and its upper end, or a mark from which the measurement is taken, should coincide with the top of the air column. Metal tubes have the advantage of uniform bore, but if metal tubes are used the paper, in order to insure uniformity, should be fastened at the upper end when that end is being sealed and then stretched lightly at the bottom. The depth should always be read from the dry portion of the paper, as the wet portion is sub- ject to considerable change in length. PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. GENERAL INFOKMATION. This rich and beautiful group of islands, situated in the northern part of the East Indian Archipelago, was discovered by the Portu- guese navigator Fernando de Magalhaens (or Magellan) in 1521. Magalhaens, who was in command of a Spanish expedition and was the first to pass through the strait still bearing his name, approached the Philippines from the eastward and entered the archipelago through the Strait of Surigao. He was killed in a skirmish with the natives on Mactan Island, east of Cebu, in 1521. The Philippines were formally annexed to Spain in 1565. The early history of the islands is a record of continual trouble. After the war between the United States and Spain they were ceded by Spain to the United States of America by the treaty of peace signed at Paris, December 10, 1898, and as a voluntary consideration the United States paid to Spain $20,000,000. According to this treaty the Philippine Archipelago comprehends all of the islands within the following limits: A line drawn from west to east, along or near the parallel of 20° N latitude, through the middle of the navigable channel of Bashi (21° 25' N lati- tude, approximately) from the meridian 118° to that of 127° E longi- tude, thence southward along the latter meridian to the parallel of 4° 45" N latitude, thence westward along that parallel to the meridian of 119° 35' E longitude, thence northward along that meridian to the parallel of 7° 40' N latitude, thence westward along that parallel to the meridian of 116° E longitude, thence by a direct line to the inter- section of the parallel of 10° N latitude with the meridian of 118° E longitude, thence northward along that meridian to the point of begin- ning. Spain also relinquished on November 7, 1900, to the United States, all title and claim to the islands of Cagayan Sulu and Sibutu and their dependencies, and all others belonging to the Philippine Archi- pelago and lying outside of the limits described by the treaty of Paris, the United States paying the sum of $100,000. The archipelago comprises over 3,000 islands, with a combined area of about 114,400 square statute miles. Luzon in the north and Min- danao in the south are the two largest islands of the group. Besides these two there are only 29 islands with areas greater than 100 square statute miles, the most important of which are Samar, Negros, Panay, Palawan, Mindoro, Leyte, Cebu, Bohol, and Masbate. The islands are generally mountainous and heavily wooded, and contain many volcanoes. Mount Apo, in Mindanao, 9,609 feet high, and Mount Pulog, in Luzon, 9,593 feet high, are probably the highest points in the archipelago. Earthquakes of severe character have been experienced in the Philip- pine Islands. The most disastrous of recent times was that of 1863, when 400 persons were killed and 2,000 wounded in Manila, and 46 22 GENERAL INFORMATION. 23 public buildings and 1,100 private houses were seriously injured or destroyed. Other serious earthquakes have occurred in 1610, 1645, 1658, 1675, 1699, 1852, 1880, and 1911, when on January 30 there was an explosion of gas in the crater of Taal volcano, devastating the country surrounding Lake Taal. Active volcanoes exist in the Babu- yan Islands, Luzon, Negros, Mindanao, and Camiguin. Climate. — The climate of the Philippines differs but little from that of other islands in the same latitude. The range of the thermometer at sea level varies from about 60° to about 10Q° F. The year may be divided into three seasons: The first, cool and dry, commences in November; the second, hot but still dry, commences in March, the greatest heat being experienced from April to the end of May ; and the third, which is exceedingly wet, continues from June to No- vember. This division of seasons does not apply to coasts exposed to the northeast monsoon, where the wet and dry seasons are to some extent reversed. In the southern portion of the archipelago the wet season is also much less distinct. During the rainy seasons inunda- tions are frequent, and traveling in the interior is difficult. The greater part of the group comes within the range of typhoons, and terrific storms occur. The local thunderstorms that come in the months of May and June, the period of greatest heat, are also at times very severe. The endemic complaints of the country are malarial and other fevers, .diarrhea, beriberi, and a few others. The islands have also been visited by epidemics of cholera, bubonic plague, and smallpox. The mortality is, as a rule, low, considering the num- ber of inhabitants and their mode of life. Prevailing winds. — The two regular monsoons that are met with in the China Sea prevail to a certain extent over the Philippine Islands, the Sulu Sea, and the northern part of the Celebes Sea, but they blow with diminishing force as lower latitudes are reached. The northeast monsoon, which is the more uniform and steady of the two, prevails for six months 3 from November to April. On the west coast of Luzon northerly winds predominate during November, December, and January, and easterly winds during February, March, and April. In April southeasterly winds are nearly as prevalent as easterly. The northeast monsoon is the season of dry and fine weather, except on the coast directly exposed to it. The high land of the Philippines naturally interrupts the regular course of the wind, and under the land calms are frequent, and often a light wind blows from westward, while in front of the open channels it blows hard, especially off Cape Calavite. In the Sulu Sea the east or northeast monsoon is not a steady, fresh breeze, but often variable. The southwest monsoon is less uniform, being more interrupted by storms, most of which occur during this season. For the six months from May to October the prevailing wind is southwesterly, May being the month in which the winds veer from east to southwest, and October is the month of change from southwest to north. Throughout the year calms or light winds occur more frequently at night or early morning, the average least force of wind being about 6 or 7 a. m. ; the greatest force is usually during the hours of greatest heat, from 1 to 4 p. m. The average daily velocity of the wind is greatest in September, being nearly double that for Decem- ber, the month of least wind. 24 GENERAL INFORMATION". Storms and gales. — During the rainy season local tempests or torna- does, accompanied by thunder and lightning, are frequent. They occur. from May to October, and occasionally in April and November, and usually in the afternoon or night. These rains, while some- times fierce and in torrents, are usually of short duration. The gales of the Philippines are known by the local names of colla and baguio. The latter, generally known as typhoons, are the most severe storms of this region, and will be described separately. Colla is the native name fpr a storm caused by an atmospheric depression to the north or northeast of Luzon, and accompanied by brisk or strong winds from south to southwest, continuing for several days, with violent squalls at intervals. Collas occur more frequently in June or July. Similar depressions appear in the lower latitudes (4° to 12° N) during the months of December, January, February, and March, causing brisk northeasterly winds, accompanied by rain in Mindanao and the central islands, sometimes extending to southern Luzon. Typhoons. — These storms which are similar to the cyclones of the, Indian Ocean and the hurricanes of the West Indies, generally have their origin eastward or southeastward of the Philippines, whence their course is westward or northwestward, the average direction ap- pearing to be about west by north. Some of the storms that cross the Philippines break up in the China Sea, while others reach the China coast or recurve northward and northeastward. Some do not cross the Philippines, either recurving before reaching the islands or having their origin in the China Sea. About 20 of these storms are recorded annually, but few of these are destructive in the archipelago, and the destructive area of any one storm is usually quite limited. Very few typhoons occur during the months from January to April, inclusive, but February is the only month in which none have been recorded. They are most prevalent in the months from June to November, inclusive, and one- fifth of all the typhoons occur in September. Typhoons are rarely encountered in latitudes below 9° N. With respect to their relation to Manila, typhoons may be divided into five classes : 1. Typhoons which cross the archipelago north of Manila. If not distant, they are the most dangerous. They are more frequent from July to October, and never occur from December to May. The winds blow from north to northwest and from west to southwest. If the distance is less than 180 miles, the influence usually lasts in Manila not more than two days. 2. Typhoons which cross south of Manila. These are felt with much less intensity at Manila than the preceding, even when at the same distance. The winds blow from northeast to southeast. They are more common in November, October, May, and December. 3. Typhoons which recurve into the Pacific to the east of longi- tude 121° E without crossing the meridian of Manila. The effect of these is similar to a distant typhoon passing to the northward, except that the_ strong wind, and wind and rain squalls from the southwest, continue at times for five or six days. These are very frequent in September and quite frequent in August and July. 4. Typhoons formed in the China Sea, to the west of the Philip- pines. These are the least felt in Manila, as they generally move GENERAL, INFORMATION. 25 northwesterly away from the archipelago. These are fairly frequent from June to October, inclusive. 5. Typhoons which recurve in the China Sea between the parallel of 10° and 20°, passing first to the south and afterwards to the north of Manila. The influence of these storms is usually prolonged for six or eight days, accompanied by continuous rains and brisk winds, which veer from north to northeast and east-southeast while the vortex crosses to the south. When, after several days, the typhoon recurves to the northeast this is accompanied by a rapid veering of the winds to the southwest and west. But a small number of such storms have been recorded, scattered in various months from March to December. In a typhoon the air currents form a vast whirlwind revolving about a space of relative calm, called the vortex. In the northern hemisphere the rotation is always from right to left, or in direction opposite to that of the hands of a watch placed face up. The lower currents of air are more or less convergent toward the vortex, the middle currents are nearly circular, and the higher currents are divergent, so that the highest cirrus clouds may go out in a radial direc- tion from the vortex. Because of the convergence of the lower cur- rents, an observer facing the wind will have the vortex of the storm 8 to 12 points to his right, but within the archipelago or near the land this rule is liable to be disturbed by the topography of the country. The rate of progress of typhoons varies from about 5 to 17 miles an hour, averaging 9 miles. The maximum hourly velocity of the wind observed at Manila has been 54 miles, but for short periods velocities of 80 miles per hour have been recorded. The diameter of the exterior revolving circle of the storm is estimated to vary from 40 to 130 miles and of the vortex or calm region from 11 to 16 miles. The duration of the true typhoon at any place is not longer than 10 hours, and generally is much less. These storms are always accom- panied by abundant rain, with low, dense clouds, which at times limit the visible horizon to a few yards distance, and are generally accompanied by electrical discharge. The barometer falls slowly for several days before the typhoon, then rapidly on its near approach, and reaches its lowest when the vortex is at a little distance. It then rises rapidly as the vortex passes away and slowly when it has passed to some distance off, and finally regains its normal height, while near the vortex there are usually marked oscillations. The typhoon generally begins with a northerly wind, light, drizzling rain, weather squally and threaten- ing, a falling barometer, and the wind veering eastward when the observer is northward of the path of the storm and backing west- ward when he is southward of it; wind and rain increasing as the wind shifts. The storm generally ends with a southerly wind, after falling gradually. The lowest barometer reading observed in the Philippines is 27.16 inches (689.9 mm.), obtained on the Survey steamer Pathfinder at San Policarpo, Samar, September 25, 1905. Indications of approach of typhoons. — The earliest signs of a typhoon are high cirrus clouds, looking like fine hair, feathers, or small white tufts or wool, appearing while the weather is still fine and the baro- meter high. They may be best seen at sunrise or sunset. They are prolonged in the direction of some point on the horizon, toward 26 GENERAL INFORMATION. which they converge, which is the direction of the vortex of the storm. These warning cirrus clouds may be distinguished from others by the persistence with which they remain on the horizon and by their convergence. In some cases one of the earliest signs is a long, heavy swell and a confused sea, which comes from the direction from which the storm is approaching and travels more rapidly than the storm's center. This precursory sign of the cyclonic swell is so valuable and so re- liable for vessels on the eastern coasts of Luzon, Samar, Leyte, Dinagat, and Mindanao that its importance can not be exaggerated. From its direction the path of the typhoon north and south of the vessel may be predicted with almost absolute certainty, enabling a vessel to choose an anchorage if within reach, affording the best protection from wind and sea. This is only possible, of course, when the swell has an uninterrupted advance from the storm center, as on the eastern coast of the archipelago, and would be valueless west of the islands unless in the China Sea, with the storm center approaching from westward or southwestward. This swell has fre- quently been noticed 24 to 72 hours before the outbreak of the storm, giving good warning, especially if from a different direction than the prevailing wind at the time. This swell is probably in part due to the heaping up of the water under the vortex of the storm, which is one of the destructive fea- tures of typhoons. In the typhoon of October 12, 1897, the water rose from 12 to 20 feet at points on the coast of Samar and Leyte. The best and surest of all warnings, however, is given by the baro- meter. In every case there is great barometric disturbance. Any departure of the barometer from its usual movements in normal weather is an indication of doubtful weather, and the intensity of a typhoon will correspond to the amount of this departure. The weather may be regarded as very suspicious : 1. When the daily variation of the barometer is not normal. The highest readings of the barometer should be about 9 a. m. and be- tween 10 and 11 p. m., and the lowest between 3 and 4 a. m. and about 3 p. m., the latter being the lower. The average daily range should be about 0.1 inch (2.5 mm.). 2. When the barometer rises barely 0.04 inch (1 mm.) during the daily oscillation. 3. When the daily fall of the barometer at its normal height ex- ceeds about 0.15 inch (4 mm.), this limit varying somewhat with the season. If below normal, a less fall of the barometer may indicate a distant typhoon. The storm will pass near by and be violent — 1. When the barometer remains stationary without rising any, or scarcely any, during the normal hours of ascent. 2. When the barometer continues to fall after the normal hours of the morning or afternoon minimum (when it should rise in nor- mal weather) the condition is more alarming than the preceding. 3. When the barometer falls at the rate of more than 0.04 inch (1 mm.) per hour. These signs are followed by the usual ugly and threatening appear- ance of the weather which forebodes most storms and the increasing number and severity of the gusts with the rising of the wind. GENERAL INEOBMATrON. 27 No positive rule can be given as to the amount of depression to be expected, but at the center of some of the storms the barometer is often 2 inches lower than outside of the storm field. As the center or vortex of the storm is approached, unless the ves- sel be on the line of its advance, the changes of the wind become more rapid, till at length, instead of its direction altering gradually, as is the case on first entering the storm field, the wind flies around at once to the opposite point, the sea meanwhile breaking in moun- tainous and confused heaps. There are many instances on record of the wind falling suddenly in the vortex and the clouds dispersing for a short interval, though soon the wind springs up again and blows with renewed fury. Few vessels have ever passed through the vor- tex without losing either masts or rudder or meeting with some worse disaster, and therefore, at whatever cost, the central part of the storm field should be avoided. Practical rules for typhoons. — When there are indications of a ty- phoon being near, vessels should remain in or, if possible, seek refuge in port, carefully observing and recording the changes in barometer and wind and taking every precaution to avert damage by striking light spars, strengthening moorings, and, if a steamer, pre- paring steam to assist the moorings. The waters of the Philippines are so limited in area and encumbered with islands and shoals that the practical rules for handling a vessel in a typhoon are not appli- cable within the archipelago. They may, however, be of benefit to a vessel when threatened with a typhoon in the China Sea or Pacific, and therefore are given below. Vessels unable to reach port and having sea room to maneuver should observe the following rules : When there are indications of a typhoon near, sailing vessels should heave to on the starboard tack and steamers remain stationary and carefully observe and record the changes in wind and barometer so as to find the bearing of the center and ascertain by the shift of wind in which semicircle the vessel is situated. Much will often depend on heaving to in time. To find the bearing of the center, face the wind, then the center of the storm will be 8 to 12 points to the right ; when the storm is distant it will be from 10 to 12 points, and when the barometer has fallen five or six tenths it will be about 8 points. A line drawn through the center of a typhoon in the direction in which it is moving is called the axis or line of progression, and looking in the direction in which it is traveling the semicircle on either side of the axis is called, respectively, the right-hand, or dangerous, semicircle, and the left-hand, or navi- gable, semicircle. To find in which semicircle the vessel is situated : If the wind shift to the right, the vessel will be in the right-hand, or dangerous, semi- circle, with regard to the direction in which the storm is traveling, in which case the vessel should be kept on the starboard tack and increase her distance from the center. If the wind shifts to the left, the vessel will be in the left, or safe, semicircle. The helm should be put up and the vessel run with the wind- on the starboard quarter, preserving the compass course, if possi- ble, until the barometer rises, when the vessel may be hove to on the port tack. Or if there is not sea room to run the vessel can be put on the port tack at once. 28 GENERAL INFORMATION. Should the wind remain steady and the barometer continue to fall, the vessel is in the path of the storm and should run with the wind on the starboard quarter into the safe semicircle. In all cases act so as to increase as soon as possible the distance from the center, bearing in mind that the whole storm field is advancing. In receding from the center of a typhoon the barometer will rise and the wind and sea subside. Typhoon harbors. — In the section covered by this volume, the follow- ing harbors offer excellent shelter during typhoons. They are the more important harbors of refuge, but numerous other harbors offer shelter, and masters of vessels should use discretion in their choice of a typhoon harbor. Since typhoons usually give ample warning of their approach, together with their probable path, anchorage should be chosen which offers best shelter from the winds which will prevail during the coming typhoon. If in the vicinity of any of the following harbors, they should be given preference : North coast of Luzon : Port San Vicente. West coast of Luzon: Bolinao Harbor, Port Matalvi, Olangapo Harbor, Manila Harbor. Marinduque Island : Santa Cruz Harbor, Port Balancan. Burias Island : Port Busin. South coast of Luzon : Sorsogon Bay. East coast of Luzon: Port San Vicente, Casiguran Sound, Hook Bay (Pollilo Island), Dahikan Bay, Lamit Bay. Lubang Island : Port Tilig. Mindoro Island : Soguicay Bay. Tablas Island: Looc Bay. Romblon Island : Romblon Harbor. Ticao Island : Port San Miguel. Panay Island : Iloilo Harbor. Cebu Island: Cebu Harbor. Samar Island: Helm Harbor, Port Borongan, Pambujan Harbor, Port Aguirre (Canahuan Islands). STORM WARNINGS. Typhoon signals (see appendix, p. 343) are hoisted in accordance with advices from the central observatory of the weather bureau at Manila, and their meaning is the same wherever shown in the archipelago. During the progress of a typhoon within the range of the observatory special warnings are furnished to the Cavite naval radio station and from there broadcasted for the information of shipping. Besides these special warnings, two regular daily weather reports are fur- nished to that station by the Manila observatory. Typhoon warnings are also sent to the threatened localities by telegraph and cable if possible. Time signals. — In cooperation with the Manila observatory, time signals are sent out from the Cavite naval radio station at 11 a. m. and 10 p. m. daily, including Sundays and holidays. The signals begin at 10.55 a. m. and 9.55 p. m., standard mean time of the one hundred and twentieth meridian, and continue for 5 minutes, and during this, inter- val every tick of the clock is transmitted except the twenty-eighth, twenty-ninth, fifty-fourth, fifty-fifth, fifty-sixth, fifty-seventh, fifty- GENERAL INFORMATION'. 29 eighth, and fifty -ninth of each minute. The radio transmission is by a 5-kilowatt spark on a wave length of 952 meters. In addition to the time service by radio, time signals are sent daily over the lines of the Postal Telegraph and Cable service at 11 a. m., and mariners can avail themselves of this service at the principal ports of the islands by applying at the local telegraph offices. RADIO SERVICE. The following is a list of governmental radio stations of the Phil- ippine Islands. With the exception of the United States naval radio stations, they are open to general public service (commercial traffic). The Insular Government radio stations are under the control of the Bureau of Posts and are operated in connection with the land wire and cable service of that bureau. Information concerning regula- tions, rates, and commercial work of United States radio stations may be obtained by addressing the Director of Naval Communication, Radio, Va. Station. Location. Call signal. Wave length. Latitude. Longitude. United States naval radio stations: 14 14 14 12 10 9 7 7 6 6 / 28 49 22 27 51 44 35 04 55 02 55 N 02 52 30 25 00 20 00 10 40 120 120 120 121 121 118 124 125 122 121 55 16 34 03 00 42 04 36 02 00 00 B 59 40 00 20 40 10 20 19 00 NPO NPT WVN WVY wvx WW WVT WVO WVW wvs 600. 600. United States Army Radio Station: Fort kiills, Corregidor Island Insular Government radio stations: 300; 600; 1,800. 600. 600; 1,200. 600; 1,200. 600; 1,200. 600; 1,200. 600; 1,200. 800. Supplies, repairs, and communication. — Vessels usually obtain their supplies and stores in Manila, Cebu, or Iloilo. Limited quantities of supplies may be obtained at several other places. Most of the coal for the use of vessels is imported from Japan and Australia. Philippine coal is being developed, with Government aid and supervision, but is not yet produced in sufficient quantity to supply the demands of in- dustry and commerce. Small patent slipways are available for mak- ing repairs at Cebu and Iloilo. The Marine railways at Manila and at Cavite have a capacity of 3,000 and 2,400 tons, respectively, and the United States Navy floating dock Dewey, at Olongapo, has a lifting capacity of 18,500 tons. Communication among the islands and with foreign ports is by regular lines of steamers, cable, telegraph, telephone, and radio. Several trans-Pacific lines of steamers call at Manila for passengers and freight. -,..■,,., Ports of entry. — The Philippine Islands are divided into seven cus- toms districts whose principal ports are Manila, Sual, Tabaco, Iloilo, Cebu, Zamboanga, and Jolo. _ _ , ttuarantine for the ports of entry of the Philippine Islands is en- forced in accordance with the requirements of the United States Quarantine Laws and Regulations, and is administered by the United 30 GENERAL INFORMATION. States Public Health Service. Quarantine Regulations will be found at the stations of that service and at American consulates, and will be furnished to vessels upon application, either by officers of that service or by the bureau at Washington, D. C. Every vessel should be provided with the Quarantine Eegulations. There are two disin- fection and detention stations for quarantine purposes— one at Mari- veles and one on Cauit Island, in the harbor of Cebu. Port sanitary statements are issued by the United States Public Health Service and may be obtained at the stations of that Service. Quarantine regulations for coastwise ports, except ports of entry, are under the jurisdiction of the Philippine Health Service and inquiries concerning them should be addressed to the Director of Health, Manila, P. I. The Philippine Customs Law assigns to the Bureau of Customs, the general supervision, control, and regulation of shipping and naviga- tion (see appendix, p. 340, for extract from Regulations) and specially directs that, in such matters, collectors of customs shall perform the duties that devolve on American consuls or consular officers. Aids to "navigation are constantly being improved and extended. There are a number of automatic (unwatched) acetylene lights in isolated locations, and navigators should consider the possibility of their not burning if they fail to make the light when expected. The buoyage accords with the system adopted in United States waters. The principal coast lights are described in the text of this volume. For a complete description of all aids see the List of Lights, Buoys, Beacons:, and Day Marks of the Philippine Islands,' published by the Bureau of Commerce and Industry, which can be obtained, free of charge, from the Director, Bureau of Commerce and Industry, Manila, P. I. System of buoyage. — In conformity with section 4678 of the Re- vised Statutes of the United States, the following order is observed in coloring and numbering the buoys along the coasts or in bays, har- bors, sounds, or channels, viz : 1. In approaching the channel, etc., from seaward, red buoys, with even numbers, will be found on the starboard side of the channel, and must be left on the starboard hand in passing in. 2. In approaching the channel, etc., from seaward black buoys, with odd numbers will be found on the port side, and must be left on the port hand in passing in. 3. Buoys painted with red and black horizontal stripes will be found on obstructions, with the channel ways on either side of them, and may be left on either hand in passing in. 4. Buoys painted with white and black perpendicular stripes will be found in midchannel, and must be passed close-to to avoid danger. All other distinguishing marks to buoys will be in addition to the foregoing, and may be employed to mark particular spots, a descrip- tion of which will be given in the printed list of buoys. Perches, with balls, cages, etc., will, when placed on buoys, be at turning points the color and number indicating on which side they shall be passed. Different channels in the same bay, sound, river, or harbor will be marked, as far as practicable, by different descriptions of buoys Principal channels will be marked with nun buoys; secondary channels will be marked with can buoys; and minor channels with GENERAL INFORMATION. 31 spar buoys. When there is but one channel, nun buoys properly colored and numbered are usually placed on the starboard side and can buoys on the port- side of it. Whenever practicable the towers, beacons, buoys, spindles, and all other aids to navigation are arranged in the light list in regular' order as they are passed by vessels entering from the sea. Day beacons, stakes ; and spindles (except such as are on the sides of channels, which will be colored like buoys) are constructed and distinguished with special reference to each locality, and particu- larly in regard to the background upon which they are projected. Bearings are magnetic, and distances in nautical miles. Signals for surveying vessels. — The following special signals for sur- veying vessels of the United States employed in hydrographic sur- veying, have been prescribed : A surveying vessel of the United States under way or at anchor in a fairway and employed in hydrographic surveying may carry where they can best be seen, but in any case well above the rigging lights prescribed by law for preventing collisions, three lights in a vertical line one over the other and not less than 6 feet apart. The highest and lowest of these lights shall be green, and the middle light shall be white, and they shall be of such a character as to be visible all around the horizon at a distance of at least 2 miles. In the case of a small vessel the distance between the lights of such private code may be reduced to 3 feet, if necessary. By day such surveying vessel may carry in a vertical line, not less than 6 feet apart, where they can best be seen, three shapes of not less than 2 feet in diameter, of which the highest and lowest shall be globular in shape and green in color, and the middle one diamond in shape and white. VARIATION OF THE COMPASS. The magnetic variations for 1920 at points mentioned are given below. The annual change may be neglected as it averages about 1' for most of the places. Locality. Compass variation. Locality. Compass variation. Easterly. 00 35 55 38 1 02 Easterly. 1 03 1 27 1 31 1 35 TIDES AND CURRENTS. In the inland waters and western coasts of the Philippine Islands the tides are affected more by the declination of the moon (tropic tides) than by the opposition and conjunction of the sun and moon, or full and new moon (spring tides). Two or three days after the moon crosses the Equator there are two tides a day of equal height. One of the high waters increases, reach- ing its maximum about two days after the moon's greatest northerly 32 GENERAL INFORMATION. or southerly declination. The other high water diminishes, and at Manila usually disappears entirely for from three to eight days near the time of the moon's greatest declination. During this period there is therefore but one high water and one low water each lunar day. From two to five days after the greatest declination the second tide again appears, and the two high waters again become equal after the moon crosses the Equator. The greatest range of tide occurs in June and December and the least range in March and September. The high water when there is but one tide a day, or the higher tide when there are two high waters, follows the moon's upper transit when the moon is south of the Equator and follows the moon's lower transit when the moon is north of the Equator. The " establishment " is much affected by the diurnal inequalities above referred to. The Coast Survey charts give the tropic high- water intervals and tropic low-water intervals, which are the inter- vals of high and low waters after the moon's transits at the periods of greatest declination, when the highest tides occur. The intervals when the moon is near the Equator may differ an hour or two from these. On the east coast of the archipelago, at points open to the Pacific, the effect of the tropic tides is less marked, and there are two high waters and two low waters each lunar day throughout the month, though the tides are still affected by some diurnal inequality. Tidal currents. — Two tidal streams enter the Sulu Sea and passages between the Philippines from opposite directions — one from the China Sea through the western openings, the other from the Pacific through the eastern straits, San Bernardino, Surigao, and Basilan. These streams meet in the many channels between the southern islands. The stream from the China Sea enters that sea from the Pacific by the wide opening between Formosa and Luzon and passes from north to south along the western shores of Luzon and Palawan and through the Verde Island Passage, Mindoro Strait, Linapacan, and Balabac Straits. The Verde Island stream after passing south along the coast of Luzon and deflecting some of its waters in Manila Bay, continues along the coast as far as Punas Point, where it branches. One stream runs northeast around Tayabas Bay and north and east of Marin- duque through Mompog Pass, reunites with the other branch, which passes southeast along the Mindoro coast as far as Dumali Point and then eastward, south of Marinduque as far as the Bondoc Penin- sula, where it meets the flood stream from the Pacific which has passed through San Bernardino Strait. The northern part of the Verde Island stream, which follows round Balayan and Batangas Bays reunites with the principal current near Verde Island, producing violent tide rips and eddies in that part of the channel between Mala- brigo and Escarceo Points. The flood that enters Mindoro Strait follows the coast of Mindoro setting southeast as far as Nasog Point, Panay, part of it continuing round the coast of Mindoro northward of Dumali Point, where it meets the stream through Verde Island Passage. The rest of the stream divides at the northwest point of Panay Island. One branch flows along the north coast of Panay past Bulacaue Point and the GENERAL INFORMATION". 33 Gigantes Islands to Bulalaqui Point, the north point of Cebu, where it turns southward and meets the stream from the Pacific through Surigao Strait, about 6 miles south of the Camotes Islands ; it also flows through Iloilo and Tanon Straits, in both of them meeting the flow which has entered from southward on the parallels of the north end of Negros and of Tajao Point, Cebu, respectively. The other branch turning to the south from the northwest point of. Panay, and being joined midway by the stream setting eastward from Cuyos Islands or Linapacan Strait, continues coasting Panay and Guimaras Islands into Iloilo Strait until it meets the other branch described above. Between the Calamianes and the north end of Palawan the flood stream sets southeast and the ebb northwest. The flood stream entering by Balabac Strait turning north-north- east along the coast of Palawan spreads itself like a fan over the Sulu and Mindoro Seas from northeast to east, forming the current from west to east felt between Cuyos Islands and Panay, and also that which sets to the south of the Cagayanes, where it is said to meet the stream from Surigao Strait approximately in the meridian of the Cagayanes. In the Sibutu Passage the flood stream sets northward and west- ward; and also in the Sulu Archipelago the flood stream sets gen- erally in the same direction, but takes many local directions among the islands. Through Basilan Strait the flood stream makes west- ward and passes up the west coast of Mindanao northward until it meets the flood stream from Surigao Strait about midway on the coast. In some places the tidal current seems to be influenced by a mon- soon current. Along the Panay coast there is a constant northerly current which varies but little in strength with the change of tide. In the vicinity of Seco Island and Batbatan this current changes its direction to westward and then southwestward through the Cuyo Islands, thus forming a great eddy. A somewhat similar eddy exists in the Mindanao Sea southeastward of Bohol. The time of high water of the wave that enters from the China Sea seems to be from 10 to 12 hours and that which comes from the Pacific through the eastern and northern straits from 6 to 7 hours. Tide Tables for western North America, Eastern Asia, and many is- land groups of the Pacific Ocean, including the Philippine Islands, are published annually in advance by the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey. This volume furnishes, at the nominal cost of 10 cents, United States currency, full tidal data for the ports of the ^t Contains 3 a tabie of full daily predictions of the times and heights of hiffh and low waters for certain standard or principal ports along the roast- full explanations for the use of this table are given on page 8 X u'seof Table 2 of the Tide Tables should be known to every naviVator Bv means of this table the predictions given for the , I d Vjorts are extended so as to enable one to obtain complete +^«1 Hata for each day for stations only a few miles apart for the t Dart of the coast, and with almost the same accuracy as though full predictions were given for all of these points. 97172°— 19 3 34 GENERAL INFORMATION. Instead of using the height differences of Table 2, however, a more accurate method is that of multiplying both high and low water heights at the standard port by the ratio of ranges for the given port to obtain the heights of the corresponding high and low waters. The ratio of ranges is given in Table 2 of the Tide Tables. The minus sign before the predicted heights in the Tide Tables indicates that the water is below the plane of reference, which is mean lower low water. The time of high or low water at any given port in Table 2 is found by taking the time of the corresponding tide for that day from the standard port for reference and applying to it the time difference for the given port from the third column of Table 2, adding it if the sign is plus and subtracting if minus. Caution. — In using the Tide Tables, slack water should not be con- founded with high or low water. For ocean stations there is usually but little difference between the time of high or low water and the beginning of ebb or flood current ; but for places in narrow channels, landlocked harbors, or on tidal rivers the time of slack current may differ by two or three hours from the time of high or low water stand, and local knowledge is required to enable one to make the proper allowance for this delay in the condition of tidal currents. The figures given in Tables 1 and 2 of the Tide Tables are the times of high and low water, and these times are not necessarily the times of slack water. COASTWISE NAVIGATION. The navigation of coral seas demands constant vigilance; aside from this the waters described in this volume present no unusual diffi- culty to the mariner. The lead gives little or no warning of the approach into danger, and the effect of uncertain and irregular cur- rents is a constant source of danger on the longer courses. Over rocky bottom and on shoals the 10-fathom curve should be considered the danger curve, as coral bowlders frequently rise from 3 to 4 fathoms above the general level of the shoal, and the surveys may not have found the least water in every case. The waters northward of Luzon and the north and northeast coast of Luzon have not yet been surveyed and are but imperfectly charted. The following directions give the courses and distances for some of the principal routes among the islands. They serve to indicate the general route followed by coasting vessels, rather than as courses strictly to be adhered to. Navigators should consult the charts freely and in some cases may be able to save in distance, with perfect safety to the vessel. A detailed description of the coast, including landmarks, dangers, etc., follows, beginning on page 37; GENERAL INFORMATION. 35 General routes. (Objects are abeam unless otherwise stated. Bearings are magnetic] Course. True. Magnetic. Distance Distance from Manila. CAPE ENGANO TO MANILA. 1. From 5 miles north of Cape Engafio light to Cape Bojeador light, bearing 202°, distant about 15 miles 2. To Cape Bojeador light, bearing 00°, distant 6 miles , 3. To Piedra Point light, Bearing 90°, distant 5 miles 4. To Hennana Mayor light, bearing 90°, distant 6 miles 5. To Capones Island light, bearing 2°, distant 10 miles and Los Frailes Rocks, bearing 90°, distant 5 miles 6. To Corregidor light, bearing 90°, distant 10 miles 7. To Monja light, bearing 180°, distant A mile 8. To Manila Harbor entrance light at southern end of north breakwater , (tt). — MANILA TO VERDE ISLAND. 1. Manila to San Nicolas light, distant 2 miles (light at south end of north breakwater astern) 2. To Caballo light, distant \% miles 3. To El Fraile Bock, distant \% miles 4. To north end Carabao Island, distant 2} £ miles; Corregidor light bears 0° 5. To Fuego Point, distant 2)£ miles, Fortune Island ahead. . 6. To Fortune Island light, distant 2 miles 7. To Cape Santiago light, bearing 135°, distant 10]4 miles 8. To Cape Santiago light, distant 2}4 miles 9. To Mount Casapao, highest point on Maricaban Island, dis- tant 3% miles; Escarceo light is ahead 10. To east tangent Verde Island, bearing 179°; 1J4 miles 31° from NE . point of island (6).— VERDE ISLAND TO aAN BERNARDINO STRAIT (from posi- tion 10a). 11. To Baltasar Island, highest point, 2>4 miles distant 12. To Bugui Point light, distant 1% miles 13. To Bugui Point light, bearing 254°, distant 7V 2 miles 14. To San Miguel Island light, bearing 180°, distant 1 mile. Bagatao light will be picked up right ahead 15. To a position about 5 miles 0° of the western side of San Andres Island, with Capul Island light bearing 90° and Calantas Eock light bearing 69° 16. To a position 1 mile off Capul Island light 17. To San Bernardino Island light, 1 mile distant (C).— VERDE ISLAND TO ILOILO— FIRST ROUTE (from position 10a). 11. To Mount Dumali, bearing 247°, distant 5 miles 12. To Maniquin Island light, distant 3 miles 13. To Nogas Island light, distant 3 miles 14. To Nogas Island light, bearing 0°, distant 2$4 miles 15. To a posit ion with Bondulan Point, bearing 36°, and Lusaran Pomt light, bearing 177°, distant 4 miles 16. To Cabalic Point, distant & mile 17. To red gas buoy, bearing 36°, distant 200 yards; the twin spires and the white dome of the church in Molo will bear 4° (black buoy C3 will be passed close- to on port hand) 18. To a position with Fort San Pedro open of Bondulan Point . 19. To Bondulan Point, distant % mile. Fort San Pedro ahead. 20. To flashing red light, distant % mile 21. To recommended anchorage >■ Id). — VERDE ISLAND TO ILOILO— SECOND ROUTE (from position 10a). 11. To western end Simara Island, distant 2 miles, Cobrador Island light bearing 114° 12. To a position within 2 miles of Cobrador Island light 13. To south end Eomblon Island, distant 5 miles 14. To Cresta de Gallo Island, distant 7 miles 15. To Jrntotolo Island light, bearing 0°, distant 2 miles 16. To Manigonigo Island light, distant 8 miles; Gigante light ahead, distant 7fc> miles 17. To Gigante light, distant 1 mile .--- IS. To north end Uaydajon Island, bearing 266°, in range with Gigante light just disappearing, distant 1 mile Degrees. 273 220 199 181 164 133 91 66 242 221 221 200 180 180 149 122 121 110 110 65 122 90 27 174M 174J4 128 72 33 47* 63 14 133 115 181 132 121 125 118 118 Degreet. 273 220 199 180 163 132 90 241 220 220 199 179 179 148 121 88 120 109 109 64 121 132 173 173 127 71 37 Nautical mike. 83 18 140 31 65 33 6J4 27J4 13H Wi m i'A 9H 10H 18 12}* 47 91«4 6 15Ji 18M 40H 92H 71H 4 3% 5 132 74 114 12 180 12 131 35 120 33 124 10 117 7M Nautical miles. 404U 321^ 303"^ 163M 132^ 6714 34l| 13H 23 25M ft 42"4 51M 80^ 117 231J- 237). 289$ 308 ma 225?i 297Ji 301& 335»4 340»i 342^ 342^ 344J* 346J* 347 166Ji 178% 190V 22554 258M 26854 276jJ 278 36 GENERAL INFORMATION - . General routes — Continued. Course. True. Magnetic. Distance. Distance from Manila. 30. (d).— VERDE ISLAND TO ILOILO— SECOND ROUTE (from posi- tion 10a)— Continued. To south end Antonia Island, distant 2 miles To a position with Baliguian Island light, bearing 180°; south end Sicogon Island, bearing 253°, distant 5 miles To a position 1*4 miles off Baliguian light To Calabazas light, bearing 270°, distant S miles To Calabazas light, bearing 270°, distant 2 miles To lighted black buoy off Tomonton shoal, distant M mile.. To a position with Siete Pecados light, bearing 273'' To black buoy 01, % mile distant To black buoy C3, fi mile distant To Siete Pecados light, K mile distant, with Jaro Church tower bearing 246 . To a position with Fort San Pedro and Bondulan Point in range, bearing 219° To anchorage northward of the mouth of river in 15 fathoms of water , («).— VERDE ISLAND TO CEBU— FIRST ROUTE (from position 16d). 17- IS. 19. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. To Gigante light, bearing 180°, distant 1 mile To Tanguingui light, bearing ISO", distant 1% miles To Chocolate Islet, bearing 225°, distant % mile To Malapascua light, bearmg 0°, distant 3 miles To Capitancillo light, bearmg 90°, distant 2 miles To Managao Point, distant 3miles; Capitancillo light bears 0' To Danao Point, distant 4 miles; Bagacay light bears 214°. To Bagacay Point light, bearmg 268 , distant 1J^ miles To beacon on edge of reef NE of Bantolinao Point, bearmg 179°, distant % mile; Bantolinao light ahead To Bantolinao light, bearmg 77 °, distant H mile To red nun buoy N8, distant 110 yards; Bound Tower, Man- daue bears 298° ' , To Opon flashing green light, distant 175 yards , To an anchorage east of town, San Pedro Fort light a little on starboard bow , (/).— VERDE ISLAND TO CEBU— SECOND ROUTE, VIA BLACK ROCK pass (from position 12b). 13. To Colorada Point light, bearmg 180°, distant 5 miles 14. To Tatus Island, bearing 90°, distant J£ mile; Argos Point light ahead 15. To Argos light, bearmg 20°, a mile distant (light a ilttle abaft the beam) 16. To Argos light, distant % mile 17. To a position with Mount Calumpan on Candulan Point, bearmg 180°, and Argos light, bearing 273° 18. To Bugtung Island (highest part), distant 4Ji miles ALTERNATE ROUTE VIA TICAO PASS (from position 14b). To San Jacinto light, distant 3% miles To Bugtung Island (highest part), distant 4i£ miles. 19. To Malapascua Island tight, bearing 270°, distant 2 : 20. To Capitancillo light, bearing 90°, distant 2 miles Continue as on first route. Total distance to Cebu miles.. NOQAS LIQHT TO ZAMBOANQA, (from position 13c). 1. To Caldera Point, distant 5 miles; Santa Cruz Island light bears 119° 2. To a position off flashing red light on Zamboanga wharf Degrees. 189 198 181 237 270 228 212 274 274 24 7^ 216 119 111 121 121 187 164 181 204 229 242 236 243 236 110 127 131 91 91 146 125 152 181 191 180 107 Degrees. 188 197 180 236 269 227 211 273 273 292 215 118 110 120 120 186 163 180 203 228 241 235 242 235 109 126 130 90 90 145 124 151 180 180 -178 105 Nautical miles. Shi 16M 3 12H 12*1 ft 7 23 23J4 18j| 7 •22% IK IK IK 7K 28K 28Ji 13 47J* 34M 21K Nautical miles. 283H 303!4 315% 32% 335}| 347M 349H 352$| 354M 356% 361% 275% 298% 322)| 325 343tf 350^ 373 380H 384^ 385M 239 267^ 270% 270J6 275 303% 265% 313^ 337% 406% 505 517 ISLANDS AND CHANNELS NOETH to LUZON. 37 ISLANDS AND CHANNELS NORTH OF LUZON. Taiwan (Formosa) Island. — Goaram Pii (Nansha or South Cape), the southern extremity of the Island of Taiwan, is the usual landfall of northward-bound vessels from the Philippine Islands. An iso- lated rock, with deep water around, stands up boldly close to the southeastern point. At 4 miles northwestward of the cape is a. peculiarly rugged hill 1,035 feet high, from which the land slopes down gradually to the cape, the whole, with the exception of a few clearings, being densely wooded. Farther northward is a double- peaked mountain about 2,000 feet high. A fixed white light with a red sector — visible 20 miles — is exhibited 180 feet above high water from a white circular lighthouse on Goaram Pii. In answer to a vessel's fog signal, two guns are fired with an in- terval of 3 minutes between them, and if the vessel's fog signal is still heard the firing is repeated after an interval of 8 minutes. Vele Rete Rocks, about 9 miles southward of Goaram Pii (South Cape), Taiwan, are a group of rocks about 1 mile in extent, above and below water. The three highest, lying northwest and southeast from each other, are 15 to 25 feet above the sea. The depths near the rocks are from 39 to 78 fathoms, except off the southern side, where at a distance of y 2 mile the depth is 17 fathoms. In bad weather the sea breaks heavily over these rocks. The channel between the rocks and Taiwan is safe, but very heavy tide rips, resembling the sea breaking over a shoal, "are frequently experienced nearly the whole distance between them and the land. Bashi Channel is between the Batan Islands and the Island of Tai- wan and connects the Pacific Ocean with the China Sea. This chan- nel, frequently used by sailing vessels when making the eastern pas- sage to China and Manila and sometimes by steamers trading be- tween the United States, Japan, and Manila, is 56 miles wide between Y'Ami Island, of the Batan Group, and Little Botel Tobago Island, lying east of the south point of Taiwan Island, but its navigable width is much contracted by the dangerous Gadd Rock and Forest Belle Bock, which must be remembered when sea room is necessary to avoid the track of a typhoon. Fokest Belle Bock, with a depth less than 6 feet, lies 6 miles southward of Little Botel Tobago Island. Gadd Rock lies 14 miles southward of Little Botel Tobago Island, and in the fairway of Bashi Channel, is about 100 yards across, with a least depth of 10 feet, and 30 to 40 fathoms close around, deepening to 69 and 127 fathoms within 1 mile. At low water the sea probably breaks, but the locality is generally covered by violent tide rips and swirls, which extend more or less the whole distance to Vele Rete Rocks, off the south point of Taiwan Island. These indications of its position are not always visible, and the vicinity of this danger should, therefore, be avoided. Heavy overfalls and discolored water have been passed through about 11 miles southward of Gadd Rock; no soundings were obtained, and bottom could not be seen from aloft; from this it seems probable that the tide rips and swirls extend southward of Gadd Rock. 38 ISLANDS AND CHANNELS NORTH OF LUZON. Bashi Rocks, the existence of which is considered doubtful, are shown on the charts as being in approximate latitude 21° 12' N, longitude 122° 06' E. Capt. Sir E. Belcher, of H. M. S. Samarang, searched unsuccessfully for them, and states that they have no exist- ence in the position assigned them on the chart, nor in the visual radius from the masthead of the ship, 108 feet above the sea. BATAN ISLANDS lie northward of the Babuyan Islands, and consist of a chain of islands, mostly high, extending from latitude 20° 17' N to 21° 06' N; the channels among them are thought to be safe and free from danger. The physical characteristics of the larger islands indicate volcanic origin. Itbayat, Batan, and Sabtang are particularly mountainous, with in- tervening valleys and plains sloping to the shore and well watered by small rivers. The smaller islands are generally low and rest on coral foundations. The climate of these islands is noted for its salubrity. The inhabitants possess many of the characteristics of the native races of Taiwan, and their peculiar language increases their exclusiveness. This has been strengthened by the ocean cur- rents and consequent difficulties of intercourse with the mainland of Luzon southward. The chief industry is raising cattle, hogs, horses, and goats, which grow to a large size, and, on account of their superior quality, are exported in large numbers to the mainland. ■ Y'Ami Island, the northern island of the Batan Group, is about 1 mile in extent, moderately high, and has an islet lying off its south- west point. North Island, lying iy 2 miles south-southwestward of Y'Ami, is high and steep, except off its eastern side, where three islets and some detached rocks extend 200 yards. The channel between Y'Ami and North Island is safe, and shows soundings with rocky bottom, but too deep for anchorage. Mabudis Island, lying Sy 2 miles southward of North Island, is about lYz miles long in a northeast and southwest direction, high and steep-to. The channel between it and North Island is wide and free from danger, except that breakers have been reported about 2^ miles 229° (229° mag.) from North Island. Siayan Island, lying about 1 mile south-southwestward of Mabudis Island, is about y 2 kuJ& m diameter and has several detached rocks off its northeast side, rendering the channel between it and Mabudis unsafe. Itbayat Island, the largest of the group, lies 4 miles south-south- westward of Siayan and 14 miles north-northwestward of Batan. It is about 8 miles long in a north-northeast and opposite direction, and has an area of 26 square miles. Mount Santa Rosa, at the north end, is 800 feet high, and Mount Biposet, in the southeastern part, is 900 feet high. The island, from seaward, presents a barren outline, defying debarkation to any but those acquainted with the locality, and is, moreover, without an- chorage; the interior is, however, highly cultivated and exhibits many patches of good timber trees. The waters in the vicinity of the BATAN ISLANDS. 39 island have not been sounded. Vessels desiring to communicate with Itbayat may obtain a pilot at Basco, on Batan. A late report states that anchorage may be found westward of the south end of the island in 20 -fathoms, sandy bottom, well protected from northeast winds and with sufficient swinging room in case the wind should haul to the southward and westward. Diogo Island is a small, round island over 1,800 feet high about % mile in diameter, lying 3% miles southeastward of Itbayat Island. It is steep-to on the western side but has several small islets lying off the eastern side, the outermost being nearly y 2 mile distant. In 1903 Diogo Island was observed to be volcanic, discharging vapor and dark material. Batan Island (chart 4270) is the second in size and the most import- ant of the group. Mount Irada, apparently an old volcano, thickly covered with trees, is at the northeast end of the island and 3,806 feet high; the rest of the island is mountainous and has several broad cultivated spots. There are several small towns and villages, the principal one, Basco, is on the west side of the island at the foot of Mount Irada. It is well built of stone and is prominent. Pilots for the other islands of the group may be obtained here. Commercial steamers from Aparri visit these islands three or four times a year. Anchorage. — There is anchorage off Basco, the best berth being off the northern point of the bay, with the convent barely open, in 13 fathoms, bottom fine coral sand. This, however, is not very secure with a northerly wind. Anchorage for small vessels may also be had closer in, about 200 yards offshore, in 5y 2 fathoms, bottom fine sand, with the southern part of the town and the southeastern foot of Mount Irada in line, bearing 90° (90° mag.). Although the holding ground is good, this bay can be resorted to only in the northeast monsoon. A patch of rocks, bare at low water, lies 800 yards north-northeast- ward of Chaguie Point, the south point of the bay. They have 27 fathoms close-to on the west and 4^4 fathoms on the east side, and 200 yards east-northeastward of the point is a rock awash at low water. The authorities recommend the anchorage off Mahatao (San Car- los) , y 2 mile southward of Chaguie Point, as the best for obtaining a supply of water, but this position is exposed, and watering can only be effected in fine weather. The passage through the reef is, however, quite safe for the largest boats, which land on a sandy beach. This passage has been cut to admit schooners of 50 tons, which are gen- erally hauled up when they arrive from Manila with the first of the southwest monsoon. Anchorage may be had off San Vicente, which is the port of Ivana, or landing place for that town. It should not be resorted to, as it is very confined, with sandy bottom close to the reefs, and must be left the moment a northerly wind threatens. Several vessels have been driven off and, being unable to weigh their anchors, have had to cut or slip. Anchorage may also be had off the town of Uyugan (San An- tonio), 1 mile eastward of Point Mabien, in 8 fathoms, about 200 yards off shore, with the church bearing 45° (45° mag.). 40 ISLANDS AND CHANNELS NOBTH OF LUZON. Sonson or Chaampaan Bay, as it is called by the natives, is the northern of the two large bays on the eastern side of Batan. It has not been thoroughly surveyed, but is reported to afford good sheltered anchorage during the southwest monsoon. The southern entrance to the bay is a prominent black bluff, southward from which is a group of high rocks. The beach at the landing, under the gap in the hills, is composed of small water-worn rocks, slopes abruptly, and has 3 or 4 feet of water close-to. From the landing a good trail leads to the town of Basco, about iy 2 miles distant. Directions. — Approaching from northward, round the north end of the island at a distance of about y 2 mile and steer for the promi- nent black bluff on the southern entrance point until a conspicuous gap in the hills westward bears 285° (285° mag.), when it should be steered for and anchorage in 7 or 8 fathoms, rocky bottom, will be found about y 2 mile from shore; from this anchorage the group of rocks southward of the bluff will be just open of it, bearing 217° (217° mag.). Mananion Bay, southward of Sonson Bay, is reported to afford anchorage sheltered from westerly winds, but has not been surveyed. It is impossible to land anything in Mananion Bay, as the shores rise perpendicularly to a height of about 150 feet. This side of the island is practically uninhabited. Sabtang Island is separated from the southwest end of Batan by a safe channel over 2 miles wide, through which the tidal currents run with a velocity of from 5 to 6 knots, the flood setting southeastward and the ebb northwestward. Off the north end of Sabtang are two rocky ledges with a passage between them of 10 to 14 fathoms. These rocks have only .3 feet on them at spring tides. Between them and Sabtang is a deep channel y 2 mile wide. Sapiang (San Vicente) is substantially built of stone and lies on the northeast side of the island. Good sheltered anchorage during the southwest monsoon may be found off the town, with the church bear- ing 225° (225° mag.), in 10 or 12 fathoms, sandy bottom. The depths decrease gradually from 15 fathoms about y 2 mile offshore to 6 and 8 fathoms, about 150 yards from the beach. Ibugos Island is small and rather low, except a hill on the south end, where there is a settlement. It is separated from the west side of Sabtang by a deep channel nearly 1 mile wide, which affords indiffer- ent anchorage in 10 fathoms, bottom rocky, with sandy patches, with the center of Ibugos Island bearing 225° (225° mag.). The flood tide sets southward with a velocity of from 3 to 4 knots, and the ebb northward. There are no facilities for watering ; the stream from the rivulet inside the southwest point of Sabtang, entering at the coral beach near the barrio of Suminanga (San Luis), is at least 100 yards from where boats could float. This is the only safe landing place, the shores on both sides of the channel being bordered by a reef, through some of the gaps in which the native boats can pass in fine weather. Dequez Island, very small and rather low, lies nearly y 2 mile west- ward of the northwest point of Ibugos Island. It is clear westward and can be approached within a mile with safety, but has a very strong tide rip setting northward on its southwest side. BABUYAN ISLANDS. 41 Directions. — As the current sets strongly southward between the above islands during the northeast monsoon, it is advisable for a sailing vessel to work westerly round Dequez and not to cross the channel between Batan and Sabtang until the dividing neck of Mahatao (San Carlos) is clearly open, bearing east-southeast, as the stream, splitting at Mabatui Point, sends one current southerly ; the other, which is an eddy, is favorable from thence northeasterly to Basco. Sailing vessels bound to this latter anchorage work up the north- west angle of the island until the wind is free to run down, when round-to with all aback and drop the inner anchor in 12 fathoms; then sheer and drop the outer anchor in 25 fathoms, which will afford sufficient room to weigh. When moored the vessel will be in 15 fathoms and the current will keep a fair strain on both cables. Balintang Channel, between Sabtang, the southernmost of the Batan Islands, and Babuyan Island, is 43 miles wide, and, being free from danger, is frequently used by vessels proceeding by the eastern passages to China and Manila. Balintang Islands lie in the eastern part of Balintang Channel, with Mount Irada bearing 348° (348° mag.) and the west tangent to Babuyan Island, 205° (205° mag.). They consist of four small, sharp-peaked, rocky islets, visible about 24 miles in clear weather. The westernmost island, showing three peaks, is about % mile in a north and south direction and is much larger than the others; a hole is seen through it from southwestward. One of the other islets lies off its northern point; and the other two, about 75 feet high, off its southeast side. They are steep-to and may be passed on either side at a distance of 2 or 3 miles. In bad weather the sea breaks heavily against them. It has been reported that these islands lie about 3 miles farther south than shown on the chart. THE BABUYAN ISLANDS named Babuyan, Pannitan, Calayan, Dalupiri, Fuga, and Camiguin, form a roughly circular group lying northward of the channel along the north coast of Luzon and south of the Balintang Channel. The channels between them are said to be safe and deep and their shores generally steep-to, but, as these islands have not been surveyed, they should be approached with caution. Babuyan Island, the northernmost and highest of the group, lies about 27 miles south-southwestward of Balintang Islands, and about 55 miles northward of Cape Engafio Lighthouse. It is about 8 miles long in a northeast and southwest direction, with an average width of about 6 miles. Near the western point is a volcano, about 2,200 feet high, and in the eastern part another about 3,800 feet high, between which the mountains are much lower, so that from a considerable dis- tance eastward it appears as a round mountain with a detached hum- mock northward. The island seems to be steep all around and ap- parently affords no anchorage. A reef projects from its western point. The south point is steep and rocky with a black, rocky, sugar- loaf islet, Pan de Azucar, close inshore. Wyllie Books, consisting of two clusters above water, with high breakers between them, are dangerous to vessels passing through the Babuyan Group at night. The southernmost rock, which is the 42 ISLANDS AND CHANNELS NORTH OF LUZON. largest, lies about 6 miles northeastward of Panuitan Islet. The other cluster lies about 3 miles north-northeastward of the largest rock. The chart shows sunken rocks between Panuitan and the Wyllie Rocks. Calayan Island, lying about 24 miles west-southwest of Babuyan Island, is formed of mountainous and uneven land, highest in the center, with Tow gaps in places. It is steep-to, without any safe anchorage and is visible 45 miles in clear weather. Temporary an- chorage may be had off the village of Calayan, in the southeastern part of the island, about 150 yards offshore in 14 fathoms, bottom sand and coral. From the anchorage the stone building in the village bears 11° (11° mag.) and the 5-foot rock about 146° (146° mag.). The 5-foot rock shown on the chart is very prominent and breakers show ^4 mile outside of it. There are rocks above water about 1 mile from the south points of Calayan. Panuitan Islet is a small islet lying about iy 2 miles off the northeast point of Calayan Island. Dalupiri Island, the westernmost of the group, lies about 20 miles south-southwestward of Calayan Island. The north point of the island is reported to extend about 3 miles farther north than shown on the chart. Tide rips extend several miles north of the point. The island has a regular aspect and is visible about 30 miles. In smooth weather anchorage can be had on the east side of the island, close inshore, -but the holding ground is poor. Some cattle are shipped from the island. About 2y 2 miles off its south point is Irao Islet, with shoals extend- ing southward. Herminia Shoal is a coral shoal about 2y 2 miles off the southwest part of Dalupiri Island and 4 miles northwestward of Irao Islet. No information is available as to the depth over this shoal. Fuga Island, about 8 miles southward and eastward of Dalupiri Island, is about 10 miles long east and west with an average width of about 2 miles. It is moderately high and terminates in low land at the eastern part. Two small islands, Mabac and Bari, lie off its western end. The soundings off its southern side are irregular, the depths in some places permitting temporary anchorage in smooth weather. Musa Bay (chart 4270) , between the western end of Fuga Island and Bari and Mabac Islands, is a rather circular basin about 1 mile wide by iy 2 miles long. Although sheltered from the sea, the holding ground is poor and the anchorage has been reported unsafe in heavy northeast weather. The depths are 12 to 17 fathoms in the middle, shoaling to 4 and 5 fathoms near the coral reef that lines the shores. The best anchorage is near the northeast side of Bari Island in from 14 to 15 fathoms, bottom rotten coral and sand. Near Fuga Island the bottom is very rocky. Bari Island has a reef lying off the north and east sides and another projecting from the southeast point. A narrow shoal ledge has been reported as extending about % mile in a northwest direction from Mabac Island. The best channel into the bay is from southward, between Bari and the west point of Fuga, the depths being from 14 to 16 fathoms outside and froim 9 to 12 fathoms in mid-channel. The west channel into the bay is between Bari and Mabac, with soundings of from 5 to 10 fathoms. The north channel into the bay is rendered intricate BABUYAN ISLANDS. 43 by a reef extending halfway across from the northeast point of Mabac toward Fuga, and at the tail of this reef,. joining the north- west point of Fuga, is a rocky patch with 5 or 6 fathoms on it. This channel, therefore, should not be attempted unless in a case of neces- sity, and to enter by it a vessel must pass rather close to Fuga. The tide rises in Musa Bay 5 or 6 feet, but is irregular, and the tidal current runs with considerable velocity. Camiguin, the southeastern island of the group, is about 12 miles in extent north-northeast and south-southwest, 2,747 feet high, and lies 21 miles northwestward of Cape Engafio. Its shores in some places are bordered with coral rocks having from 30 to 35 fathoms, about y 2 mile off, and the land is low close to the sea along its eastern and northern sides. The southern part of this island is 2,417 feet high, formerly a volcano. Westward of this mountain some steep white cliffs face the sea, about 2 miles southward of Port San Pio Quinto. Port San Pio Quinto (chart 4270) may be considered the only place among these islands tolerably safe for a large ship, for the bottom is not so rocky as in Musa Bay, Fuga Island. The port is about 3 miles wide and 1% miles deep, is situated a little southward of the middle of the west side of Camiguin Island, and is sheltered from westward by Font Islet, which lies in the middle of the entrance. This islet is high, about •% mile in diameter, steep-to to seaward, and has on each side a safe channel leading to the port. The south channel, iy 2 miles wide, with 40 fathoms at the en- trance, decreasing gradually inside, is between the islet and the south point of the port, which, with an islet near it, has the color of iron, and there is a boiling spring of salt water a little southward. The north channel, between Font Islet and north point of the port, is about 1 mile wide, with 28 and 30 fathoms at the entrance, and 17 and 18 fathoms inside ; but a rocky patch of only 6 or 8 fathoms lies nearer the islet than mid-channel, and a coral reef projects about % mile from the north point of the entrance. The bottom in the chan- nels and in the port is mostly soft sand, with a little coral in some places, and the soundings decrease gradually to the shore. The best anchorage is in 15 or 16 fathoms eastward of Font Islet, abreast a small rivulet of fresh water, which bears east-northeast from Font Islet. The U. S. S. Yorktown found good anchorage 1 mile southeast of the above-recommended anchorage. Guinapac Rocks lie about 10 miles east by south from the north point of Camiguin and consist of two rocks like towers, one larger than the other, with smaller rocks contiguous. There are no soundings within a short distance of their eastern side; between them and Camiguin is a channel 6 miles wide, which is safe on the island side. A submerged rock, on which the IT. S. S. Charleston was wrecked, is reported to lie i% miles north from Guinapac Eocks, with foul ground between. Didicas Rocks, about 7 miles northeastward of the Guinapac Rocks, are a group of four sharp-pointed rocks, much higher than the latter, and from a distance appear like ships under sail. They are 2 miles in extent northeast and southwest, and among them are many rocks of various sizes, which render their approach dangerous in light 44 LUZON. winds, for the current runs strongly northward in the southwest mon- soon, producing ripplings like breakers in the vicinity of and among these dangers, and there are no soundings near them where a vessel could anchor in case of necessity. The chart shows a volcanic islet, 700 feet high, on the northwestern edge of this group. Duguay Trouin Shoal. — According to the statement of the master of the French bark Duguay Trouin, a shoal awash exists about 150 miles 79° (79° mag.) from Cape Engaiio. This was formerly shown on the chart in latitude 19° 05' N, longitude 124° 43' E (existence , doubtful). Anson or Clare Eeef. — Information is wanting about this danger, which was formerly shown on the charts as lying in latitude 17° 35' N, longitude 124° 50' E (position doubtful). Directions. — Babuyan Channel between Cape Engaiio and Camiguin Island, lying northwestward, is 20 miles wide and clear of danger. As the current sets strongly northward in the southwest monsoon, it will be prudent for those proceeding eastward from this coast with light winds-to keep on the south side of the channel to prevent being drifted northward near the Guinapac and Didicas Kocks, which lie northeastward of Camiguin Island. LUZON is the largest island of the Philippines. It extends from north to south, with a curve toward the east, between latitudes 18° 40' and "12° 32' north, and has a length of about 420 miles (484 statute miles} , with a width varying from 8 to 120 miles (9 to 138 statute miles). It has a very irregular outline, with a length of general shore line about 1,946 miles (2,242 statute miles). Its area is about 40,969 square statute miles, being nearly the same as the State of Kentucky. The population of Luzon is about half that of the entire Philippine Archipelago. Ranges of mountains, running in general parallel with the length of the island, give it a mountainous character. North of latitude 16° there are two chains, an eastern and a western, separated by the great valley of the Cagayan River. The eastern range, known as the Sierra Madre, is continuous and lofty and forms a bold and almost inaccessible shore, exposed to the full force of the northeast monsoon and the waves of the Pacific. There are a number of iso- lated volcanic peaks in southern Luzon. NORTH COAST. OF LUZON. Cape Engaiio is the northern point of Palaui Island, a small, high, prominent island lying close to the northeastern extremity of Luzon. A group occulting white light, visible 15 miles, is shown 315 feet above high water from a graystone tower surrounded by dwellings and storehouses on the summit of the cape. Palaui Island is 5 miles in extent, moderately high, and lies off the northwestern part of a large promontory which forms the northeastern extremity of Luzon ; the port of San Vicente is formed between Palaui Island and the coast. The western shore of the island appears bold, but a reef projects from its eastern side for iy 2 miles, the edge KTOETH COAST OF LUZON". 45 of it being y 2 mile from and extending around the small islet Escucha. The Hermaaos Islets lie off Cape Engano, and there are some rocks off the northeast point of the island, about 1 mile eastward of the cape. Gran Laja, as formerly described in the sailing directions, is said not to exist, but a low rock surrounded by breakers is in about the posi- tion assigned to it. The two rocks said to be about 2y 2 miles 101° (101° mag.) from Gran Laja were not seen by the U. S. S. Scmar, though this vessel passed several times close to the assigned position of the rocks. Engano Cove is a small cove southwest of the lighthouse, where supplies are usually landed. Small vessels may find good anchorage in this cove, protected except in northwesterly and westerly winds, steering in for a beacon, consisting of a pole with several hori- zontal slats, all painted white, on a 111° (lll p mag.) bearing, and anchoring in from 10 to 12 fathoms of water. Port San Vicente (chart 4263) , as a place of refuge for vessels during typhoon weather, is the best harbor in northern Luzon, and, in fact, the only thoroughly protected one. It is also resorted to by vessels bound to Aparri when the bar at the mouth of the Cagayan River is too rough to be crossed. Vessels should not attempt to enter this harbor from eastward, as the rocks and shoals on that side make it dangerous to do so. The entrance from westward may, however, be made without difficulty. Puerto Point is a high, wooded bluff at the southwest end of Palaui Island ; Eona Island is a low, wooded island with a white base of sand and rocks, and Escucha Island is high and wooded, beyond Eona Island when seen from southwestward through the channel between Palaui Island and the mainland. There is foul ground from west to east between Puerto Point and the south end of San Vicente Island. Trueno Shoal is believed not to exist, as the steamer captains using this harbor say that they have never seen it, and the U. S. S. Wheeling passed over its supposed position and saw no sign of it. A fixed red light is shown from a concrete pedestal oh the eastern extremity of the reef extending eastward of San Vicente Island. This light may be passed close-to on its eastern side. A red buoy, about 350 yards southeastward of the light tower, marks the shoal extending westward from Nulton Point. Directions — Outer Harbor. — Vessels from northward should not skirt Palaui Island too closely; pass about % mile southward from Puerto Point and stand eastward until nearly south of San Vicente Island when Escucha and Eona Islands will be seen in the opening between Palaui Island and Luzon. Good anchorage will be found in the outer harbor with the above two islands in range bearing 36° (36° mag.) and Puerto Point 277° (277° mag.) in about 7 fathoms, muddy bottom. This anchorage is exposed to west and southwest winds. The Inner Harbor is a small cove with an anchorage area about % mile in diameter, practically landlocked, with depths of from 4 to 4?/ 2 fathoms, muddy bottom. The channel in entering is about 300 yards wide in its narrowest part, west of Nulton Point, where it is contracted by a shoal covered by from 3 to 4 feet. This is marked by a red nun buoy in 5 fathoms off its western edge. From the recom- mended anchorage in the outer harbor steer for the lighthouse and around its southern and eastern sides at a distance of from 150 to 200 yards and anchor ^ mile north-northwestward from it in 4 or 4*4 46 LUZ05T. fathoms. The red buoy may be passed close-to, allowing more room to make the turn around the lighthouse. The flood sets northeastward and the ebb southwestward. A current of from 3 to. 4 knots may be expected off the lighthouse. Nulton Point, about y 2 mile eastward of San Vicente Island and opposite the entrance to the inner harbor, is low. From the anchorage off San Vicente Island to the mouth of the Cagayan River the coast trends in a west-by-south direction, with a bend southward, for about 30 miles. The large bay between these two points appears to be free from danger. From Batulinao Point to Aparri, about 27 miles, the coast is low, with sand beach. The Cagayan River is the largest river in Luzon. The bar at its mouth generally has -from 15 to 18 feet over it at low tide, and the channel is continually changing with the currents caused by the river and the winds. The bar should not be attempted without a pilot. Pilotage for the port of Aparri is compulsory, and pilots are always in attendance when it is possible for vessels to enter (see appendix, p. 340, for special regulations). At times during the northeast mon- soon the bar is impassable, and vessels are obliged to seek shelter in Port San Vicente until the weather moderates. Vessels awaiting a pilot may drop an anchor under foot, or keep under way, taking care to keep Linao light bearing southward of 270° (270° mag.) and the church in Aparri southward of 146° (146° mag.). Linao lighthouse (a cylindrical iron tower standing alongside a white stone dwelling) is near the town of Linao on the western side of the mouth of the Caga- yan River. It stands about % mile from the river and about % mile from the sea; and from a distance the tower and dwelling appear as a single large white rectangular building. The light shows one white flash every second, is visible 11 miles, and is 36 feet above high water. A red buoy is northeastward of the foul ground on the west- ern side of the approach to the entrance to the Cagayan River. Owing to its exposed position this buoy is liable to drag and there- fore it should be passed with caution. Aparri (chart 4260), the principal port in northern Luzon, is on the eastern side of the mouth of the Cagayan River and is Very promi- nent. The best anchorage off Aparri for vessels which do not intend to cross the bar is in 10 or 12 fathoms, sand and mud bottom, with the church in Aparri bearing 180° (180° mag.) and Linao light bear- ing 247° (247° mag.). The usual anchorage for vessels after entering the river is in the western channel opposite the town of Aparri. The eastern channel in front of the town can be entered only by small craft and usually only from upstream. Twelve feet can be carried 12 miles up the Cagayan River to Lallo, which is the head of navigation for seagoing vessels. At times freshets occur, causing the river to rise rapidly, so that it is necessary to take precautions against the velocity of the current and the debris brought down by the river. From the mouth of the Cagayan River the coast, which is low and sandy, trends northwesterly for 14 and 17 miles to the mouths of the small rivers, Abulug and Pamplona, and thence 14 miles farther in the same direction to Pata Point. A sand bank, on which the sea breaks heavily in bad weather extends a considerable distance off the mouths NORTH COAST OF LUZON. 47 of the Abulug and Pamplona Kivers. This is the only known danger on this part of the coast. Pata Point is a knoll 125 feet high with a small detached ridge back of it. A light, visible 18 miles, is shown from the top of a small con- crete dwelling on the ridge back of Pata Point. From Pata Point to Mairaira Point, 18 miles westward, the coast is bold and clear, with two deep bays between them. In the eastern one, at the mouth of the Cabicungan Eiver, is the small town of Claveria, containing a church and convent with iron roofs, which are prominent. Anchorage may be taken in this bay, near the shore, in from 5 to 15 fathoms, sandy bottom, with shelter except in northerly winds. Pasaleng, the western and larger of the two bays, has two small towns on its shore, but affords no protected anchorage. Mairaira Point, about 20 miles northeastward of Cape Bojeador, is the most northern point of the island of Luzon. The charts have shown a number of shoal patches, with from By 2 to 5 fathoms over them, extending about 1 mile northward of the point, which is fringed by a narrow reef. It has been reported that these shoals do not ex- tend as far as stated above, but in the absence of detailed surveys the point should be given a good berth. About 1 mile southeast of the point are two rocky cones with several smaller outlying rocks. Dialao Point, about 4 miles west-southwest of Mairaira Point, is low, rounding, covered with trees, and fringed by a narrow coral reef and a bright sand beach. Behind it is a small but prominent ridge, 500 to 600 feet high,, parallel to the coast, almost bare of trees, and reddish in color. This is the only reddish ridge in the vicinity and is visible for a considerable distance. Negra Point, a black, rocky point, lies about 10 miles west-southwest of Dialao Point, and between the two a deep indentation extends 4 miles southward, forming Bangui Bay, where anchorage sheltered from all except northerly winds may be had. There is much foul ground in the eastern part of Bangui Bay. The town of Bangui, lying close to the beach at the head of the bay, is not visible from the sea, being completely obscured by trees. From Burayoc Point, 2% miles southward of Dialao Point to a point about 2y 2 miles east of Negra Point, the shore is low and fringed by a sandy beach. From the end of the sand beach and extending around Cape Bojeador the coast is rocky and fringed by reefs. A great deal of this coast to a point west of the lighthouse is a rocky cliff. Cape Bojeador, the northwestern extremity of Luzon, is about 300 feet high near the lighthouse, sloping down to the shore and rising southeastward to a mountain ridge, with summit bare of trees. It is surrounded by a reef which extends northeastward to Negra Point and southward beyond Dirique Inlet. A shoal having a least-known depth of 2V2 fathoms has been reported about 1 mile westward of the extreme point, and passing vessels are recommended to give the ex- tremity of the cape a berth of at least 2 miles. A light, visible 26 miles, is shown 386 feet above high water from a white octagonal tower on the summit of a hill % mile eastward of the northwest extremity of the cape and 700 yards from shore. 48 WEST COAST OF LUZOK. WEST COAST OF LUZON. CAPE BOJEADOE TO LINGAYEN GULP. Southward from Cape Bojeador the coast is fringed by reefs as far as 3 miles south of Dirique Inlet. Nagabungan Cove is an inlet southward of Cape Bojeador, where it is said that the Spanish lights house tender landed supplies, but it is too small to afford swinging room except for very small vessels. Dirique Inlet (chart 4270), affords good anchorage for small craft in the northeast monsoon in a basin about 300 yards in diameter, sheltered from all winds except southwest. Large vessels may anchor outside of the inlet in 15 fathoms, with Bojeador Light bearing 23° (23° mag.). Range marks. — The following range marks for entering the inlet have been established : Front range, a diamond-shaped slat- work bea- con painted white, with a vertical black stripe through the center; rear range, a triangular slat-work beacon painted white, with a ver- tical black stripe through the center. These marks in range bearing 45° (45° mag.) lead in clear of the reefs to an anchorage in 10 fathoms. From Dirique Inlet the coast is low, with sandy shore for 15 miles southward to Mount Cauit, at the mouth of the Laoag River, the country some distance in the interior being very high. Anchorage can be found along this coast during the northeast monsoon. The chain of high mountains inland, which commences near San Fabian, on Lingayen Gulf, extends parallel to the coast, gradually diminishing in height and trending inland about 24 miles south of Cape Bojeador. Mount Cauit, 18 miles southward of Cape Bojeador, is a grassy sand hill, 299 feet high, with some trees on the crest, near the shore on the right bank of the Laoag River ; its highest point is nearly central and . rises like a nipple. It is a conspicuous landmark, being the only con- siderable elevation near the coast line in this vicinity. Laoag.— The important town of Laoag lies 4% miles up the Laoag River. The mouth of the river is closed by a bar only passable by boats, the landing being a little over % mile from the mouth. From here there is a good road to the town. There is telegraphic com- munication with Manila. A good anchorage off Laoag River may be found by bringing Mount Cauit to bear 45° (45° mag.) and steering for it, anchoring in 7 fathoms, sandy bottom, when Culili Point bears 204° (204° mag.). On this bearing Laoag River is open and in range with Mount Cauit. In case the weather is not suitable for anchoring off Laoag River a berth may be taken up off Currimao. From Mount Cauit, at the mouth of the Laoag River, the coast trends southerly for about 8 miles to Culili Point and is low and sandy. Culili Point is 114 feet high, abrupt and rocky, and without trees.^ It is quite prominent on account of the sand dunes behind it and is visible for a considerable distance. From here the coast trends southerly for 4 miles to Port Currimao. Port Currimao (chart 4207) is a small opening in the coral reef and affords anchorage during the northeast- monsoon. It is the nearest available anchorage to Laoag when vessels are unable to lie off the CAPE BOJEADOK TO LINGAYEN GULF. 49 mouth of the Laoag Kiver. Owing to the scant room and the ab- sence of protection, except from a northerly swell, it affords indif- ferent anchorage for small vessels and a poor one for large ones. The bottom is sandy. Point Arboledan, the northern point at the mouth, is 12 to 15 feet high, rounding, and fringed by a coral reef 200 to 250 yards wide, partly bare at low water. With the exception of a narrow break opposite the village in the northeast part of the cove, this reef extends southward around the shore line, baring con- siderably at low water, but with its outer limits always submerged and rising rapidly from deep water. The southern point of the cove, marked by a light, is low and rounding, with a submerged coral reef about Ys mile wide projecting southwesterly for about % mile. There is an average depth on this reef of about 2 fathoms for the greater part of its length with a least depth of iy 2 fathoms, but the bottom is very uneven and the limits of the reef irregular. On the north side of the cove, extending northward and parallel to the coast and rising rather abruptly to a height of about 150 feet, is a long ridge covered with thick dark-green brush and a few groups of taller trees. This ridge is useful in identifying the locality from seaward or northward, its southern end marking the port. A large stone church, now used as a warehouse, is in the northeast part of the cove near the inner end of the break in the reef. This is a prominent landmark from southward except in the early morning with the sun in the east. The circular stone forts or towers on either side of the cove are convenient and reliable when close in; the southeastern one has been whitewashed and shows well. Only a small portion of the village of Currimao is visible from the an- chorage. The boat landing is at the inner end of the break in the reef near the warehouse, but owing to the numerous coral heads near the sur- face caution must be used, as at low water there is some difficulty in landing even in a small boat. Directions. — Vessels bound for Currimao should, when about 1 mile offshore, bring the old whitewashed fort on the eastern shore to bear 105° (105° mag.) ; then stand in cautiously with the fort on the above bearing and when the western extremity of Arboledan Point is in range with the next point northward and the warehouse bears 30° (30° mag.) anchor in 11 fathoms, soft bottom. Small vessels may find better protected anchorage in 9 fathoms, % mile northward and eastward of the above. Gan Bay immediately southward of Port Currimao affords good shelter in northerly weather; during southerly weather small boats can land in the southern part just inside the southern entrance, where there is a break in the shore reef With a sand beach at its head. Its northern limit is formed by the reef, previously described under Port Currimao, extending southwestward from the low point between Port Currimao and Gan Bay. In the southern part of the bay about y 2 mile offshore is a shoal with a least depth of % fathom. The anchorage area northeast of this shoal is about % mile in diam- eter with depths of from 6 to 10 fathoms, sand and mud bottom, shoaling -gradu all v to the beach. A narrow, winding channel lies southward of the'shoal, but in the absence of buoys should not be attempted. The northern and main channel is nearly % mile wide 97172°— 19 4 50 LUZON. between the 3-fathom curves and would present no difficulties if buoys or ranges were established. Gabot Point is immediately southward, of Gan Bay. With its reef and Gabot Islet it forms a peninsula with a narrow neck, afford- ing a good boat landing on either side. That on the southern side is good in a northerly swell, but the other one is better most of the time, being more nearly landlocked. It is very probable that a landing could be made on one side or the other at any time. In the open bight between Gabot Point and Lugot Point, about 2y 2 miles southwestward, the bottom is smooth sand with no indi- cations of coral except that fringing the above-mentioned points. The beach is sand, backed by shifting sand dunes. The 10-fathom curve is about 1 mile offshore and the depths shoal gradually to the beach. Badoc Island lies % mile from shore, about 11 miles southward of Culili Point. It is 130 feet high, very abrupt on the west side, and almost bare of trees. The top of the island is covered with grass and has a solitary tree near the center. The north and west sides are fringed by a reef. The channel between Badoc Island and the mainland has a depth of 20 fathoms. During ordinary northerly and westerly weather a fairly good anchorage may be had between Badoc Island and the mainland, although the depth is 20 fathoms. In heavy northerly winds better protection may be had a little over \y 2 miles southeastward of the island in 11 fathoms, just outside the mouth of a deep inlet through the coral reef. This inlet furnishes a good landing for boats at nearly all times, as it is deep and narrow, with a good sand beach at its head. Southward of Badoc Island are two banks each with a least depth of 7 fathoms. The first lies 2 miles and the second 3% miles south- southwestward of the south point of the island. These are the shoalest points on a submarine ridge extending south-southwestward from Badoc Island, on which are depths of from 11 to 15 fathoms, rising abruptly from 30 fathoms. Cabugao Bay, between the next point southward of Solot Point and the point eastward of Salomague Island, affords two anchorages, with protection in southerly weather ; the first in the deep bight eastward of Cabugao Point in from 6 to 7 fathoms. Toward the head of the bight there is some protection from northerly winds. The other anchorage is in about 7 fathoms, anywhere in the bight southward of Cabugao Point, but preferably in the southwest part. A shoal with a least depth of 3 fathoms lies nearly 11,4 miles north- westward of Cabugao Point, and a little over 2y 2 miles northeastward of the north point of Salomague Island. Salomague Island lies about 8 miles southward of Badoc Island and just northward of the entrance to Salomague Harbor. It is sepa- rated from the mainland by a channel % mile wide, with a least depth of 5y 2 fathoms, and is sometimes used by small steamers. Salomague Island is 110 feet high, very abrupt on the west side, and covered with brushwood and grass and a few trees. It is nearly surrounded by a narrow coral reef. Salomague Harbor, (chart 4207) , about midway between Port Cur- rimao and Point Dile, is of little commercial importance, but affords anchorage with good protection from all but westerly and south- CAPE BOJEADOB 10 LINGAYEN GULF. 51 westerly winds. It is used even during the southwest monsoon for handling Laoag and Vigan cargoes when it is too rough for the coasting steamers to work at those places. The points at the entrance are fringed with reefs. Salomague Point, the north point, is a bluff table-land about 100 feet high. Daerena Point, the south point, is low and covered with brush and trees. The shores of the bay are fringed with coral reefs extending 100 to 500 yards offshore, except in two small coves on the north and east sides, where short stretches of sand beach afford a boat landing. The small town of Salomague lies at the head of the north cove, where there is a small wharf with about 3 feet at its outer end. This is used only by lighters and boats. An old, round, whitewashed tower with a grass roof is near the beach in front of the town. The anchorage area is contracted by two shoals. North Shoal lies off the north point of the bay, a little less than y 2 mile south- westward of the tower and generally shows a breaker. A small patch in the center is awash at high water. The shoal is steep-to on all sides and its southwestern extremity is marked by a black buoy. Middle Shoal, about y 2 mile from the southern and eastern shores of the bay, is shoalest in the center, where there are several coral heads with 4 feet over them at low water. A red buoy is moored in 2y 2 fathoms near its northwest extremity. Another and smaller shoal lies in the eastern part of the harbor r but is out of the way of the anchorage for large vessels. Southwest from Darrena Point shoals and irregular bottom extend westward and southward, terminating in Southwest Shoal, with 214 fathoms over it at low water, 2% miles westward of the point. A smaller shoal, with 24 feet over it, lies % mile nearer Darrena Point on nearly the same bearing. Masbate Shoal, with 25 feet over it, lies 1% miles west-southwestward of Darrena Point. Approaching Salomague Harbor from northward or southward the best landmark is Salomague Island and, when close in, the light structure and the old stone tower. Darrena Point is not conspicuous and can not be made out until within a mile or two of the anchorage, when it shows as a white line of sand beach, covered above high water with green bushes and grass projected against the high land back of it. From seaward the best marks are Mount Nagapu and Mount Bulagao. Mount Nagafu is dark, flat-topped, 4,183 feet high, 12 miles east- ward of the southwest extremity of Salomague Island. Although the highest mountain in this vicinity, it is not very conspicuous, as it rises behind a high ridge nearer the coast. Mount Bulagao,. of which the north peak is 3,688 feet high, lies 11 miles southeastward of the southwest extremity of Salomague Island. It is dark, and conspicuous on account of its comparative isolation. From northwestward it shows one rounded summit, but from southwestward it shows two summits of almost equal height and shape about % mile apart. ,,.,-„ ,,,, , There is a light about % mile southward of the village 01 Dadarat, on the eastern shore of Salomague Harbor. Directions.— Vessels from northward should pass about y 2 mile westward from Salomague Island, and when the light bears 90° (90° mag.) it should be steered for. Good anchorage will be found 52 LUZON. in 8 fathoms with the light on the above bearing and the old tower bearing 349° (349° mag.), distant about y 2 mile. Small vessels can find better sheltered anchorage in 7 fathoms more to the northward and westward. Large vessels from southward should keep Pinget Island bearing nothing westward of 180° (180° mag.) until the light bears 90° (90° mag.), when the previous directions should be followed. Small vessels and those having local knowledge, approaching from south- ward, may bring Salomague Point to bear 38° (38° mag.) and steer for it, keeping a good lookout for Southwest and Masbate Shoals; when the light bears 90° (90° mag.) they should steer for it and anchor as previously directed. Too much dependence should not be placed on the buOys, as they are liable to drag in heavy weather. Lapog Bay, immediately southward of Salomague Harbor, between Darrena and Lapog Points, affords protection similar to Salomague Harbor, but is more exposed. The southern part of Darrena Point is fringed by a coral reef, mostly bare at low water, extending 100 to 500 yards offshore. The eastern shore of the bay is a sand beach. The southern shore is fringed with coral extending 100 to 300 yards offshore, in which a break about 100 yards wide, terminating in a sand beach, leads to the small village of Saoang, the seaport for the town of Lapog, about 1 mile inland. This break is capable of accom- modating three or four small craft. Several small villages are situ- ated on the shores of the bay. There are several shoals in the bay and its approaches. Lapog Shoal, about % mile southward of Darrena Point, has a least depth of l 1 ^ fathoms. Between this shoal and the reefs extending southward from Darrena Point is a channel about ^4 mile wide, with depths of from 7 to 14 fathoms. In the northern part of the bay, about ^4 mile off- shore, is a reef, bare at low water. Small native craft anchor behind this-reef , and a contracted anchorage in about 4 fathoms may be had by a small vessel north and west of it. Shoal water, with depths of from 2 to 3 fathoms, extends y 2 mile westward of Lapog Point, and a small shoal with a least depth of 2*4 fathoms lies \y± miles west- ward of the point. This bay is used almost exclusively by native craft with local knowledge. In view of its proximity to Salomague Harbor, and the fact that the latter affords better protection and holding ground, this anchorage is not recommended. Pinget Island, about 6 miles southward of Salomague Island, is low, sandy, covered with brush, and fringed by a narrow coral reef. Its highest point, 20 feet, is near the southern end. It is about % mile offshore and is connected with it by a sand bar, covered by 2 feet at low water. Anchorage may be made either north or south of the island, de- pendent on the weather. On the north side during the southwest mon- soon good protection may be had in about 7 fathoms, 600 yards east- ward of the point or closer in, depending on the size and draft of the vessel. On the south side a vessel should anchor in about 6 fathoms on a line between the south point and the old stone tower or fort on the mainland about % mile southward of the island. The water is deep up to the edge of the reef at the southern point of the island and shoals gradually toward the mainland. CAPE BOJEADOB TO LINGAYEN GULP. 53 A shoal with a least depth of 5 feet lies iy 2 miles south of Pinget Island, and nearly 1 mile offshore at its outer edge. Between this shoal and the reefs making off from shore is a narrow channel about 300 yards wide with depths of from 5 to 6 fathoms; this channel should not be attempted without local knowledge. With the exception of these reefs and some rocks making out from a point under the old fort, the coast is low and sandy from Pinget Island to Point Dile. Point Dile, the most salient point on this part of the coast, projects well westward, but it is low and not prominent. There are no reefs off the point, but the 10-fathom curve is about % mile offshore- Two miles north of Point Dile this curve is about 1 mile offshore. Discol- ored water, the discharge from the Abra River, may at times be seen off the point. Vigan, an important town, is inland about 3 miles eastward of Point Dile. Pandan, the landing place, is about 3 miles southeastward of Point Dile, near one of the mouths of the Abra River. The channels leading into the river are constantly changing, both in position and depth, especially during the season of freshets and the southwest monsoon. At times 5 feet can be taken over the bar, but local knowl- edge is necessary. Caoayan, a large village about 1 mile northeastward of Pandan, contains a large church with an iron roof, which formerly made a prominent landmark but has lately been reported hard to pick up. The "anchorage off Pandan is somewhat sheltered from northerly winds, but in strong northerly and northeasterly winds the ground swell works around the point, causing a heavy surf and making the landing of cargo difficult and at times impossible. At such times the anchorage is very uncomfortable, as with the northerly current vessels lie in the trough of the sea, and tide rips extend from the southern mouth of the river to beyond Point Dile, giving a dangerous appear- ance to the point. A light is shown from a white concrete pillar on the beach near the town of Pandan. There are three shoals in the approach to Pandan: the shoalest, with a least depth of 3% fathoms, lies about 2^4 miles southward from Point Dile and about y 2 mile from shore. About y 2 mile outside of this shoal is a 4%-f athom patch, and southward and eastward from these two shoals and 1 mile from shore is a 4^-fathom shoal. Cao- ayan church, or Pandan Light, bearing nothing eastward of 41° (41° mag.), clears the southeast side of these shoals, and Point Dile, bear- ing nothing westward of 355° (355° mag.), clears the western side. Directions. — Vessels from northward should round Point Dile at a distance of iy 2 miles and keep this distance offshore until Pandan Light bears 41° (41° mag.). The church at Caoayan should then be in range with a prominent shoulder on the west side of Bulagao Mountain. Anchorage in 6 fathoms, sandy bottom, will be found on this range, about % mile from shore, with Solvec Rock bearing 140° (140° mag.). The above range leads about y 2 mile southeastward of the southern 4%-fathom patch. Vessels from southward should give the coast a berth of at least 1 mile until the church bears 41° (41° mag.) , and then proceed as previously directed. 54 ltjzon. Vigan Gap is a marked cut or divide in the mountain range back of Vigan. It is about 8 miles eastward of Point Dile and is a conspic- uous landmark for this vicinity. Solvec Cove (chart 4208) is a small indentation in the coast about 10 miles southeastward from Dile Point. It is of little commercial im- portance, but affords protection in northerly weather to large vessels under the lee of Solvec Point, the north point at the entrance, in from 10 to 12 fathoms and to small craft farther in. The inner basin is formed by a reef, partially bare at low water, projecting about 14 mile northwestward from the shore. The depths average about 5 fathoms, but the holding ground is poor, a thin layer of sand and mud over coral. A boat landing can be made on the sand beach at the head. The location of the cove is well marked by Mount Narvacan, a soli- tary detached hill 858 feet high immediately southeastward of the cove, and by the long ridge extending southward from the prominent Tetas de Santa and terminating abruptly in Solvec Point. Solvec Rock, square and about 30 feet high, lies about 200 yards oft Solvec Point, to which it is connected by low rocks a few feet above high water. It is quite prominent from northward or southward ; a rock awash lies about 50 feet westward of it. The northern shore from Solvec Rock to the ruins of the old tower, about y 2 mile eastward, should not be approached closer than % mile by large vessels, as there are detached coral bowlders lying off it. The outer edges of the coral reefs on both sides of the cove bare in places at low tide and can generally be made out ; they are steep-to on the outside, but not so much so inside the cove, and are surrounded by detached lumps of coral. To enter the anchorage, bring the largest house in the village, con- spicuous on account of a galvanized-iron roof, to bear 62° (62° mag.), when it should be directly under a rounded hill with two conspicu- ous trees on the summit about 8 miles inland. Steer in on this range and for the outer roadstead; anchor when Solvec Rock bears 315° (315° mag.) and the old tower on the north shore 23° (23° mag.) in from 9 to 10 fathoms, The same range held will clear the reefs on either side of the entrance to the inner cove, where smaller vessels may choose anchorage according to draft and depth. Anchorage with some shelter for small vessels is found about 4 miles southward of Solvec Point off the mouth of the Mainganay River, where there is a small opening or pocket in the coral reefs; many of the native vessels enter the river. Although the depth is sufficient in the anchorage, there is no swinging room for large vessels. Nalvo Bay is a small cove about 5 miles southward of Solvec Cove. A coral reef projects about Y2 mile westward from the point on the north side, affording protection in northerly weather, but there is no protection from southward. It is a much safer anchorage than Port San Esteban during the northeast monsoon. The eastern shore is a sand beach, immediately back of which is a solitary sharp hill about 250 feet high, the southernmost of a series of similar higher and lower elevations immediately back of the coast line. To enter, bring the sharp hill to bear 79° (79° mag.) , when Santa Maria Church will be seen at the base of the northern slope. Stand in on this range until Solvec Rock is on with the point of land on the north side of Nalvo Bay, when anchorage may be had in from 5 to CAPE BOJEADOR TO LINGAYEN GULF. 55 6 fathoms, hard, smooth sand bottom. Small coasters discharge and load close in to the sand beach under the hook of the reef in the northeast part of the cove. Suso Shoal is the only outlying or detached shoal on this stretch of coast. It is about % mile north of San Esteban Point and about the same distance offshore. There is only slightly deeper water between it and the shore eastward. The shoalest water found was 3% fathoms, and it probably breaks only in very heavy weather. Port San Esteban, about 6 miles southward of Solvec Cove, is a small cove, open to the north and northwest, and is a dangerous anchorage • in the northeast monsoon on account of the large swell rolling in. Suso Shoal, in the approaches, affords no protection, but, if anything, increases the swell. In the southwest monsoon it affords shelter to small craft that run in between the reefs and anchor or moor off the sand beach in front of the town at the head of the port. A quarry showing as two bare spots on the hillside about % mile northward of the landing, a stone tower on the western point, and a larg« stone building back of the sand beach are prominent in approaching. To enter, bring the quarry to bear 90° (90° mag.) and stand in on this course until the large stone building bears 169 ff (169° mag.) and anchor in 8 to 9 fathoms, sandy bottom; or anchorage may be made farther out, when the stone tower bears 180° (180° mag.) in 8 to 10 fathoms. Santiago Cove, 4 miles southward of Port San Esteban, affords fair shelter during the northeast monsoon, but is exposed in westerly weather. At the head of the cove is a bright sand beach on which is a small village. Behind the beach is a small stream that empties at its southern end. The town of Santiago is about 1 mile inland, and only the church and monastery are visible. The reefs at the entrance and along the shores are narrow and plainly marked. To enter bring the church buildings to bear 67° (67° mag.) and steer for them on that bearing. Large vessels should anchor when the north point at the entrance bears about 320° (320° mag.), in &y 2 fathoms, sandy bottom. In entering and after passing the point of the reef on the south side, it is better to favor this side and round-to northward. Good water is found close up to the reefs. Small vessels can go within y s mile of the beach at the head of the cove and find good anchorage but contracted swinging room. Candon Point, 8 miles southward of Port San Esteban, is low, heav- ily wooded with coconut trees, and fringed by a narrow reef. It projects about 1 mile from the general trend of the coast but is not prominent. Anchorage may be had south of the point in 5 to 6 fathoms west-southwestward of the stone house on the beach. Large vessels should anchor with Candon Point bearing 0° (0° mag.) in not less than 9 fathoms. The anchorage is somewhat protected from northerly winds, but in strong northerly and northeasterly winds the swell follows around the point, causing a heavy surf and making the landing of cargo difficult and at time impossible. The town of Candon lies about iy 2 miles inland, southeastward of Candon Point, and is not visible from the sea. A light, visible 9 miles, is shown from a white frame structure on the beach about ^ mile southeastward of Candon Point. 56 Luzon. The coast from Candon Point trends southerly for 17 miles to the mouth of the Amburayan Eiver, thence southwesterly for 7% miles to Darigayos Point, which is low, covered with trees, and surrounded by a reef; thence it trends southward again for 12 miles to the en- trance to San Fernando Harbor. A number of small towns are scattered along this stretch, among them being Santa Lucia, Santa Cruz, Tagudin, Bangar, Luna, Dari- gayos, Bacotan, and San Juan. Santa Lucia, 6 miles southward of Candon Point, may be recognized by a large church with a prominent white dome. Tagudin, the port for the Mountain -Province, lies near the mouth of the Amburayan Biver, about 9 miles southward of Santa Lucia. Luna, about 6 miles southwestward of Tagudin, has a church with three towers. Tagudin light, a fixed red light, visible 7 miles, is shown from a white concrete pillar about ^4 mile north-northeastward of the north- ern entrance to the Amburayan Biver. This light steered for on a 135° (134° mag.) bearing leads to an anchorage in 8 fathoms, sand and mud hottom. Darigayos Inlet is a slight indentation in the coast at the mouth of the river of the same name, 1 mile southward, of Darigayos Point. Beefs on each side of the entrance extend out % mile. The entrance is'about 300 yards wide, and from it the old stone warehouse bears 91° (90° mag.), and the old stone fort on the south point bears 147° (146° mag). Farther in, 200 yards from the shore, there is anchorage for launches in 10 feet, sandy bottom. This anchorage is poorly protected and of no commercial importance. There is a nar- row shore reef for several miles north and south of the inlet. Caution. — During the northeast monsoon a strong current has sometimes been observed setting north-northeast along this coast. Vessels proceeding southward should be prepared for this current, or they may find themselves embayed in Lingayen Gulf. on the west coast of Luzon, is open to the north-northwest. East- ward are lofty mountains, with Mount Santo Tomas rising to a height of 7,407 feet. The west coast is of moderate height and fairly level, gradually rising southward in a compact mountain mass. There is a chain of shoals with Sy 2 fathoms or more extending nearly half- way across the entrance from Cape Bolinao, with a clear channel about 13 miles wide west of San Fernando Point. On the eastern side of the gulf the shore is free from dangers, except the shoals near Santo Tomas and San Fernando. There is a continuous sand beach, with the foothills rising a short distance back. The shore around the head of the gulf is low, sandy, and free from danger. On the western side from Santiago Island southeast the coast is fringed by an almost continuous chain of islands and rocks as faj south as Cabalitian Island, just northward of Sual. The islands are, as a rule, low and wooded, and have shallow channels between them, used only by coasters. The prevailing wind for the greater part of the year is southeast. During the northeast monsoon land and sea breezes become regular and blow freshly, with clear atmosphere, but are interrupted by LINGAYEN GULP. 57 strong north and northeast gales. A bank of clouds seen in the north, with a clear sky and high barometer, is a certain sign of the commencement of a gale. In June the wind blows from southeast in the morning, with squalls off Mounts Santo Tomas and San Isidro; toward evening it dies away with heavy rain and thunder, and, clearing toward midnight, leaves a light wind from south which sets in from southeast at dawn. From July to October there are usually gales from southwest to west, lasting from 3 to 15 days, accompanied by torrents of rain. The worst season in the gulf is from the middle of September until the end of October, when typhoons occur. The principal anchorages in the gulf are San Fernando, Santo Tomas, Dagupan, Sual, Cabalitian Bay, and Bolinao. San Fernando Harbor (chart 4246) , open to the north and northwest, is formed by a peninsula, San Fernando Point, projecting from the coast in a west and northwest direction. The harbor is about 1% miles in diameter, but the entrance between the reefs extending from both sides is about % mile in width. Being open to the north and northwest, there is little shelter from those directions. In heavy northerly weather vessels anchor off Poro Sur, in the southwest part of the harbor, and ride easier than off San Fernando ; the anchorage is within 200 yards of the beach in from 5 to 8 fathoms, muddy bottom and good holding ground. San Fernando is on the eastern shore of the harbor, and is of con- siderable importance, being a regular port of call for the coastwise steamers. There are no wharves, all cargo being handled by lighters. There are the remains of an old pier used only as a boat landing. Just north of the town is the village of Carlatan, with a large ware- house and store. In the southwest part of the bay is the village of Poro Sur. San Fernando Point rises gradually northwestward to a height of 84 feet. On its western side are white cliffs which are very promi- nent. Faog Reef, composed of rock and sand, nearly y 2 mile in extent, with a least depth of 4% fathoms, on which the sea breaks in heavy weather, lies about 2 miles northwestward from San Fernando Point. Vessels from southward and westward pass between Fagg Beef and the point. Shoals. — From the eastern shore a shoal extends westward about % mile, its outer extremity being marked by a black can buoy moored in 31 feet. From San Fernando Point an extensive rocky shoal projects north- eastward for nearly 1 mile, its outer extremity being marked by a red buoy. The channel in entering lies between the buoys, and is nearly y 2 mile wide and deep enough for the largest class of vessels. A lighted range guides through the buoyed channel. A light, visible 15 miles, is shown from a white cylindrical iron tower alongside a white dwelling near the bluff on the western side of San Fernando Point, about % mile south of the northern extrem- ity of the point. Directions. — Vessels from northward should bring San Fernando light to bear 181° (180° mag.) and steer for it until on the range, stand in on the range course 144° (143° mag.), passing between the 58 LUZON. buoys, until San Fernando light bears 226° (225° mag.) ; then change the course to 158° (157° mag.) and anchor in from 8 to 9 fathoms. On the latter course an old iron boiler on the beach at the head of the harbor will be almost ahead. Vessels from southward and westward should steer to pass 1 mile northward of San Fernando Point and steer 91° (90° mag.) until on the range ; then proceed as directed above. Research Reef. — A coral reef lies 1^ miles south-southwestward of the southern extremity of San Fernando Peninsula and nearly 1 mile offshore and has a least found depth of 16 feet. A shoal with a least depth of 2% fathoms lies about % mile southward of Kesearch Beef and about % mile southwestward from the next point southward of San Fernando Point. Santo Tomas anchorage is on the eastern side of Lingayen Gulf about 25 miles southward of San Fernando Point, and is formed by a sand spit and bank extending southward from the shore.- From the end of the exposed spit the submerged sand bank extends 4% miles in a general southerly direction, its southern end being about 4 miles offshore. This bank has from 1% to 2% fathoms across it. It is abrupt on the inner side and at its extremity, deepening rapidly to 12 fathoms, but its outer slope is, as a rule, more gradual. It affords little protection. The best anchorage is about 1 mile southeastward of the exposed spit, in 7 fathoms, muddy bottom. The harbor is at present of no commercial importance, and no directions are consid- ered necessary, the chart being a sufficient guide. Dagupan River Entrance is about 12 miles south by west from Santo Tomas. The bar at the mouth shifts frequently, but generally has 6 feet on it at low water. After crossing the bar no trouble is ex- perienced in going up the river, which generally has from 8 to 14 feet in the channel. Pilotage for all vessels of 5 register tons or over is compulsory, and pilots can be had by blowing the whistle. Anchorage may be had off the mouth of the river in 6 fathoms about 1 mile northwestward from the light. The town of Dagupan is about 2 miles from the bar. A light, visible 9 miles, is shown from the top of a white concrete house on Guecet Point, on the east side of the entrance to the Dagu- pan River. Port Sual is 11 miles westward of Dagupan, in the southwest part of the gulf, and has good anchorage for a small vessel, protected from all winds except from east-northeast to east-southeast. The avail- able anchorage is narrowed by reefs to an area about ^4 mile in diameter. The land around Portuguese Point, on the northern side of the entrance, appears like an island from a distance of 7 or 8 miles. The point may be recognized by a small tower which forms part of an old fort. A reef extends about y 5 mile southward from Portu- guese Point. This is always covered and only breaks when the wind sets in. Mangas Point, on the south side of the entrance, is surrounded by a reef extending out y s mile, on the outer part of which, northward of the point, is a group of rocks, always exposed, and which may be approached to 100 yards. Adela Rock, with 10 feet over it, and 4 to 6 fathoms all around, lies 1,170 yards eastward of Mangas Point. The sea breaks on this LINGAYEN GULF. 59 rock in heavy weather. It is in range with the northern extremity of Mangas Point and the white warehouse in Sual. Directions. — Vessels from northward should pass about }4 mile eastward from Portuguese Point and continue southward until the church in Sual bears 264° (263° mag.), when it should be steered for; when the rocks off Mangas Point are abeam the vessel should be hauled northwestward and anchored in about 6 fathoms, muddy bot- tom, with Portuguese Point bearing 46° (45° mag.) and Mangas Point bearing 158° (157° mag.). Small craft may anchor farther north-northwestward in a basin about % mile in extent. If bound in from the southward and eastward the white warehouse on the south- ern shore well open of Mangas Point clears Adela Rock. From Sual the coast trends northwesterly for 23 miles to the north- ern extremity of Cape Bolinao and is indented by deep bays and faced by numerous islands. Cabalitian Island, 2 miles northward of Portuguese Point, is fringed with rocks, wooded, and 345 feet high in the southern part. Cabalitian Bay affords good anchorage in 10 to 13 fathoms, protected from northeast winds by Cabalitian Island, which lies in its entrance. The anchorage may be approached either from north or south. Ves- sels entering this bay from the north should steer for Bangayao Point, the northern entrance point, on a 229° (228° mag.) course until abeam of an islet lying y 8 mile northwestward of Cabalitian Island, then make good a 204° (203° mag.) course until abeam of the south- westward point of the island, passing 350 yards southwestward of Bangayao Point, then haul southwestward and select anchorage in about 13 fathoms, about 14 mile southward of the southwest point of the island. Calpay Shoal lies about y 2 m il e southward of Cabalitian Island. The southern end of the shoal is always awash, and is steep-to. There is a deep channel, 200 yards wide, between the south side of Cabalitian Island and the northern extremity of Calpay Shoal, but it should not be used by a stranger. The best channel is south of the shoal and should always be used in approaching Cabalitian Bay from the eastward. Pao Bay, northward of Cabalitian Bay, affords good, sheltered anchorage for small vessels in from 4 to 5 fathoms, but the entrance is contracted by a long reef lying southward of Bangar Point and a ■shoal patch in the middle of the channel with a least depth of 9 feet. The northern part of the bay is shoal. Vessels entering must be guided by the chart and proceed with caution. Comas Island, northeastward of Bangar Point, is about y± mile from the shore, with which it is connected by a reef, dry in places. Hundred Islands are a large group of small wooded islands lying 5 to 7 miles northwestward of Comas Island. Their bases are much underworn by the sea, making landing on them difficult. Good pro- tected anchorage in 6 to 8 fathoms may be had. westward of this group ; vessels entering must be guided by the chart. Cabarruyan Island, the largest island in the gulf, lies eastward of Cape Bolinao. It is of moderate height and covered with trees. Tombac Bay, the long inlet south of Cabarruyan Island, is quite shoal, the average depth being about 9 feet. 60 LUZON. Siapar, Narra, Cangaluyan, and other small islands lie northward of Cabarruyan Island. These islands, from the north end of Santiago to the south end of Cabarruyan, are fringed by reefs, broken in places, where channels available for small vessels lead to anchorages among the islands. These reefs extend 2y 2 miles from the islands in places. Santiago Island lies off the northeastern part of Cape Bolinao and forms the northern side of Bolinao Harbor. It is high and covered with trees. Its highest portion is visible about 18 miles. Silaqui Islet is about 1 mile northward of Santiago Island on a reef which extends 2 miles northward of Santiago. It is 71 feet high at the southern end and appears wedge-shaped from westward. There is a bank extending northeastward beyond the reef which surrounds Santiago Island, having a least depth of 3y 2 fathoms. The outer edge of this bank lies 8 miles northeastward of Silaqui Islet. There is another bank, having a least depth of 6 fathoms, 10 miles northeastward of the same point. CAPE BOLINAO TO MANILA BAY. Cape Bolinao is the name given to the northern end of that part of Luzon which forms the western boundary of Lingayen Gulf. It is of moderate height, thickly wooded, and slopes gently toward the sea. Bolinao Harbor (chart 4238), on the northern part of the cape, is the most westerly port in Lingayen Gulf and is commercially of little importance. Bolinao, a small, unimportant town, is about y 2 mile westward of the entrance to the harbor. Very little of the town is visible, the iron roof of the church being the only prominent object visible over the trees, a large number of which are coconuts. The har- bor is formed by a strait between Santiago Island and Cape Bolinao. Silaqui Island, about 1 mile north of Santiago Island, is surrounded by reefs, and must be given a good berth. The principal value of this port is as a harbor of refuge, it being a perfect typhoon harbor for fair-sized vessels. The entrance is formed by a break in the coral reef, which extends 1 mile offshore north of the town and about 2 miles north of Santiago Island. The channel in entering is marked by a red buoy, about y 2 mile north of Trinchera Point, where the reef makes rather an abrupt trend southward, and a black buoy, a little farther in, marking the limit of the reef on the eastern side. Native boats of light draft frequently take advantage of the narrow and winding passage leading to Lingayen Gulf from the head of Bolinao Harbor behind Narra, Siapar, and Cabarruyan Islands. The least depth is about 6 feet at low water, with 7 to 8 fathoms in places. Local knowledge is necessary for its use. A fixed red light, visible 7 miles, is shown from a white concrete pillar supporting a square white day mark on the south shore of Bolinao Harbor. Directions. — Vessels approaching Bolinao Harbor should not bring the tangent to Cape Bolinao to bear westward of 220° (219° mag.) until the light bears 152° (151° mag.), when it should be steered for ; keep the light on this bearing, pass midway between the buoys, and when Trinchera Point is abeam keep in midchannel and anchor westward of Binabalian Point in 9 or 10 fathoms, muddy bottom. If CAPE BOLINAO TO MANILA BAT. 61 desirous of anchoring eastward of Binabalian Point, round it at a distance of about 400 yards to avoid the reef extending about 200 yards southward, and when the light is abeam steer a midchannel course and anchor either east or west of Riripayan Point as desired. Balingasag Point, low and wooded, about 1 mile westward of the entrance to Bolinao Harbor, is the most northern part of the cape. From here the coast trends southwesterly for 7 miles to Piedra Point and is fringed with shoals and reefs. Balingasag Bay is a narrow opening in the reef about 2 miles south- west of Balingasag Point. It affords a boat landing in smooth weather, and stores for Bolinao lighthouse are sometimes landed here when too rough to land at Piedra Point. The anchorage is contracted, with little turning room, and should be used with caution. Piedra Point, about 12 miles southwestward of Silaqui Island, is the most westerly point on Cape Bolinao. It is rounding, rocky, and wooded to near the beach, and 240 feet high about % mile from its western extremity. In smooth weather a boat landing can be made on the sandy beach immediately southward of the point. A group flash- ing white light, visible 24 miles, is shown from a concrete tower on a heavily wooded hill on Piedra Point. From Piedra Point to Caiman Point, about 23 miles southward, the coast is rocky, bold, and wooded, and broken in many places by small sandy bights. At no place do the fringing reefs extend % mile, and the 100-fathom curve is generally found within 1 mile of the shore. Olanin Bay is a small bight at the mouth of the Olanin Biver about 4 miles southward of Piedra Point, affording anchorage during the northeast monsoon in the middle of the bight, in about 7 fathoms, about ^4 mile offshore. There is a good boat landing, and fresh water may be obtained. Agno Bay, about 10 miles southward of Piedra Point, is an open roadstead. The Balincaguin Eiver empties near the southern part of the bay ; the bar at its mouth has about 5 feet over it, but at high water vessels of 7 feet draft have gone up the river to the town of Agno, about 2 miles above its mouth. Fair shelter during the northeast monsoon may be had under Bena Point, the north point, or southward near the mouth of the river. From Saoit Point, the southern point, a sunken reef with about 2 fathoms over it, extends northwestward for a little over % mile. Caiman Point is irregular and rocky with two outlying rocks, the outer of which, abrupt and about 15 feet high, is seen as detached, while the inner one is projected against the point. The point is fringed by a coral reef, which extends about % mile southward from it and follows the shore round into Caiman Cove, lying eastward of the point. Dasol Bay, between Caiman and Santa Cruz Points, contains no perfectly protected anchorages and is of little value to navigation. There are numerous reefs and shoals scattered throughout the bay, the positions of which will be best understood by reference to the chart. The shores are low and intersected by a number of small streams, and there are a number of small unimportant towns and villages, the principal ones of which are Santa Cruz, in the southern part, and Infanta, about 4 miles northward of it. Caiman Cove, lying between Caiman and Balimanoc Points, offers good anchorage, sheltered only during the northeast monsoon. Ves- 62 Ltrzou. sels seeking shelter in Caiman Cove should stand up the middle of the cove and anchor in about 16 fathoms. Balimanoc Point is a rocky bluff surrounded by reefs which extend y 2 mile southward from it. Tambove Koads, lying eastward from Balimanoc Point, is a com- modious anchorage sheltered from all except south and southwest winds. There are a number of dangers in the entrance, and in the absence of any aids to navigation or good natural marks it should be approached only in daylight and with caution. Culebra Islet, lying 2 miles southward of Caiman Point, is very small, low, covered with bushes, and skirted by a sandy beach. It is surrounded by shoal water, which extends over y 2 mile west- northwestward. The channel between it and Caiman Point is deep and clear. Hermana Mayor, lying 6 miles southward of Caiman Point and 5 miles from shore, is partly wooded and 130 feet high near the center. It lies on a bank, covered by less than 10 fathoms, which extends iy 2 miles northward, surrounding Culebra Islet, and nearly 2 miles southward. The shoalest spot on the bank southward from the island is a 3-fathom patch about % mile south-southeastward from its south end. Shoal water extends y 2 mile eastward and iy& miles northward from its north end. About \y 2 miles northward from the island there is a reef, portions of which are above water. An occult- ing white light, visible 15 miles, is shown from a white concrete tower on the top of a cleared ridge near the center of the island. Hermana Menor Island lies 2% miles south-southeastward of Her- mana Mayor and 2 miles westward of Santa Cruz Point. It is smaller than Hermana Mayor, 54 feet high, has sandy beaches, and is wooded. It is surrounded by shoal water, which on the eastern and southeastern sides extends over y 2 mile. Between this shoal water and the shoals westward of Santa Cruz Point is a good channel over y 2 mile wide, but in the absence of any good leading marks it should not be used by a stranger. Eaton Islet lies Sy 2 miles eastward of the north end of Hermana Mayor and over 1 mile from shore. It is low, covered with bushes, and has sandy beaches. It is surrounded by reefs, parts of which bare at low water, and should not be approached nearer than \y 2 miles. Infanta, a small town on the south shore of a cove about 2 miles northeastward of Eaton Islet, affords excellent anchorage, sheltered by reefs, in 7 fathoms, muddy bottom. The entrance is narrow and deep, with dangerous reefs on each side; with good light, the north- ern one usually shows brown. The town is far from prominent and no definite, well-defined marks can be picked up or described. Santa Cruz (chart 4210) is a small town of little commercial im- portance in the southeastern part of Dasol Bay. There are several small, dangerous, detached shoals in the harbor and its approach. Directions. — Vessels bound into Santa Cruz should bring Eaton Islet to bear 46° (45° mag.) and steer for it, passing nearly midway between the Hermana Islands, but slightly nearer Hermana Mayor. Hold this course until the bell tower in the southern part of the town bears 97° (96° mag.) , when it may be steered for. When Santa Cruz Point is abeam the vessel should be hauled southeastward until the bell tower bears 78° (77° mag.), where good anchorage for large CAPE BOLINAO TO MANILA BAY. 63 vessels will be found in 11 fathoms, muddy bottom, protected from all except westerly and northwesterly winds. Small vessels may steer for the bell tower when it bears 78° (77° mag.) and anchor in 5 or 6 fathoms, muddy bottom, with the bell tower on the above bearing, distant about % mile. Santa Cruz Point is low, covered with mangroves, and surrounded by reefs, which extend about 1 mile northward and 1% mile north- westward. About \y 2 miles northwestward of the point is a small detached rocky patch with a least depth of 2y 2 fathoms. From Santa Cruz Point the coast trends southeastward for about 3 miles to Naulo Point, a rounding, thickly wooded hill 151 feet high and the most prominent landmark in this vicinity. From this point the coast bends sharply eastward and then trends southward and westward to Arenas Point, about 7 miles southward of Santa Cruz Point. Pulipo Islet, about \y 2 miles southeastward of Naulo Point and y 2 m il e from shore, is small, low, and wooded ; it is not promi- nent from offshore. The large bay between Santa Cruz and Arenas Points is encumbered by numerous shoals and is of little value to navigation. Sabalay Reef, lying in the entrance of the above-described bay, has a small sand cay on the northeastern part. The western tangent to Hermana Menor, bearing nothing westward of 1° (0° mag.), leads well westward of Sabalay and Tortuga Eeefs. Tortuga Reef lies about 1% miles southwestwafd of Arenas Point. The least depth, 2% fathoms, is found over the eastern part. Ves- sels should not attempt to pass between Sabalay and Tortuga Reefs unless the discolored water on the reefs is visible, for there are no leading marks for keeping in the channel. Arenas Point is low and sandy and is surrounded by shoal water which extends % mile westward. The town of Candelaria is about iy 2 miles eastward from Arenas Point. Bani Point, about 3% miles southward from Arenas Point, has sev- eral rounded hills near its southern extremity. It is surrounded by a reef which extends y 2 mile westward and iy 2 miles south-south- eastward. A detached reef, near the southern end of which is a group of rocks bare at low water and just awash at high water, lies about \y 2 miles southward of Bani Point, narrowing the channel between the reef and Salvador Island to about % mile. Ports Masinloc and Matalvi (chart 4266). — Between Bani Point and Matalvi Point, about 4% miles southward, the coast recedes some 3 miles, forming a large bay, nearly blocked by islands and reefs, con- taining the sheltered anchorages of Masinloc and Matalvi and Oyon Bay. ... Oyon Bay, immediately eastward Of Bani Point, is a landlocked basin. Its shores are fringed by a wide reef, leaving an available anchorage space about 1 mile long and y 2 mile wide, having depths of 7 and 8 fathoms over muddy bottom. Oyon Point, the eastern en- trance point, is high and steep and surrounded .by shoal water, which extends % mile northwestward. Oyon Bay should prove a good typhoon shelter in case a vessel could not get to Port Matalvi. There are no aids to navigation, but all the reefs are plainly marked by discolored water. . Salvador Island, the largest island in this vicinity, is about iy 4 miles in extent, thickly wooded, and has reefs extending % m il e 64 LUZON. to the northwest. The north side of the island is about 100 feet high, • terminating abruptly at its northwest and northeast ends and slop- ing gradually southward. The northwest extremity, sometimes called Salvador Head, is steep, about 100 feet high, and covered with bam- boo, forming an excellent landmark. The northern shore of the island, forming the south side of the channel into Port Masinloc, is fringed by reefSj partly bare at low water, for about % mile, widen- ing toward the northeast point, where they extend nearly Vi mile. Port Masinloc, northeastward of Salvador Island, affords good shel- ter except in heavy northwesterly and westerly weather. Masinloc is a small town about 1% miles southeastward of Oyon Point at the mouth of the Lipay Eiver. A reef, partly bare at low water, extends about % mile westward from it. The church, a large stone edifice with a corrugated-iron gable roof, and the adjoining convent northward, a long, low, white building with a nipa roof, are prominent. The principal trade is nipa and firewood, handled exclusively by small sailing vessels. There is much valuable timber in this vicinity, and a number of small vessels are built here. Directions. — Vessels bound into Masinloc should, before crossing the meridian of Macalaba Island, bring Masinloc Church to bear 95° (94° mag.) and steer for it. When Salvador Head, the northwest point of Salvador Island, bears 157° (156° mag.) change the course to 141° (140° mag.), heading for the sandy beach just eastward of the point and to the right of the apparent middle of the island When the point is nearly abeam, distant about % mile, haul up to 70° (69° mag.), heading for the first coconut grove northward of the town. On this course Salvador Head will lie nearly astern on the starboard quarter. Continue on this course until Oyon Point bears 9° (8° mag.) and anchor in 12 or 13 fathoms, sandy bottom, about 7 / 8 mile westward from the town. Port Matalvi lies between Matalvi Island and the shore southward, which has an average height of about 250 feet. It affords protection in any weather, in 6 to 12 fathoms, muddy bottom. It is reported to be an excellent typhoon harbor and is important in being the only harbor of this class between Bolinao Harbor and Olongapo Harbor in Subic Bay. Macalaba Island, about */4 mile west of Luan Point, is about % mile in extent, low, flat, and wooded, with a sandy beach except on its western side. A small group of native huts is on the sand spit at its eastern end. Sunken reefs extend nearly % mile northward and southward from the island. Luan Island, about y 2 mile long, lies northward from Matalvi Point, from which it is separated by a very narrow channel. On the north end of the island is a knoll 118 feet high ; the southern part of the island is low and flat. A reef with a least depth of 1 fathom extends about y 2 mile north-northeast from the north end of Luan Island. A red buoy is moored in 4 fathoms off the northern point of the reef. Matalvi Island, about 100 feet high and wooded, lies y 2 mile east- ward of Luan Island. Eastward of it, and connected with it at low water by a short reef, is another wooded island 88 feet high. Iagat Island is a small, low mangrove island immediately north of Matalvi Island. It is included in the reefs extending nearly % CAPE BOLINAO TO MANILA BAT. 65 mile northward from Matalvi Island. A beacon stands on the reef westward of Iagat Island. Directions.— Bring the beacon to bear 120° (119° mag.) and steer VU* , u 0U x S ? , s clear of the reefs projecting from Salvador and Macalaba Islands and northward of the red buoy. When the 118-foot hill on Luan Island bears 225° (224° mag.) steer 195° (194° mag.) until Luan Hill is abeam and thence midway between the islands to an anchorage. Anchorage may be found in 15 fathoms, muddy bottom, in the channel midway between Luan and Matalvi Islands or south of Matalvi Island. If the latter anchorage is selected, care must be taken to avoid the sunken reef making off about 300 yards from the south shore abreast of the eastern end of Matalvi Island. Small craft may continue the mid-channel course and anchor farther in, depending on size and draft. Palauig Bay, about 2 miles southward of Matalvi Point, is formed by the projection of Palauig Point and the reef extending about % mile northward from it. It is about % mile wide at entrance and, while expanding slightly inside, is obstructed by shoals that reduce the available anchorage space to a diameter of "14 mile. It affords good protection in southerly and westerly winds, but is open north- westward. The southeast shore of the bay is a narrow sand spit, forming the northern bank of the Salasa River, which empties into the southern part of the bay. The town of Palauig, of little com- mercial importance, is on the south shore. The depth range from 12 and 13 fathoms at the entrance to 7 and 8 fathoms, sandy bottom, at the anchorage, % mile inside the point of the western reef. A reef, about % mile long north and south, with a width of y± mile, lies % mile northwest of the northern extremity of the reef projecting from Palauig Point and is separated from it by a narrow channel. The least depth over it is 3 fathoms. Palauig Point projects about 1 mile from the general trend of the shore. It is low, rounding, and wooded, with a small detached knoll 49 feet high. Its western edge is fringed by reefs extending y± mile offshore and increasing to % mile off its northern extremity. An occulting white light, visible 12 miles, is shown from a white skeleton steel tower on the 49-foot knoll about % mile inland on Palauig Point. Palauig Reef, lying with its outer edge 1% miles west-southwest- ward of Palauig Point, is nearly awash and usually breaks heavily. There is a 2-fathom channel, % mile wide, between it and Palauig Point. From Palauig Reef a line of shoals, with 2 to 5 fathoms on them, extends southward for 3 miles, the southern shoal being 4 miles westward of the mouth of the San Agustin River. Inshore of this line of shoals are several other small detached shoals the positions of which will be readily understood by reference to the chart. Kinabakbagan Reef lies about Zy 2 miles west-northwestward from Iba Point and nearly 3 miles from shore. It is about 1*4 miles in extent within the 5-fathom curve and is covered by a least depth of % fathom. A small shoal with a least depth of 43/4 fathoms, coral bottom, lies 31/4 miles west-southwestward of Iba Point, and 2 miles 97173—19 5 66 ltjzost. farther on in the same direction is a bank with 6^4 fathoms, coral bottom. Iba Point projects slightly from the low sandy beach extending southward from Palauig Point, 8 miles northward. It is fringed by a coral reef a little over ^4 mile wide, bare at low water. The point is low and not prominent. Iba, the capital of Zambales Province, is a small town of little commercial importance, about 1% miles inland, and is practically obscured by groves of coconut and bananas. There is one large iron roof, visible 5 or 6 miles, which forms a conspicuous landmark. The anchorage for Iba, southward of the point of the same name, is sheltered only during the northeast monsoon ; during the southwest monsoon landing is difficult and frequently impossible. The anchor- age is an open roadstead and should be appreached by steering in for the coast with the canyon northward from Mount Botolan bearing 91° (90° mag.) ; when the iron roof in Iba bears 46° (45° mag.) it may be steered for. When the tangent to Iba Point bears 1° (0° mag.) it should be steered for and anchorage taken in 10 fathoms about % mile from the landing which may be identified by a group of nipa houses and a white barrel on a pole. Small steamers usually anchor about 14 mile southward from the landing in 3 fathoms, sandy bottom. From Iba Point the coast trends southeastward for about 6 miles to Botolan Point; it is low and sandy and is broken by the mouths of the Bancal and Bucao Rivers. The valley of the Bucao Eiver, northward from Mount Botolan, is a conspicuous feature from sea- ward and serves to indicate the anchorage for Iba. Botolan Point, low and sandy, is immediately southward of a spur of Mount Botolan, which terminates at the beach in a bluff point 151 feet high. It is surrounded by a reef y 2 mile wide. Mount Botolan, about 1% miles eastward of Botolan Point, is 1,852 feet high, heavily wooded, and prominent. From Botolan Point the coast trends southerly, with a slight curve easterly, for 21 miles to Capones Point. On this coast are a number of small, unimportant towns, lying on or near the shore. The shore line is formed by a steep-to sandy beach, off which there are a number of detached shoals. They are all well inside the usual track of navi- gation. Capones Point is the most western point on this part of the coast. It is 1,090 feet high, bare, of reddish appearance, and when first seen from northwestward appears as an island. Capon Grande, the largest of the Capones Islands, a group of three small islands, is a most conspicuous landmark and lies with its west- ern point 234 miles west-northwestward of Capones Point. It is about % mile long in a west-northwest and opposite direction and has rocks around it. The eastern part is the higher and is sighted before the lighthouse is raised. Capon Grande is surrounded by deep water and there is no good anchorage off it. The other two islands, extend- ing % mile north and south, lie % mile northeastward of Capon Grande, between it and the coast. A group flashing white light, visible 21 miles, is shown from a white square brick tower on the hillside near the western end of Capon Grande Island. CAPE BOLINAO TO MANILA BAY. 67 From Capones Point the coast trends southward for 8 miles to Port Silanguin. It is high and rocky and indented by three small bays, Calaguagujn, Talisain, and Nazasa. These bays are of little im- portance and could be used as anchorages only in the northeast mon- soon, being open to the westward. They are easy of access. Tabones Islets, lying about 1 mile from shore, midway between Tali- sain and Nazasa Bay, are two rocky islets whose bases are much underworn by the sea ; the larger and higher is 129 feet high. Port Silanguin affords tolerable shelter from all winds except those from west to southwest. The southern entrance point is formed by Silanguin Island, a bare, rounded island 705 feet high, joined to the land on the south side of the port by a rocky reef. The depth at the entrance is 30 fathoms, decreasing to 10 fathoms, which depth will be found close to the shore reef. The best anchorage is in from 17 to 20 fathoms abreast the sand beach within the south point of the main- land. Los Frailes are a group of six small, rocky islets with sunken and other rocks around and between them, lying from % to 1^ miles southwestward of Silanguin Island. The eastern and largest islet is about 90 feet high. They are surrounded by deep water, and between them and Silanguin Island is a deep channel about y% mile wide. The coast from Silanguin Island to the entrance to Subic Bay, about &y 2 miles eastward, is high and moderately steep-to. Sampaloc and Biniptican Points are the southernmost and most prominent points on this coast. Sueste Point, about 1 mile northeastward of Bi- niptican Point, forming the western entrance to Subic Bay, is high and steep. A light, visible 18 miles, is shown from a cylindrical iron tower painted white with dark trimmings on Sueste Point. A con- crete dwelling with red roof stands about 50 yards westward of the tower. Measured Kile. — A measured mile course for testing the speed of vessels has been laid off in the entrance to Subic Bay ; particulars in regard to it may be obtained from the commandant of the naval station, Olongapo. Subic Bay is an irregular-shaped body of water extending about 8 miles in a general northerly direction, with a width of about Sy 2 miles; its western shore is comparatively straight and bold with no dangers extending over Vi mile from shore. The eastern shore is indented by numerous small bays which are of no importance, except the largest, Port Olongapo. The bay affords good anchorage in several places, especially off Subic and in Olongapo, the inner harbor of which is a good typhoon CJnplf AT" Subic, at the head of the bay, is a town of little importance. A small commercial steamer from Manila calls here weekly. The United States naval station stands on the sandy spit between Port Olongapo and the inner harbor. The village of Olongapo is immediately westward of the naval station. Grande Island divides the entrance to Subic Bay into two chan- nels. It is about % mile in extent and 167 feet high, Chiqutta Islet is a small, low islet lying about % mile southward from Grande Island, with which it is connected by a reef. A shoal covered by a least known depth of 4 fathoms lies % mile southward of Chiquita Islet. 68 LUZON. The main channel, passing westward of Grande Island, is about 1% miles wide and is deep and clear; the channel eastward of Grande Island is narrow and tortuous and should not be used except with local knowledge. Mayanga Island lies in the middle of the bay. It is very small, 38 feet high, and shoals extend northward Vi mile and southeastward y s mile, the end of the latter being marked by a black buoy. Pequena Island lies about l 1 /^ miles northward of Mayanga Island. It is 180 feet high and surrounded by shoals extending southward y 2 mile toward Mayanga Island and over 14 mile west- ward. Northeastward shoal water extends to the eastern shore of the bay. Port Olongapo lies in about the middle of the eastern shore of the bay. In the northeast part is a small basin about y 2 mile long and y± mile wide, with a narrow channel leading through the shoals south- east of Rivera Point. This channel is buoyed, and in addition two triangular white beacons have been placed on Magdalan Bluff to lead through. Good holding ground and shelter in any weather may be had in the inner basin. Calaclan Point, the north point at the entrance, is low, but rises rapidly to a height of 354 feet. On its outer end is a star-shaped beacon painted white with a black center. From Calaclan Point to Rivera Point, at the entrance to the inner harbor, the shore is low and sandy, with low, marshy ground behind it. The buildings of the naval station on Rivera Point are prominent. Cubi Point, the south point at the entrance, is a bluff point 88 feet high. From it a shoal with depths of iy 2 fathoms and less extends about % mile northwestward, its outer end being marked by a red buoy. Pamocan Point, y 2 mile southward of Cubi Point, is also bluff, and from it shoals extend westward for % mile. A small coral shoal, with 3 fathoms, lies 1 mile west-northwest from the point and is marked by a red buoy. Caiman Shoal, lying near the middle of the outer harbor, is small in area and partly awash. A fixed red light, visible 7 miles, is shown from a truncated conical white stone tower on Caiman Shoal, and a red buoy marks the extreme northern edge of the shoal. Caeeasco Shoal is a small unmarked shoal patch lying about ^4 mile southward of Caiman Shoal light. Directions. — By executive order of the President of the United States Subic Bay has been declared a closed port, and permission should be obtained from the naval authorities before attempting to enter. Vessels entering Subic Bay should pass midway between Grande Island and the land westward ; if bound for Olongapo, when the north end of Grande Island is abeam steer northeastward, head- ing for the beacon on Calaclan Point and passing about % mile north- westward from the red buoys marking the detached shoal off Pamo- can Point and the edge of the shoal water off Cubi Point. Hold this course until the conspicuous white spot, Mancha Blanca, on the next cliff eastward from Nagcaban Point is well open, then haul eastward so as to pass Vi mile northward from Caiman Shoal lighthouse. Anchor southward from the navy yard in 12 or 13 fathoms, muddy bottom, with Caiman Shoal lighthouse bearing 271° (270° mag.) distant about y 2 mile. CAPE BOLMTAO TO MANILA BAY. 69 If intending to enter the inner harbor, after passing Caiman Shoal lighthouse, haul southeastward until on the range marks on Magdalan Bluff; then steer this range. The channel between the shoals into the inner harbor is narrow and marked by buoys. The range should be carefully held in case the buoys are gone or out of position. There is good anchorage anywhere in the inner harbor, near the navy yard. There are 2y 2 fathoms alongside the wreck of the Marquis de la Victoria. If bound to Subic, when the north end of Grande Island is abeam, steer for Pequena Island until Mayanga Island is abeam and then haul westward to give Pequena Island a berth of not less than y 2 mile. When the north end of Pequena Island is abeam steer for the town of Subic and anchor off the mouth of the Guagadi Eiver on the western side of the town. In anchoring care must be taken to avoid the shoals making out between Cabangan Point, at the mouth of the river, and Apalit Point, the next point westward. Port Binanga is a small bay lying southward of the entrance to Subic Bay. There are short stretches of sand beach at the head of the bay on either side of the Dapua Point, a conspicuous point with vertical cliffs from 60 to 70 feet high. The remainder of the bay is bordered by a coral reef about 175 yards wide. Anchorage sheltered from all except westerly winds may be found in the middle of the bay in 4 to 6 fathoms, mud. To enter, bring Dapua Point to bear 90° (89° mag.) and steer for it. This course will lead southward of a 2^-fathom shoal in the entrance, lying about % mile offshore. From Buiong Point, the southern entrance point to Port Binanga, the coast trends southward for 2y 2 miles to Mayagao Point then southeastward for 5y 2 miles to Napo Point. The shore is low, wooded, and bordered by a reef. Moron Shoal lies about 1^4 miles west of Panibatujan Point and off the town of Moron. The least depth found was &y 2 fathoms, with irregular bottom between it and the shore. Southeastward of Panibatujan Point the shore is sand beach, with several shoals close in. Pandil Islet, 42 feet high, is joined to Napo Point by a reef. From Napo Point the coast trends eastward and then southward to Luzon Point, forming a large, open bay, with the town of Bagac lying on its eastern shore. Anchorage may be had off the town in 5 to 10 fathoms, taking care to avoid a 3-fathom shoal that lies % mile westward of the town. This anchorage, however, is not shel- tered, as the land breeze blows quite strongly off the Silanganan and Mariveles Mountains and the northeast monsoon draws through the low valley between them. The coast from the head of Bagac Bay to Luzon Point and thence southeastward to Los Cochinos is indented by a number of small bays, several of which have sand beaches at their heads; the points are moderately high, rocky, and bordered by coral reefs. A rock baring at extreme low water lies about 400 meters southwestward of Guay Point. This was the only danger found off the shore reef. All the principal points may be rounded safely at a distance of about y 2 mile. Guay Bay, southeastward of Guay Point, affords anchorage, sheltered from the northeast, for vessels waiting for a fair wind to enter Manila Cochinos Point, the northern entrance point to Manila Bay, is the southeastern extremity of a small wooded peninsula, 313 feet high, 70 LtrzoN. and is connected with the mainland northward by a low, narrow isthmus. Los Cochinos are five rocks, 20 to 70 feet high, which extend nearly 1/2 mile south and southeast from Cochinos Point, and are steep-to. Guardia Shoal is a very small, steep-to shoal, with a least depth of 1 fathom and surrounded by deep water, lying 350 yards southward of Monti Kocks, the most easterly of Los Cochinos. It is marked by a black gas buoy. MANILA BAY (Chart 4255) is about 30 miles long, north and south, and 22 miles wide in the middle. The entrance, between Cochinos Point northward and Limit Point southward, is 12 miles wide, and is divided into two channels by Corregidor and Caballo Islands. The depths range from over 30 fathoms in the entrance to 15 in the middle, decreasing gradu- ally to the shores. The land on both sides of the entrance is high and covered with vegetation. At the eastern head of the bay is the city and harbor of Manila, with Cavite southward from it. Winds. — The northeast monsoon blows strong out of Manila Bay at at times, accompanied by a cloud resembling smoke, which is driven out of the bay to the southwest and forms an arch in that horizon when the sky is otherwise clear; but sometimes sea breezes from the southwest blow into the bay in the northeast monsoon after midday, increasing in strength as you advance into the bay. During the strength of the northeast monsoon, although the wind may be fresh in the entrance, it will frequently be moderate within the bay. During the southwest monsoons, storms, known locally as collas, blow from southwest to west and are accompanied by violent squalls and much rain ; they often last for several days. Land winds, during the northeast monsoon, blow from east in the bay and from southeast on the west coast north of Fuego Point ; they begin about 4 or 5 p. m., fall toward midnight, then set in again from north, changing to northeast during the day and east toward the even- ing. When strong north or southwest winds are prevalent there are generally no land winds, Mariyeles Harbor, immediately inside of the northern entrance point to Manila Bay, is an excellent harbor, easy of access, and affords good anchorage, sheltered from all but southeasterly winds. The harbor is free from danger, except at the head, where shoal water extends about 14 mile. Vessels may anchor in 17 fathoms, with the quarantine wharf bearing 300° (299° mag.) , or they may run farther into the bay, if necessary, the bottom being good holding ground and the anchor- age safe. ^ One of the detention and disinfecting stations of the Quarantine Service is located in the northwestern part of the harbor and may be recognized by the prominent buildings and wharf alongside of which there is a depth of 25 to 28 feet. There is a green light on the end of the wharf, maintained by the quarantine authorities, and typhoon signals are shown when necessary. Fresh water is laid down on the wharf. There is a black buoy southward from the wharf to mark the limit of the 4-fathom. curve and a white mooring buoy 200 yards south- easterly from the north end of the wharf to assist vessels in leaving. MANILA BAY. 71 Sisiman Bay is a small bay lying eastward of Gorda Point, the eastern entrance point to Mariveles Harbor. The Matadero for Manila is located on the northwestern shore of this bay. From Mariveles the shore trends eastward for about 3 miles to Lasisi Point, then northeastward for 4 miles to Lokanin Point and is composed of steep rocky bluffs of moderate height fronted by foul ground extending about 200 meters offshore. From Lokanin Point the shore trends in a north by westerly direction to the head of the bay. The shore for the first 7 miles to abreast Orion Hill continues to be rocky bluffs fronted by a gradually widening reef with occa- sional sand beaches between the points. From Orion Hill northward the country is generally low and fronted by shoal water, which in- creases in width from y^ mile off Pandan Point to about 6 miles at the northwest head of the bay. The towns of Lamao, Limay, Orion, Filar, Balanga, Abucay, Samal, and Oram lie on this section of the coast ; they are of little commercial importance, but have regular steam communication with Manila. An agricultural experiment station is maintained at Lamao, and Limay is the headquarters of an impor- tant lumber company. The shores around the northern head of the bay are. formed by the delta of the Pampanga and other large rivers and are low and marshy. Several of these rivers are navigable and are used by small, light- draft steamers, with local knowledge, plying between Manila and the small towns on them, among which are Calumpit, Bulacan, Hage- noy, and Bacolor. Of the rivers emptying into the northern part of Manila Bay, only the Pasag and Orani may be entered at low tide by small vessels drawing about 5 feet. The shoalest part of the bar at the Pasag entrance is some distance from shore, and the channel is usually marked by poles. After crossing the bar there is a good channel for light-draft steamers as far as Guagua. The outlets of the Pampanga River can be entered only by very light-draft vessels. This river is now seldom used, as the railroad furnishes better trans- portation to the towns formerly dependent upon the river boats. Limit Point, the southern entrance point to Manila Bay, is rocky, steep-to, and about 220 feet high. Limbones Island, 310 feet high, small and rocky, lies immediately northward of Limit Point. Carabao Island, 185 feet high, small and rocky, lies about 2% miles northeast of Limbones Island, and between them is Limbones Cove, 2 miles long, deep and clear. From Limit Point the coast is high, with numerous cliffs nearly to the Maragondon River which forms the eastern boundary of the high land on south side of Manila Bay, about 10 miles northeastward of Limit Point. Beyond Maragondon River the shores are low and marshy to and around the head of the bay. Along the southeastern shore are several small towns of little commercial importance, which are connected with Manila by rail. Among them are Naic, Rosario, Cavite, Kawit, and Bacoor. Corregidor and Caballo Islands divide the entrance to Manila Bay into two broad, deep channels known, respectively, as North and South Channels. The passage between Corregidor and Caballo Islands is about *4 mile wide and has a depth of 7 fathoms in the middle. A reef extends southward from the east end of Corregidor 72 luzon. and the tidal currents sweep through this channel with considerable velocity. The North and South Channels are the ones used by vessels enter- ing Manila Bay. There are practically no dangers for a steam vessel in the entrance to Manila Bay, as both the North Channel and the South Channel are deep and clear. Sailing vessels entering are advised to use the southern channel on account of its greater width, especially with an easterly wind, as the current has less velocity than in the narrow North Channel. Sailing vessels should be guided by the lead and chart in working in or out. Special customs regulations for entering Manila Bay are given in the Appendix, page 349. Corregidor Island forms the south side of the northern channel into Manila Bay. It is 589 feet high in the western part. From Buri Point, the eastern end, a reef extends nearly to Caballo Island ; close to the northwest side are Santa Amalia and Horadaba Bocks. In Corregidor Cove, on the north side of the island, there are two small wharves; a small red light is exhibited from the roof of the shed on the eastern wharf, but it is so low that it is frequently obscured by vessels lying at the wharf. The large buildings are prominent. A light showing white and red flashes alternately every 10 seconds, visible 33 miles, is exhibited 630 feet above high water from a white, round tower, with dwellings at its base, on the summit and south- western part of Corregidor Island; This light is obscured when well in with the north side of the island. From a station near the lighthouse signals by means of the international code are received .and sent ; this station is connected by cable with Manila. There is also a radio station on Corregidor belonging to the United States Army. Caballo Island is a bluff rocky island, 381 feet high and % m il e long, partly covered with verdure, lying about % mile south of the east end of Corregidor. A reef extends y 2 mile from its west end and about 400 yards from its east end. A group flashing light, visible 15 miles, except where obscured by the island of Corregidor, is exhibited 319 feet above high water from the top of a concrete house on one of the higher points of Caballo Island. Monja Island is a small rock 121 feet high, with deep water around it, situated 2% miles westward from the west end of Corregidor Island. It is marked by a light. Fraile Island, about 40 feet high, is a small rock completely cov- ered with structures, and resembling a battleship, 3% miles south- ward of Caballo Island and nearly 2 miles from the south shore of the bay. With the exception of a 6-f athom patch lying about % mile southeastward of it, Fraile Island is surrounded by deep water. San Nicolas Shoals lie about midway between Corregidor and Cavite and extend about 4% miles from the south shore. The outer shoal is steep-to on the north and west sides. The least depth is 2 fathoms about iy 2 miles southeast of the lighthouse. Monja Island, kept open northward of Corregidor, clears these shoals. After passing Corregidor or Caballo, San Nicolas Shoals constitute the only danger between the entrance and Cavite or Manila. The shoal is marked by a light shown from an iron tower on a masonry base on the north- west extremity of the shoal. MANILA BAY. 73 Sangley Point, northward of Canacao Bay, is marked by an alternat- ing light, visible 12 miles, shown from an iron framework, with a concrete dwelling near the base. The towers of the Cavite naval radio station are situated about % mile westward of the light. These towers are 600 feet high and form excellent landmarks for checking a vessel's position as she advances up the bay. Manila, on both sides of the Pasig Eiver, on the eastern shore of the bay, and about 25 miles from its entrance, is the largest city in the Philippines, and is the seat of government of the Philippine Islands. For customs purposes all goods which are manifested or consigned for the port of Manila shall be discharged from the vessel within the prescribed harbor limits, unless permission to discharge outside of said limits be given by the collector of customs. For the harbor limits and boundaries, see Appendix, page 340. All vessels with cargo for Cavite must enter Manila Harbor and obtain pratique and permission from the customs authorities before proceeding to Cavite to discharge. Vessels which for any reason do not intend to enter the harbor or river immediately on arrival may anchor anywhere outside of the breakwaters, within the limits of the port, according to draft. Quarantine regulations are strict, and are enforced by officers of the United States Public Health Service. All vessels entering Manila Harbor shall be considered in quarantine until boarded by the quar- antine officer and given pratique by him. Until pratique has been given the customary quarantine flag shall be kept flying at the fore. Pilotage in and out of Manila Harbor is optional, but into the Pasig Eiver is compulsory. Pilots can be obtained by making the usual signal. Manila Harbor (chart 4236), an artificial harbor about 1,200 acres in extent, is situated southward from the Pasig Eiver, with which it is connected by a canal for lighters. The greater part of the harbor, northward of a line drawn from the west entrance to the Legaspi Landing, is kept dredged to a depth of 30 feet. There are wharf accommodations for vessels of the largest class and there are a number of mooring buoys belonging to the Government and the various steam- ship lines. Between the north end of the harbor and the 9-foot canal leading into the Pasig is a basin about 300 yards square for small craft. There is a marine railway on the north side of this basin. Engineer Island is a small artificial island, about 250 by 150 yards in extent, westward from the above-mentioned canal and forming the south side of the entrance to the Pasig Eiver. On it are the Govern- ment marine railway and repair plant. Breakwaters. — From the south side of the entrance to the Pasig, the West Breakwater, convex to seaward, extends southward for l^r miles, and about 225 yards southeastward from its south end the South Breakwater begins and trends ^ mile southeastward. Be- tween these breakwaters is the west entrance, about 200 yards wide, with a depth of 30 feet, and between the south end of the South Break- water and the shore is the south entrance, about 1^4 miles wide. Back of the South Breakwater is a 24-foot channel, about y± mile wide, leading to the dredged area in the northern part of the harbor. From the eastern side of this channel the water shoals gradually to the shore. Manila Harbor is well lighted and buoyed. For details consult chart 4236 or the List of Lights, Buoys, Beacons, and Daymarks of 74 LUZON. the Philippine Islands. The latter is published by the Bureau of Commerce and Industry, Manila. A horizontally striped buoy marks the end of a submerged break- water on the northwest side of the channel leading to the Legaspi Landing. Vessels should not attempt to pass between it and the shore nor within 100 feet of it on either side. A horizontally striped buoy in l 1 /^ fathoms, about % mile west- ward of Pasig lighthouse, marks the sewer outfall. This buoy is moored about 75 yards outside the sewer outfall which is covered by 4% feet. Pasig River divides the city of Manila into two parts ; -its entrance, confined between two stone jetties extending westward from its north and south points, has a depth of 18 feet on the bar at low water and 18 feet in the river, with accommodations near the river walls for vessels that can cross the bar. These depths are continually changing and have to be maintained by dredging. The channel across the bar is marked by buoys. Navigation in the river for seagoing steamers is limited by the Bridge of Spain, 1 mile above the mouth of the river. There are a number of small steamers plying on the Pasig River between Manila and Laguna de Bay. Telegraph. — Manila is connected with Guam, Honolulu, San Fran- cisco, Shanghai, Hongkong, Iloilo, and Cebu by commercial cables, and the postal telegraph system extends to all places of importance throughout the islands. Time signals from the observatory are sent out daily on the telegraph lines at 11 a. m., standard time,one hundred and twentieth meridian, longitude east from Greenwich, which is the standard time used throughout the Philippine Islands. A time ball on the observatory at Ermita and one on the semaphore tower at the mouth of the Pasig River are hoisted five minutes before noon and dropped at noon, Philippine standard time, equivalent to 16 h 00 m 00 s , Greenwich mean time. Typhoon signals are shown from a signal staff near the cathedral and from the semaphore tower at the mouth of the Pasig River in accordance with instructions received from the weather bureau. (See Appendix.) Tides. — The tide tables published annually by the Coast and Geo- detic Survey include predictions for each day of the year for Manila (Pasig River entrance). The tides at Manila are dependent mainly on the declination of the moon, and have little relation to the phases of the moon. The highest high waters occur near the time of the moon's greatest north and south declination, and at this period there is but one high and one low water during each 24 hours. The lowest high waters occur near the time of the moon's least declination, and at this period there are two high and two low waters during each 24 hours. The greatest range of tide occurs usually in June and De- cember and the smallest range in March and September. Cavite (chart 4236) is about 7y 2 miles southwest of Manila and is the site of the United States navy yard. The harbor is formed by a low peninsula, the north extremity of which, named Sangley Point, is reported to be extending at the rate of 35 feet per year. The build- ings of the Cafiacao Dock Co. -and the coal bunkers, surmounted by a large water tank, are prominent features in identifying the point in daytime. This water tank should not be confused with the promi- nent water tower near the eastern end of the peninsula on which the MANILA BAY TO CAPE SANTIAGO. 75 navy yard is situated. A time ball is dropped from a staff on the water tower at the navy yard at 11 a. m., one hundred and twentieth meridian standard time (longitude east of Greenwich). A channel leading to the coal bunkers has been dredged to 22 feet ; the remainder of Canacao Bay ranges from 18 to 19 feet to 12 and 13 feet within a short distance of the beach. Good shelter is afforded in south and southwest winds. Typhoon signals are displayed at the navy yard. Bacoor Bay, south of the naval station, is shoal. Regulations. — By act No. 238, United States Philippine Commis- sion, that part of Cavite Anchorage southward of a line drawn from Sangley Point to Paranaque and for % mile north of this line has been placed under the police supervision of the naval officer in com- mand of the Asiatic station, United States Navy, in so far as relates to the control of vessels in this harbor. Vessels are not allowed to berth within these limits without having first obtained permission, except when, by reason of stress of weather or any other urgent neces- sity, a vessel is obliged to enter Cavite Harbor. In this case she shall anchor temporarily in any open berth, but is required to keep steam up, ready to move until such anchorage is confirmed or the vessel is directed to another berth. Compass Ranges. — The following bearings of easily distinguished ranges in Manila Bay are given for convenience in determining com- pass deviations: La Monja Lighthouse to Corregidor Lighthouse, 85° 43' (84° 48' mag.). San Nicolas Lighthouse to Sangley Point water tank, 67° 55' (67° 00' mag.). San Nicolas Lighthouse to Mount Sungay, 139° 33' (138° 38' mag.). Sangley Point water tower to Mount Sungay, 163° 34' (162° 39' mag.). Pasig River Lighthouse to Malabon Church, northeast spire, 351° 58' (351° 03' mag.). Pasig River Lighthouse to Tondo Church dome, 30° 04' (29° 09' mag.). Pasig River Lighthouse to San Sebastian Church, northeast spire, 83° 25' (82° 31' mag.). Pasig River Lighthouse to ice-plant stack, 93° 08' (92° 13' mag.). Pasig River Lighthouse to cathedral dome, 111° 49' (110° 54' mag.). The bearing of Mount Sungay when in range with San Nicolas beacon or Sangley Point water tank on top of the coal bunkers, will be found especially useful on account of the great distance of the peak (about 24 miles) . A vessel may, after bringing either of these ranges on, when about 2 miles distant, steam around in a circle, going 200 yards from the range without altering the bearing of the peak more than % degree. Mount Sungay is a moderately high (2,546 feet), sharp peak at the eastern end of the table-land southward of Manila Bay. It is prominent and readily distinguishable, but in case any doubt exists it can be settled by bringing either front object on the proper compass bearing and the peak will be seen in line with it, or nearly so. MANILA BAT TO CAPE SANTIAGO. From Limit Point, the southern entrance point to Manila Bay, the coast trends southward for about 6 miles to Fuego Point. It is hioh and rocky, irregular in outline, has several small islets off it and is very steep-to. It is indented by several small coves all of which afford anchorage sheltered from all except westerly winds. 76 LUZON. Soundings off this part of Luzon are deep and irregular and afford little or no warning when approaching the dangers which have deep water close-to; consequently the navigator should approach this coast with caution. Hamilo Cove (chart 4257) lies about 3 miles southward of Limit Point, between a small unnamed islet 97 feet high northward and Hamilo Point southward. In the eastern part of the cove there is a basin about ^4 mile wide at the entrance and about % mile in ex- tent. The head of this basin is shoal and fringed with mangroves, leaving a well-protected anchorage about % mile in diameter within the 3-fathom curve. The best anchorage is in the northern part of this basin in 6 to 8 fathoms, muddy bottom. Hamilo Point is 360 feet high ; an island, 120 feet high, lies imme- diately westward of it. About % mile within Hamilo Point, and about 300 yards from shore, are some prominent pinnacle rocks 30 feet high. Fuego Point, about 2 miles southward of Hamilo Point, is 70 feet high at the western extremity and has two small islets, the outer one of which is 93 feet high, lying immediately northward of it. Be- tween these two points the coast recedes, forming three distinct bays, and about midway between the points are two small islets forming the southern entrance to Looc Cove, the middle one of the bays just mentioned. Looc Cove is 2 miles long and % mile wide ; the shores are steep-to except toward the head, where the soundings decrease gradually to a sand beach backed by trees. From Fuego Point the coast trends south-southeastward, with a curve eastward for 6% miles to San Diego Point, forming Nasugbu Bay. From Fuego Point to Nasugbu Point, 4% miles southeastward, the coast is high and wooded, but from Nasugbu Point to San Diego Point, 3 miles southward, it is low, with a dark sandy shore, which is wooded and steep-to. The Wawa River empties on the south side of Nasugbu Point and the Liang River about 1% miles southward of it ; both of these rivers have less than 2 feet on their bars at low water. The town of Nasugbu lies about *4 mile inland between the mouths of the "Wawa and Liang Rivers. It has occasional steam communica- tion with Manila. A light is shown from a white concrete pillar at the mouth of the Wawa River to mark the anchorage for Nasugbu. About 1% miles south-southeastward of Fuego Point are two small islets, covered with grass and about 35 feet high ; they are connected by a reef covered by 2 feet. About % mile northeastward of the larger islet are some rocks awash. Pillar Eock is a prominent pinnacle rock, about 25 feet high and 15 feet diameter at the base, lying about 100 yards westward of Nasugbu Point. Nearly % mile northwestward of Pillar Rock is a rock awash. A dangerous rocky shoal, on which the least depth near the center is 1% feet, lies with its eastern end nearly % mile southward of Pillar Rock and y 2 mile from the shore eastward of the shoal. Good an- chorage, protected during the northeast monsoon, may be found southward and eastward of the shoal just mentioned in 6 or 7 fath- oms about 1/2 mile from shore. Small coasting steamers sometimes anchor between the shoal and Nasugbu Point, convenient to the mouth of the river. BALAYAN BAY. 77 Fortune Island, 390 feet high, lies 7% miles west-southwestward of Nasugbu Point. It is partially wooded and steep-to. A light, visible 10 miles, is shown from a white concrete pillar on the highest point of the island. Talin Bay, lying between San Diego Point and Talin Point, is open to the northwest and foul. Its shores are composed of alternate rocky cliffs and sandy beaches. Talin Point is about 200 feet high, of rocks and short sand beaches, which serve as a base to several pyramidal hills very slightly wooded. It is surrounded by a reef 200 yards wide. From Talin Point the coast trends southerly for 10 miles to Calata- gan Point, thence southeasterly for about 3 miles to Cape Santiago. Northward of Calatagan Point the shore is very low, sandy, and cov- ered with mangrove's ; it is indented by several estuaries and fronted by a reef which extends l 1 /^ miles in places. Irregular bottom, with depths of 3% to 7 fathoms, lies 2 to 2% miles from shore between San Diego and Calatagan Points. Southward of Calatagan Point the land is higher and the shore reef narrows to a mere fringe. Between Calatagan Point and Cape Santiago the shore reef is steep-to and there are no detached dangers. Cape Santiago, the southwestern extremity of Luzon, is 300 to 380 feet high, wooded, and surrounded by a reef which bares about 200 yards. The soundings at the edge of the reef are 4 and 5 fathoms, deepening abruptly to 40 and 60 fathoms at a distance of y% mile. A group flashing light, visible 15 miles, is shown from a round, white tower on a low rocky promontory about 850 yards west-northwest of the southern extremity of the cape. SOUTHWEST COAST OF LUZON. BALAYAN BAY, the great bay between Cape Santiago and Bagalangit Point is deep and clear of danger, with bottom of sand and mud, but the shores are so steep that a vessel must approach very close to get within 12 fathoms depth. The winds in this bay follow the monsoons gener- ally ; the land breeze blows nearly every evening. The flood stream sets northward and the ebb southward. Fagapas Bay, between Cape Santiago and San Pedrino Point, is very deep and affords no good anchorage. The shore is fringed with a narrow reef, with deep water near its edge. There are two small breaks in the reef at the head of the bay, each about 250 yards in extent, where a small craft could find sheltered anchorage. San Perdino Point is bold and 744 feet high about y± mile from its eastern extremity. It is well wooded and is encircled by a reef, which extends 100 yards from the shore. The town of Balayan (chart 4257) lies on the shore about 5 miles northward of San Pedrino Point at the mouth of a small, unim- portant river, having only 3 feet of water on its bar at high water. There is a coral reef extending over % m & & offshore in front of the town, on he ouer edge of which are several shoal spots that show at low tide. A fixed red light is shown from a white frame structure on the beach at the eastern end of the town. The usual anchorage for large 78 ltjzou. vessels is in 10 or 12 fathoms, about 600 yards offshore, with the light bearing 329° (328° mag.), and the dome of the church bearing 295° (294° mag.). Small vessels drawing 10 feet or less anchor abreast of the east end of the reef in 5 to 7 fathoms, with the light on the same bearing about % mile distant. Taal and lemery (chart 4257) are towns 11 miles east-southeasterly from Balayan, on opposite banks and near the mouth of the Pansipit Eiver. The Pansipit River, which flows from Lake Taal, enters the bay about y 2 mile below the bridge which connects the two towns; there is 7 feet on the bar at high water, allowing small vessels and launches to enter. A fixed red light is established as a mark for the anchorage at Taal and Lemery. The usual anchorage for large vessels is about % mile westward of the light, in 15 or 16 fathoms. Small vessels anchor, according to draft, anywhere off the town of Lemery. Bagalangit Point, the western point of Calumpang Peninsula, is a rocky bluff, 440 feet high, fringed by a very narrow reef, which ex- tends around the southwest part of the peninsula nearly to Cazador Point. This part of the coast is clean, with soundings of 25 fathoms close-to. Cazador Point is the southern point of the Calumpang Peninsula which separates Balayan and Batangas Bays. It is formed by a strip of land about 150 feet high, covered with trees; off the point and joined to it are some rocks, and a reef extends about 200 yards from its eastern side, deepening abruptly, with soundings of 70 to 90 fathoms at }4 m il e southeast of the point. between Cazador Point and Matoco Point, 9, miles east-southeast- ward, is clear and deep, with steep coasts. From Cazador Point to Maynaga Cove, 6 miles northward, the coast is steep, rocky, and wooded, and can be passed without danger at a distance of y 2 mile. From Maynaga Cove the coast is low, with sand beaches cut by numerous small rivers. Maynaga Cove, about 6 miles northward of Cazador Point, affords sheltered anchorage for small craft in heavy southwest weather in 10 to 16 fathoms, muddy bottom, with Montintubig Peak in range with a small wooded 210-foot hill bearing 280° (279° mag.). Banan, a small, unimportant town at the head of Batangas Bay, may be recognized by a conspicuous white church, which forms a good landmark for vessels entering the bay; it is connected with Manila by railroad. From Bauan to Pinamucan Point, 3% miles southward of Batan- gas, the whole coast is formed by sand beaches, and vessels of all sizes can anchor off it, but necessarily very close in on account of the great depth of water. Between Bauan and Batangas a depth of 12 to 14 fathoms will be found at less than 400 yards from the beach, and this anchorage is preferred by the small vessels that visit this coast on account of its good holding ground and proximity to these two towns. In case of necessity anchorage can be had east or west of the above roadstead, but very close to the beach and on bottom of gravel and rock. Batangas (chart 4257), the principal town on the bay, is a coastwise port of considerable importance. It is about 3 miles southeastward BATANGAS BAT. 79 of Bauan, on the Calumpang River and about % mile inland. The landing is marked by a dilapidated stone pier and the village of Santa Clara. A fixed red light is exhibited from a white wooden tripod erected on shore at the end of the pier. Small vessels steer for the pier on a 45° (44° mag.) bearing and anchor in 8 or 9 fathoms of water, allowing sufficient swinging room to clear some broken piles which were formerly part of a wooden extension of the pier. Large vessels find good anchorage in 15 to 18 fathoms southwestward of the pier. From Batangas Pier the coast trends southerly for about 7% miles to Matoco Point, the eastern entrance to Batangas Bay. The Calum- pang River empties about iy 2 miles southeastward of the pier; the bar is about 300 yards wide, and has very little water on it at low tide. From the Calumpang River to Naboled Point, about 4 miles southward, the shore is lined with sand and gravel, thence to Matoco Point it is lined with bowlders and fringed by a narrow, steep-to, coral reef. Soundings of 5 fathoms are found close to the shore, and off Matoco Point the 100-fathom curve approaches within % mile of the shore. Maricaban Island, about -1% miles southward of Cazador Point, is high and covered with trees. Near the eastern end, Mount Casapao, bare of trees and covered with cogon grass, rises to a height of 1,468 feet ; near the western end is another mountain 1,005 feet high, ter- minating in a peak, which can be seen distinctly from the vicinity of Cape Santiago. The whole coast is bordered by rocks, and two rocky islets, Caban and Sombrero, lie off the northwest end, and two others, Culebra and Malajibomanoc,voff the eastern end. Caban Island, lying eastward of the northwest end of Maricaban, is 285 feet high and sparsely covered with trees and bushes. Sombrero Islet, over y 2 mile northward of the northwest end of Mar- icaban, is surrounded by a coral reef with some heads out of water and others awash. It is 142 feet high, covered with low bushes, and forms a very prominent landmark. Sepoc Point, the northwestern point of Maricaban, is a steep, rocky headland 120 feet high ; from a distance it appears to be an island, but it is connected with the mainland by a rocky isthmus 4 or 5 feet high. A shoal about 300 yards in extent, with a least depth of 5 feet, lies 1 mile southwestward of Sepoc Point; between this shoal and the coast is a channel % mile wide, with a depth of 20 fathoms in the middle. Another shoal, on which the least depth is 13 feet, lies about 14 mile northward of the north end of Caban Island. A reef, with rocky heads awash and deep water alongside, is about 300 yards from the north shore of Maricaban Island, 1% miles south- ward of Cazador Point. Culebra Islet lies a little more than ^4 mile from the east end of Maricaban. It is about 60 feet high and covered with trees, the tops of which are about 95 feet high. The shore is rocky, bowlders and coral, except the most northern point, which is coral sand. The chan- nel between Culebra and Maricaban has a width of about 200 yards and a depth of 6 fathoms. Malajibomanoc Islet, lying nearly % mile eastward of Culebra, is low and covered with trees, the tops of which are about 35 feet high. 80 Ltrzotf. In the channel between Malajibomanoc and Culebra depths of 8 to 20 fathoms are found. Port Maricaban (chart 4257) is formed by the strait between Mari- caban and Caban Islands and can be entered from either end, but the passage from the northward is preferable. It is sometimes used as a harbor of refuge for small vessels, which anchor off the village of Maricaban and moor to the shore and to each other to prevent swinging. Maricaban Strait, between Cazador Point and Maricaban Island, is clear and safe, the only hidden danger being the shoal % mile north- ward of Caban Island. The strait is used by the coasting steamers trading to Batangas. There is no good anchorage in it ; small coast- ing vessels sometimes anchor near the island, if necessary; but the tidal streams run with considerable velocity, and the anchor must be let go so close to the rocks that there is danger of being swept ashore before it grips. The passage south of Maricaban is deep and clear and is always used in navigating Verde Island Passage. Verde Island, about By 2 miles from the co.ast, is triangular in shape, 1,311 feet high, and well wooded. There are two prominent peaks on it, reported visible over 40 miles. The island can be approached with safety, though there are some detached rocks close to the shore ; off the southeast point are some rocks that uncover 200 yards from shore. On the north side is a bay in which the depth is from 10 to 7 fathoms near the shore, with a high wooded coast with occasional sand beaches, affording a shelter in southerly winds. ' Verde Island Passage, lies between the south coast of Luzon and the north coast of Mindoro. It is divided into the North and South Passes by Verde Island ; both passes are safe, but the northern one is preferred, as the southern is complicated by the Baco Islands. MATOCO POINT TO BANTIGUI POINT. Matoco Point, which forms the eastern entrance point of Batangas Bay, is high, wooded, and precipitous, with one low point to the southwest. The coast eastward is rocky for 1 mile as far as a sloping point (Ilijan) ; it then forms a slight indentation for V/ 2 miles east- ward, ending in Arenas Point. Arenas Point, the second point east of Matoco, consists of sand and stones, which serve to distinguish it. It is low and clean, and the tidal currents rush past it with great velocity. Talaji Point, iy 2 miles east by north of Arenas, is not very prominent; it is rocky and wooded. Westward of the point good water can be obtained. From Talaji Point to Rosario Point, 6 miles east by north, the coast is covered with trees and shows a sandy beach fringed by rocks close-to. Rosario River empties at the point of the same name. There is a bar at the mouth with S or 4 feet at low water. From Rosario River to Malabrigo Point the shore is sandy, wooded, and of regular height. lobo is about 1 mile inshore from the head of the bay, immediately westward of Rosario Point. Good anchorage may be had off Lobo in 12 fathoms, about 300 yards from shore. From this anchorage Mala- brigo light, just showing over the shrubbery on Rosario Point, bears 118° (117° mag.), a prominent white house 36° (35 c mag.), and Baco TAYABAS BAY. 81 Chico Islet 183° (182° mag.). Vessels should approach this anchor- age cautiously, as the water shoals rapidly. Anchorage can be found in northerly winds for vessels of all sizes between Matoco Point and Malabrigo Point, but the shore is very steep, and at less than 400 yards from it the depth is from 8 to 13 fathoms; bottom, coarse sand and gravel. Malabrigo Point is the southwestern extremity of the broad headland formed by the spurs of Lobo Peaks ; Punas is the central, and Mala- gundi the eastern, point of this headland. The coast between these points is of moderate height and well wooded, rocky between Mala- brigo and Punas, and bordered with sand beach and rocks from there to Malagundi. Punas Point is noticeable because of some red patches at a short distance from the beach, and Lobo Peaks, 3,301 feet high, serve to indicate the position from the southeast. A group flashing alternating light, visible 20 miles, is shown from a white cylindrical tower near the extremity of Malabrigo Point. Locoloco Point is about 10 miles east-northeastward of Malabrigo Point. The coast is high as far as the western entrance point to Siga- yan Bay, where the high land back of Punas Point terminates. Ves- sels of all sizes can anchor between Malagundi Point and Sigayan Bay, but close to the shore, which is very steep, The bottom is gen- erally coarse sand mixed with gravel. Sigayan Bay lies immediately westward of Locoloco Point. The northeast shore of the bay is fringed by a coral reef, covered at high water, and vessels, should anchor well over in the western part of the bay. From Locoloco Point to Bantigui Point, 4 miles northeastward, the coast hills are about 400 feet high and wooded. This vicinity ap- pears sunk when seen from the vicinity of the southern part of Marinduque, there being high mountains on either side, but not be- hind, these points. TAYABAS BAT. Bantigui Point, the western entrance point of Tayabas Bay, is a wooded headland about 350 feet high and forms a prominent land- mark when entering the bay. It is steep-to on its southern and east- ern sides, but on its northern side a narrow coral reef begins, which gradually widens and fringes the shores of Coloconto Bay and ex- tends around Subuquin Point; Mount Banajao lies nearly north of Bantigui Point and about 12 miles from the coast. It is a truncated cone 7,066 feet high and is a conspicuous landmark when not obscured by clouds. It is about midway between Laguna de Bay and Tayabas Bay. Coloconto Bay lies between Bantigui and Subuquin Points. A small inlet at the head of the bay serves as a shelter for small craft in southwest gales. There is a small islet covered with trees within it, and in the entrance there are several rocks, which are mostly bare at low water. Good anchorage in 15 fathoms, protected from south- west winds, may be found about % mile from shore with Bantigui Point bearing 125° (124° mag.). From Subuquin Point the coast trends northward, with a slight curve westward, for 5y 2 miles to the mouth of the Nayon River, thence northeastward for 10 miles to the mouth of the Tayabas River. 97172°— 19 6 82 Luzon. It is low and wooded, and bordered by sand beaches which are inter- sected by small streams. Nayon Eiver has about 3 feet of water on the bar, deepening inside to 9 feet; it affords shelter to small coasters. Bolboc is a small town about 4 miles westward of the mouth of the Nayon Eiver. The road leading to the town starts near the mouth of a small stream which empties about 1% miles southwestward of the Nayon. Vessels .can anchor off the coast between Coloconto Bay and the mouth of the Tayabas Eiver, 14 mile from the shore in 12 fathoms, mud bottom. There are a number of shoals in the western part of Tayabas Bay which must be carefully avoided by vessels seeking anchorage. A small, dangerous coral reef, with a least depth of 1% fathoms and surrounded by depths of from 10 to 15 fathoms, lies nearly 1 mile from shore south-southeastward of the mouth of the Nayon Eiver. Nearer the shore and extending southwestward for nearly 2 miles there is a dangerous reef shoaling suddenly from 7 and 8 fathoms to 114 and 2 fathoms. Another reef, covered by a least depth of y 2 fathom, lies about 2y 2 miles northeastward of the mouth of the Nayon Eiver and 1 mile from the shore. The vicinity of these reefs should be avoided, as they are not vis- ible because of the discolored water. Tayabas River is about 150 yards wide at the mouth and has about 1 fathom on the bar at high water, increasing to 2 fathoms inside. The depths on the bar seem to be decreasing, and small boats can not enter the river at low tide. The point eastward of the mouth of the river trends southerly and forms a bight, where anchorage may be found in 5 to 7 fathoms, mud and sand bottom. This anchorage is further protected from northeast winds by a reef, on which are a number of small islets, projecting from the point just described. Lucena, (chart 4267), a town of considerable importance connected with Manila by railroad, is about 2y 2 miles from the coast, between two small rivers, which form the Tayabas Eiver. A fixed red light visible 10 miles is exhibited from a white steel- frame tower on the beach near high water mark on the western side of the mouth of the Tayabas Eiver. There are several shoal patches of from 2y 2 to 4 fathoms about 1% miles southward of the mouth of the river. Directions. — Vessels approaching the anchorage at the mouth of the Tayabas Eiver are advised to bring the light to bear 12° (11° mag.) when at least 2 miles distant; steer for the light on this bear- ing, and good anchorage will be found in about 7 fathoms with the eastern entrance point bearing 61° (60° mag.). , Leaving this anchorage, vessels should steer with the light over the stern bearing 12° (11° mag.) for at least 2 miles, when the course may be shaped as desired. From Tayabas Point a great reef extends eastward and southward for nearly 7 miles, then curves around northward, leaving a channel about % mile wide between it and Pagbilao Grande Island. On the eastern part of the reef are a number of spots which bare at low water. The south end of Pagbilao Chica Island bearing 74° (7.3° mag.) and the eastern entrance point to the Tayabas Eiver bearing TAYABAS BAT. 83 288° (287° mag.) clear the southern side of this reef. A black buoy not set marks the extreme southern edge of the above reef. Pagbilao Bay lies between Bocboc Point, about 6 miles east-north- eastward of the mouth of the Tayabas Eiver, and Pagbilao Grande Island; the available anchorage area is reduced by reefs and shoal water to a space about 1 mile in extent. Directions. — To enter Pagbilao Bay give the southwestern part of Pagbilao Grande a berth of about % mile and steer for Angas Point, well open westward of Patayan Island, bearing 335° (334° mag,). Good anchorage will be found in 5 fathoms, with the hill on Patayan Island bearing 347° (346° mag.) and Bocboc Point bear- ing 230° (229° mag.). Light-draft vessels may anchor farther west- ward and obtain more shelter in southwest winds. Patayan Island is about 90 feet high and quite prominent. Angas Point is about 25 feet high, has a bare surface, and is easily recog- nized. The church at Pagbilao is visible from a considerable dis- tance and forms a good landmark. Fagbilao Grande Island is of triangular form and nearly joined to the mainland, forming with it the bays of Pagbilao westward and Laguimanoc eastward. Mount Mitra, in the northeast part, is 530 feet high and is the highest point on the island. The southern side is steep-to, having a depth of from 12 to 14 fathoms, mud, at a distance of ^4 mile. This is the point to make for when entering Pagbilao Bay. Fagbilao Chica Island, lying eastward of Pagbilao Grande, is joined to the larger island by a strip of sand. It is crescent shaped, forming westward the little bay of Capulaan, at the entrance of which the depth is 14 fathoms, decreasing to 5 fathoms at the edge of the shoal water that fills the head of the bay. Capulaan Bay affords good sheltered anchorage during the northeast monsoon, but is open to the southwest. Mount Lipata, near the southern end of the island, is 599 feet high and has a large white spot on the southwest side, near the top, that is very prominent and may be seen 20 miles in clear weather. Mangayao Island is a small wooded island lying on the east side of the entrance to Laguimanoc Bay about 1% miles eastward of the mid- dle of the eastern side of Pagbilao Chica Island; it is an island at high water only, being surrounded by mud flats bare at low water. The northern part of the island is f ringed with mangroves ; the southern part is a sand beach. A reef, partly bare at low water, extends 1}4 miles southward from it. Tubig Point, the western extremity of the island, is a low bluff surrounded by rocks, and there are also rocks off the southern point. Laguimanoc Point, the western extremity of the land on the eastern side of Port Laguimanoc, is composed of low bluffs, fringed by rocks. It is well wooded and 137 feet high. The small village of Laguimanoc, from which considerable lumber is shipped, lies on the point of the same name. Port Laguimanoc (chart 4267) , eastward of the Pagbilao Islands, is reduced by reefs and islets on both sides and at its head to a channel about % mile wide and 2V 2 miles long, in which the soundings grad- ually decrease from 11 to 2 fathoms, sand and mud. Great care must be taken to avoid the reefs, which extend from both sides of the en- trance, narrowing the channel considerably, and also two shoals lying 84 LUZON'. on the western side of the channel. The southern shoal has a least depth of 2 fathoms and the northern one \y 2 fathoms. High Islet, the first islet on the eastern side of the entrance, is small and 65 feet high ; it is steep-to on its western side, but on the southern side a reef extends y± mile southward. Calaba Islet, immediately northward of High Islet, is also small and about 40 feet high. Talaban Island lies across the head of the navigable channel, is small and wooded, and 39 feet high. Directions. — To enter "Laguimanoc bring Calaba Islet and La- guimanoc Point in range bearing 357° (356° mag.) and steer in on this range. When Tubig Point is abeam, about % mile distant, the vessel will be past the shoals on the western side of the channel and should be headed for the west end of Talaban Island on a 338° (337° mag.) course, and anchorage taken up according to draft. Small craft can find good, protected anchorage immediately northward of Laguimanoc Point and also northward of Talaban Island. From the entrance to Port Laguimanoc to Tuquian Point, about 29 miles southeastward, the coast is generally low, with a flat sand beach fringed with coral reefs of varying width and broken in places by mangroves. Inland the country is thinly wooded near the shore, with scattered patches of cultivated ground. At a greater distance back the low hills begin and are heavily wooded. Anchorage may be had nearly anywhere along this coast, but the principal places are Unisan, Pitogo, and Macalelon. Vessels not intending to make a stop are advised to give the coast a berth of 2y 2 miles, as dangerous de- tached reefs lie nearly that far out. Malatandan Point, about 8y 2 miles east-southeastward of Port La- guimanoc, is bold, rocky, wooded, and formed by a hill 179 feet high, and is surrounded by low, level land. The western side of the point is steep-to, but from the southern part a coral reef extends southward to a distance of about y 2 mile. About % mile west-southwestward of Malatandan Point is the northeast extremity of a large, dangerous reef, partly bare at low water. Calaylayan Bay lies immediately southeastward of Malatandan Point. The head of the bay is shoal, and a wide sandy beach is bare at low water. The town of Tlnisan, an occasional port of call for coasting steamers, lies at the head of the bay. The small river empty- ing at the town has very little water on its bar at low water, and small craft entering are dependent on the tide. There is a small shipbuild- ing plant. The bay affords good anchorage, sheltered only during the north- east monsoon. To approach this anchorage vessels should bring the town to bear 35° (34° mag.) and steer for it, anchoring in 4 fathoms, soft muddy bottom, when Malatandan Point bears 332° (331° mag.). Silaneapo Point, about 2y 2 miles southeastward of Malatandan Point, is low and generally fringed with mangroves at its extremity, but rises to a height of 295 feet at a distance of a little more than 1 mile inland. Mabio Point, about 4% miles southeastward of Silaneapo Point, is low, covered with mangroves, and fringed with coral. Between those points the shore line is sandy beach, alternating with mangroves; about midway a small stream empties, near the mouth of which are some conspicuous black rocks about 8 feet high. The most outlying TAYABAS BAY TO BAGAY GULP. 85 danger in the vicinity of Mabio Point is a small, 4-fathom reef 1% miles west-southwestward of Mabio Point. Several shoal reefs lie between this one and the shore. Pitogo, the principal town in this vicinity, lies at the head of an irregularly shaped indentation, which is about 2% miles wide be- tween Mabio and Pagbabaugnan Points. It is built on a point of land between the mouths of Lagalag and Mayuboc Rivers, both of which are small and unimportant. The church is a prominent stone edifice with a tower on the eastern end ; it forms a good landmark. Pitogo is visited weekly by a small coasting steamer. Good anchor- age may be found by bringing the church to bear 45° (44° mag.), steering for it, and anchoring in 5 fathoms when the church is about 94 mile distant. Small vessels and those having local knowledge may proceed closer in, care being taken to avoid a l 1 /^ fathom patch which lies eastward of the above course. About 2 miles southward of Pitogo is the western extremity of a large coral reef, which bares at about half tide ; about ^4 mile south- ward of the western extremity of this reef is a small 1^-fathom patch with deep water around it. Macalelon is a small town at the mouth of the small river of the same name about 4 miles southeastward of Pitogo. It has weekly steamer communication. The reefs are very extensive in this vicinity, making off 1 to 2 miles. To vessels desiring to anchor off Macalelon no helpful directions can be given beyond the warning that a stranger should not go into less than 7 fathoms and should anchor with the large house in Macalelon bearing 46° (45° mag.). A small, dangerous reef, with a least depth of 2^4 fathoms, lies V/± miles from shore 2% miles west-southwestward of the town of Hingoso. Hingoso is a small village about 4 miles southeastward from Ma- calelon. Small steamers call here weekly. Vessels seeking anchorage off Hingoso should bring the town to bear 90° (89° mag.) and steer for it and anchor according to draft. Southwestward and southward of Hingoso and 1 to 2 miles from shore is a chain of dangerous detached reefs and one rock awash, all of which can be cleared by keeping Tuquian Point bearing nothing southward of 130° (129° mag.). TATABAS BAY TO EAGAY GULF. Tuquian Point is low, covered with mangroves, and not conspicuous from south or southeast; it is fringed by a reef, which extends 14 mile westward and % mile southeastward. In the passage between Tuquian Point and Mompog Island the flood tide sets southeast and. the ebb tide northwest. From Tuquian Point the coast trends in an east-southeast direction for about 9 miles to Ajus Point. Between Tuquian and Ajus Points are two deep indentations in the shore line, Tagabas and Catanauan Bays. . . Tagabas Bay, about 2 miles eastward from Tuquian Point, has a depth of 7 fathoms in the entrance, shoals very gradually toward the head, and affords the safest anchorage on the Luzon coast between Port Laguimanoc and Ragay Gulf. 86 luzon. Puting Buhangin Shoal is a detached coral reef topped by a small shifting sand cay which bares at about half tide ; it is about % mile west-southwest from the western extremity of Sandoval Point. Besides the main body of the shoal, which bares at extreme low water, shoal water extends farther eastward, between which and the point is a channel sometimes used by coasters. There is a 3-fathom patch about 1 mile west-southwest from Puting Buhangin Shoal, with deep water between it and the shoal. These shoals are dangers to naviga- tion along this coast, but serve to partially protect Tagabas Bay from southwesterly seas. Directions. — To enter Tagabas Bay bring the northern side of the western extremity of Sandoval Point to bear 90° (89° mag.) before Tuquian Point bears westward of 0° (359° mag.) and steer for it. When Puting Buhangin Shoal is abeam, haul northeastward and anchor according to draft. Sandoval Point, separating Tagabas and Catanauan Bays, is low, heavily wooded, and fringed with mangroves. It is surrounded by reefs baring at low water, which at no place exceed y% mile in width. Sandoval Point is nearly straight on its seaward side for a distance of iy s miles and is connected with the mainland by an isthmus less than Y2 mile wide. Catanauan Bay, eastward of Sandoval Point, has an entrance be- tween points fringed with coral reefs. The eastern extremity of Sandoval Point sends out a rocky reef to a distance of about % mile beyond the mangrove shore line ; on this reef are several rocks which bare at half tide. From Pala Point, the eastern entrance point, the reef extends westward about 14 mile. Inside the entrance points the bay widens slightly, the coral reefs narrow and finally disappear, leaving a clean, sandy beach along the shore of the bay. A depth of 10 fathoms is found off the entrance, and from there the water shoals gradually toward the head of the bay, where 3 fathoms will be found within y 2 mile of the shore. There are no dangers in Catanauan Bay except the reefs fringing the shores. The Catanauan River, emptying into the head of the bay, affords shelter for small craft, but the entrance is obstructed by a sand bar, bare at low water. Catanauan, the largest town in this vicinity, and a port of call for mail steamers, lies at the head of the bay at the mouth of the river of the same name. It contains a graystone church with a small dome, which forms a good landmark. No particular directions are needed for Catanauan Bay. Vessels entering usually bring the church to bear 23° (22° mag.) and steer for it, anchoring in 5 fathoms, sandy bottom, with the church on the above bearing, distant about 1 mile. The small coasting steamers usually anchor much closer in, according to draft. Between the eastern entrance to Catanauan Bay and Ajus Point, about 2 miles east-southeastward, the fringing coral reef extends to an average distance of % mile from shore, outside of which is found sand bottom sloping rapidly to mud. Less than i/ 2 mile southwest- ward of Ajus Point is a small detached coral patch bare at low water; this is the only outlying danger in this vicinity. About 3 miles northward of Catanauan Bay is the beginning of a range of heavily wooded hills, extending in a south-southeast direc- tion and gradually increasing in height to about 700 feet. These hills approach the coast near Ajus Point and border it as far as Ayoni Bay. TAYABAS BAY TO KAGAY GULF. 87 Between Mulanay and the mouth of the Mataha River the shore is steep-to, and the hills are 300 to 700 feet high, with their summits close to the beach. From Ayoni Bay southward the hills recede and the country is more open, wooded, and grassy, and 3 or 4 miles inland rises to a range of mountains, mostly wooded, 1,200 to 1,400 feet in height. Mulanay is a small town at the mouth of the river of the same name, about 3 miles southeastward of Ajus Point. Between these points the shore reef is of irregular width, but in no place does it extend over y 2 mile from shore. Good anchorage, protected only during the north- east monsoon, may be found in front of Mulanay. To approach it bring the church (a high, white tower) to bear 70° (69° mag.) and steer for it, anchoring in 5 fathoms, sandy bottom, about 800 yards from shore with a large bowlder on the reef on the port beam. Mount Maclayao, about 2 miles eastward of Mulanay, appears as a broad, flat-topped, heavily wooded peak 1,240 feet high; it rises very little above the other hills in its vicinity. Just south of Mulanay the shore reef extends about 650 yards, but thence to the mouth of the Mataha River, 5 miles southeastward, the reef is narrow and very steep-to. The land along this coast rises quickly fo heights of from 300 to 700 feet. Lipata Point, about 2 miles south-southeastward of Mulanay, is not conspicuous as a point, but its white cliffs are prominent. Ayoni Bay, about 6y 2 miles southeastward of Lipata Point, is an open roadstead affording good anchorage during the northeast mon- soon. The water shoals gradually from 15 fathoms, muddy bottom, 1 mile offshore, to 5 fathoms, sandy bottom, y 2 mile from the beach. A reef extends about y 2 mile from the southern entrance point to the bay. From Ayoni Bay the coast trends south by east, with a curve east- ward for 7 miles to Subunguin Point, and is generally fringed with coral or rock, which extends in places slightly more than y 2 mile. Small detached reefs, with depths of y 2 to 5 fathoms, lie from y 2 to iy 2 miles from this coast. For lack of suitable landmarks only the more dangerous reefs will be described. Bondoc is a small village of little commercial importance, partly ob- scured by trees, lying slightly back from the beach, about 4 miles southeastward of Ayoni Bay. The church, in the northern part of the village, is a long frame structure parallel to the shore, and is readily identified, being the largest building in the village. Good anchorage in the northeast monsoon may be found in 9 or 10 fathoms, mud and sand bottom, about % mile from shore in front of the village of Bondoc. As the water shoals rapidly inside of the 5- fathom curve, vessels without local knowledge are advised to anchor in not less than 9 fathoms. Small vessels may anchor closer in by cautiously following the narrow channel through the shore reef. Directions.— Vessels from northward should keep at least 1 mile from shore until the church at Bondoc bears 100° (99° mag.) and then steer for it, anchoring as previously recommended ; vessels from westward should pass southward and eastward of Subunguin Reef and approach the anchorage with the church bearing 68° (67° mag.). These courses will carry a vessel well clear of the 5 and 4% fathom reefs, lying 1% and 1% miles westward of the church at Bondoc. 88 luzon. Subunguin Point, about 3 miles southward of Bondoc, is fairly prominent, well wooded, and about 250 feet high. It is fringed with mangroves and surrounded by a reef, which on the western side of the point is very narrow and steep-to. Subunguin Eeef, the most outlying danger in this vicinity, is a large detached reef partly awash at half tide. The middle of the reef is about 3 miles from shore and 2% miles northwestward of Subunguin Point. This reef is steep-to on its western side. Subunguin Point, bearing 148° (147° mag.), leads through a deep, clear channel 1 mile wide between Subunguin Eeef and the reefs westward from Bondoc. Pinamuntangan Point, bearing nothing southward of 150° (149° mag.), leads % mile westward of Subunguin Eeef. Aguasa Bay is a small bay southward of Subunguin Point. The head of it is fringed by a wide coral reef bare at low water. Small vessels may find anchorage in the middle of the bay in 3 to 5 fathoms, sandy bottom. A small detached reef, with a least depth of 1*4 fathoms, lies off the entrance to Aguasa Bay about 7 / s mile south- southwestward of a bold cliff about 100 feet high, partly covered with vegetation, on the southwestern side of Subunguin Point. Pinamuntangan Bay, immediately northward of the point of the same name, is of no commercial value. Several detached shflals exist in the northern part of the bay about y s mile from shore and extend- ing northward from a line drawn west from the middle of a small, sandy beach at the head of the bay. Pinamuntangan Point, the western point in this vicinity, is heavily wooded, fringed with mangroves, and surrounded by a very narrow coral reef. From Pinamuntangan Point to Bondoc Point, 7y 2 miles southeastward, the coast is bold, clean, and steep-to. Bondoc Point, the southern extremity of Bondoc Peninsula, is a for- midable looking, redoubt-like formation of limestone and has a bluff 50 feet high, rising from a platform of old coral. The fact that this point appears like masonry, is grayish in color, and remarkably bold makes it easy to recognize. It is clean and steep-to and can be rounded in safety at a distance of y± mile. Bondoc Head, about 1 mile northward from the point, is 1,329 feet high. From Bondoc Point the coast trends in a northeasterly direction for 7 miles to Arena Point, the most easterly point of Bondoc Peninsula. This coast is clean and steep-to, with the exception of two small reefs off Pagsanhan Point, and can be skirted in safety at a distance of 1 mile. Eastward of Bondoc Point the hills progressively diminish in size and become more grassy until at Pagsanhan Point they trend away from the coast, opening the Pagsanhan and Talisay Valleys. Pagsanhan Point, about 3 miles eastward of Bondoc Point, is low and wooded at its extremity and fringed by a very narrow coral reef. Pagsanhan River, the largest stream in this vicinity, with about 4 feet on its bar at low water, empties immediately northward of Pagsanhan Point. Talisay River, emptying about 2 miles eastward of the Pagsanhan Eiver, has coral before its entrance and is blocked with bowlders. . A small reef, with rocks awash at low water, lies y 2 mile south- eastward of Pagsanhan Point. Inside the reef are depths of 5 and 6 fathoms, gradually decreasing toward the shore. A small reef, with a least depth of % fathom, lies about 600 yards from shore about y% MAKINDTJQTJE. 89 mile southwest-ward of Pagsanhan Point. These two reefs constitute the only offlying dangers between Bondoc and Arena Points. MARINDUQUE ISLAND, situated before the eastern entrance to Verde Island Passage, is nearly circular and has a greatest diameter of about 24 miles in a northwest and southeast direction. It is mountainous and well wooded. There are a number of prominent peaks, of which Mount Marlanga, in the southern part of the island, 3,877 feet high, is the highest. There are five towns, all of which are on or near the coast and off which shel- tered anchorage may be found according to the season of the year. There are three harbors of refuge, Port Balanacan, Santa Cruz, and Masagasai Bay, where good shelter may be found. The soil of Mar- induque is fertile and the principal exports are hemp, copra, and firewood. San Anares Point, the northern extremity of the island, is a small, steep-to. peninsula 886 feet high. Between San Andres Point and Santa Cruz Point, about 8 miles eastward of it, the coast is rough and irregular. This coast is divided into two bays by Trapichihan Point. Sayao Bay, the western one, though fringed with rocks, is deep, having 22 fathoms in the middle. Calancan, the eastern bay, is foul and faced by the Banot Islands, of which Hakupan, the outer one, lying about 1 mile northeastward of Trapichihan Point, is high and bold, but of little value as a land- mark except when close inshore. Firewood is exported from Lusok, a barrio on the southeastern arm of the bay. Santa Cruz Point, the western point of the northern entrance to Santa Cruz Harbor, is over 100 feet high and fringed on its northern extremity by a narrow reef. In this vicinity there are no outlying dangers northward of a line running east and west through Santa Cruz Point, with the exception of a 2%-fathom patch about y 2 mile northwestward of the point, beyond which the water deepens rapidly. Foul ground extends about 3 miles in an east-southeast direction from Santa Cruz Point and forms the western limit of the northern channel into Santa Cruz Harbor. Santa Cruz Island, about 4 miles southeastward of the point of the same name, is fringed by reefs which, off the northwest point, ex- tend about y 2 mile in a northerly direction and off the southeastern point about % mile. The island is low and flat; the southwestern third of the island is mangrove swamp and the remainder coconut groves and cultivated land. Santa Cruz Harbor (chart 4453), formed by the passage between Marinduque and Santa Cruz Islands, is safe and fairly roomy, has excellent holding ground, and is an important harbor of refuge. During flood tide a weak current sets in through the northern chan- nel and out through the eastern channel ; conversely during the ebb. Good, protected anchorage may be found in 9 fathoms, soft muddy bottom, with the south tangent to Santa Cruz Island bearing 91° (90° mag.) and the western tangent to the same island bearing 335° (334° mag.). A light is shown from a concrete pillar on the reef on the western side of Santa Cruz Harbor. Directions. — Vessels entering by the northern channel should not bring Santa Cruz Point to bear anything northward of 270° (2*69° 90 LUZON". mag.) until the east point of Santa Cruz Island is well open of the north point of the same island bearing 130° (129° mag.) in order to give the foul ground on the western side of the entrance a good berth. When the southwest tangent of Santa Cruz Island bears 166° (165° mag.), with a bluff near the mouth of the Tagum River in range with it, haul southward and bring the light on the western side of the harbor to bear 189° (188° mag.) and steer for it until well inside, when a midchannel course may be kept to the anchorage. The eastern entrance is y 2 mile wide at the narrowest part, and both sides are fringed with reefs. Vessels approaching it should bring the light to bear 282° (281° mag.) and steer for it on that bearing until Mango Point is abeam, when the course may be shaped for any part of the anchorage. Santa Cruz River, emptying into the southwestern part of Santa Cruz Harbor, is very shoal and navigable only by small boats at high water. m The town of Santa Cruz lies about % mile southward of the river of the same name, about iy 2 miles above its mouth. There is a road leading from the town to the river, at the terminus of which are a warehouse and small wharf. Small coasting steamers call off the river mouth two or three times each week. The usual anchorage for small craft desirous of communicating with Santa Cruz is southeastward of Tabignan Point. Vessels drawing not over 1 feet may proceed between two rocky reef points south of Tabignan Point and anchor in 1% to 2 fathoms, protected from all winds. The Tagum River, which is larger and has more water inside than the Santa Cruz River, empties immediately eastward of that river. At the mouth, however, are extensive mud flats, bare at low water, with a channel having a depth of only 1 foot through them. It seems to be very little used even by native boats. Maniuayan Island, nearly \y 2 miles northeastward of Santa Cruz Island, is low and flat, given up exclusively to the cultivation of coco- nuts and surrounded by extensive reefs. In passing between Santa Cruz and Maniuayan Islands, Tagum Point in range with summit of the easternmost hill on Salomague Island bearing 159° (158° mag.) will carry a vessel through the middle of a channel % mile wide with a least depth of 8 fathoms. Mompog Island, 1% miles eastward of Maniuayan Island and 4% miles south-southwest of Tuquian Point, Luzon, is rugged and steep, rises quickly near the east side to a height of 282 feet, and then slopes gently to the westward. Mompog is fringed on its north, east, and south sides by a narrow, steep-to reef. On the western side the reef is wider, and in places it continues to Maniuayan Island. The chan- nel between Mompog and Maniuayan Islands is over iy 2 miles wide, and the least water found during the recent survey was 4y 2 fathoms, but because of the irregular rocky bottom vessels using this channel are advised to adhere closely to the following directions : The eastern tangent to Salomague Island bearing 184° (183° mag.) in range with slope of the third knoll on Salomague Point leads through a channel having a least depth of 7 fathoms. Vessels using this channel are advised not to open this range to the eastward in order to give the foul ground westward from Mompog Island a good berth. Tagum Point, about 2y 2 miles southeastward of the eastern entrance to Santa Cruz Harbor, is clean and steep-to. It rises in a steep slope MARINDUQXJE. 91 to two hills known as Tagum Peaks, 532 and 584 feet high, respec- tively. From northward these two hills show as quite sharp; the easternmost and higher one is well denned and wooded and the inner one is covered with grass with a fringe of trees at its top. Salomague Island lies midway between Tagum and Salomague Points and protecting Masagasai Bay. The northwest and southeast points are low, and there are hills in the center and southwest part. The highest point on the island, 242 feet, is near the center. On the southeastern part of the island is a brown, rocky cliff, 120 feet high, visible from seaward. The northeastern side of the island is fringed with reefs, nearly % mile wide at the northern end and tapering to almost nothing off the rocky cliff just mentioned. Masagasai Bay (chart 4453) is a large, irregular indentation in the coast line that is nearly filled by Salomague Island. The passage between the island and the mainland is narrow and shoal in the mid- dle, west of the center of the island, but expands at either end into irregularly shaped basins of considerable size and depth. The south- ern end, though having plenty of water, is not recommended because of its limited area and difficulty of access. It is possible to enter by following closely the edge of the reef around the south end of Salo- mague Island or by crossing the 2%-fathom reef which lies directly in front of the entrance. No directions can be given except to enter by chart and lead. The northern end, however, offers a safe and fairly roomy anchor- age for small vessels which is easy of access, as follows : Bring the sharp, conical 323-foot hill about 2 miles westward from the north end of Salomague Island to bear 260° (259° mag.), when it will be in range with a white stump in the foreground ; steer in on this range or on the bearing for the hill, if stump can not be seen, until Tagum Point bears 17° (16° mag.) and then steer 197° (196° mag.) until the before-mentioned hill bears 284° (283° mag.) ; thence by chart and local objects to an anchorage in 4 or 5 fathoms. Salomague Point, about 8 miles southward of the eastern entrance point to Santa Cruz Harbor, is the most eastern point on Marinduque. It is formed of low cliffs and is clean and steep-to. From Salomague Point the coast trends southwestward, with a curve westward, for 11 miles to Marlanga Point and then curves round gradually southward and westward to Suban Point, the south- ern extremity of the island. This coast is bold, clean, and steep-to, and in most places the 20-fathom curve is found within y± mile from shore. A narrow fringe of coral about y 5 mile wide begins just west- ward from Salomague Point and gradually decreases in width until it disappears in Marlanga Bay. Torrijos Bay, about 4% miles southwestward of Salomague Point, affords shelter for small craft except from southerly and easterly winds. The entrance point and the sides of the bay are fringed with coral, narrowing the entrance channel to about 300 yards and con- tracting the anchorage area to a width of about 250 yards. To enter, from a position about y 2 mile offshore, bring the right hand of two native houses at the head of the bay, in range with a distant, dark- appearing, rounded hilltop that shows in a distinct notch in the grassy hills, to bear 318° (317° mag.) and enter cautiously. This range leads to an anchorage in 7 or 8 fathoms, sandy bottom, in the center of the bay. 92 LUZON". Torrijos is a small town of no commercial importance lying on high ground on the western side of Torrijos Bay. The church and one other building have iron roofs which are visible in most directions from seaward. Marlanga Bay, about 4 miles south westward of Torrijos Bay, is of no commercial importance and is too deep to afford anchorage ex- cept in a limited space close to the southern shore, where anchorage may be found in 12 to 15 fathoms, sandy bottom, about 800 yards from the beach. Marlanga Point, the southeastern point of Marinduque, is a bold, clean headland 920 feet high 400 yards from shore. Suban Point, the southern extremity of the island, is bold and clean ; back from the point the land rises rapidly toward Mount Marlanga. Elef ante Islet, % mile southward of Suban Point, is a small, round, rocky islet y^ mile in diameter. It is sparsely wooded, 386 feet high, and is clean and steep-to on all sides. It forms a very prominent landmark, especially from eastward or westward. The tidal currents in the channel between it and Marinduque run with considerable velocity. Anchorage may be found on a small shelf northward of the islet in about 13 fathoms, sandy bottom, with the eastern tangent to the islet bearing 180° (179° mag.). From Suban Point the coast trends in a general northwesterly direc- tion for 14 miles to Obung Point, thence northerly for 6^ miles to Lupac Point, and thence north-northeasterly for about the same distance to Silangan Point, the northwesterly point of Marinduque. The western coast of the island is, generally speaking, clean and steep-to, and there are no detached dangers with the exception of a small 4%-fathom patch in the channel between the Tres Reyes Island and the mainland. On the western side of the island there is more level land than on the eastern, and most of the cultivation and the greater part of the inhabitants are consequently found there. Tres Reyes Islands are a group of three small, heavily wooded is- lands, consisting of Gaspar (270 feet high) , Melchor (250 feet high) , and Baltasar (355 feet high) , lying in a west-southwest direction 2, &y 2 , and 5 miles, respectively, from the southwestern part of Marin- duque. Their shores are clean and steep-to with the exception of Gaspar, which has a fringe of coral and rocks extending about % mile from its northeast point. Their shore cliffs are precipitous and underworn by the action of the sea, and are highest on the southwest side of each of the islands, where they are about 200 feet high. There is no fresh water on these islands, and they are uninhabited. The channels between Baltasar and Melchor and between Melchor and Gaspar are deep and clear ; in the channel between Gaspar and Marin- duque the least water found during the recent survey was 4% fathoms. The channel between Melchor and Gaspar seems to be given the preference by coasting steamers. A small coral patch, covered by a least depth of 4% fathoms, lies about % mile from shore in the channel between Marinduque and Gaspar, the eastern island of the Tres Reyes. The channel between this shoal and Gaspar is about % mile wide and over 20 fathoms deep in the middle ; the channel between the shoal and Marinduque is nearly y 2 mile wide and has a depth of 16 fathoms in the middle. MARINDUQUE. 93 The small and unimportant villages of Buenavista and Daiquitin and the town of Gasan lie on the coast between Suban and Lupac Points. A road begins at Buenavista and follows the coast north- ward through Daiquitin, Gasan, and Laylay, and terminates at Boac. This road forms an important avenue of communication and is ex- tensively used. Gasan is on a slight bluff 20 to 50 feet high, about 2 miles south- eastward of Obung Point. The most prominent building in the town is a white coral warehouse with an iron roof; it is in the northern and lower part of the town, near the beach. Immediately back of the town is a hill upon which stands a ruined fort, on one of the walls of which is a conspicuous tree. Copra is the chief article of export from Gasan. Good anchorage, protected only during the northeast monsoon, may be found in 7 or 8 fathoms, sandy bottom, about % mile westward of the town ; light draft vessels may anchor closer in. Boac, the principal town on the island and the capital of the sub- province of Marinduque, lies on the left bank of the Boac River, about iy 2 miles from the sea. It is connected with .Gasan and Torrijos by telephone. The Boac River divides about 1 mile from the sea, the main stream flowing westward and emptying just south from Lupac Point, while the Laylay, the smaller branch, flows southwestward and empties at the village of Laylay, about y 2 mile southeastward of the mouth of the Boac River. The Boac River is reported to vary greatly in the amount of its discharge and to be continually shifting its bed. Laylay, a small village on the south bank at the mouth of the Lay- lay River, is the usual landing place for Boac, with which it is con- nected by a good road. Boats discharge on the beach in front of Laylay, or at high water enter the river and discharge inside. A light is shown from a concrete pillar on the beach in front of Laylay. The usual anchorage for Boac is about y^ to y 3 mile west- ward of the light in 12 to 15 fathoms. This anchorage must be ap- proached cautionsly, as the water shoals very rapidly. About 150 yards within the 20- fathom curve the bottom rises abruptly from 10 to 3 fathoms; the 3-fathom curve defines the outer limit of a sandy shelf rising gradually to the beach. Lupac Point, the western extremity of Marinduque, is low, flat, and sandy and is fringed with coconut trees. Ulan Point, the southern entrance point to the bay of the same name, is Zy 2 miles northeastward of Lupac Point. It is fringed by an extensive coral reef having a greatest width of about y s mile. This is the widest reef on the western coast of Marinduque. Ulan Bay, between Ulan Point and Pamuntangan Point, about I14 miles northeastward, is nearly blocked by reefs bare at low water, and is of no value to navigation. The low land of the western part of the island terminates in the vicinity of Ulan Bay, and thence northward the hills lie close to the coast. Pamuntangan Point, the southern entrance point to Port Balanacan, is clean, well wooded, and 320 feet high. Port Balanacan (chart 4453), immediately northeastward of Pa- muntangan Point, consists of two small but perfectly protected anchorages for moderate-sized vessels. It is surrounded by high hills on all sides, and, except for one reef in the entrance, is free from dangers. The entrance, nearly I14 miles wide between Antagtacan 94 LTJZOK. Point northward and Pamuntangan Point southward, is nearly filled by Agpitan, Ataa, and Madumug Islands and the before-mentioned reef. About midway between the village of Balanacan, which lies on the eastern shore of the outer anchorage, and the entrance to the inner anchorage is a yellow bluff, about 25 feet high, which forms a useful mark for vessels entering the port. A light is shown from a white concrete beacon close northward of the yellow bluff. Agpitan and Ataa Islands lie on the same reef and are about % and y 2 mile, respectively, south-southwest of Antagtacan Point. They are dome shaped, about 50 feet high, and wooded at their tops. About 100 yards southwestward of Ataa Island, and near the outer edge of the reef projecting southwestward from it, is a prominent pinnacle rock about 8 feet high. Madumug Island, on the northern side of the entrance, is small and wooded and 145 feet high. It is surrounded by reefs, which connect it with the land northward. On its western side is a light- brown cliff about 90 feet high. About % m il e southwestward of Madumug Island is the outer edge of a detached reef, with a least depth of !/4 fathom; this reef does not show well. The southeast point of Madumug Island, bearing 60° (59° mag.), clears the south- eastern edge of this reef. Salvaria Island, on the eastern side of the entrance to the inner anchorage, is a pile of rocks with a few trees growing on it. It is steep-to on its western side, but shoal water extends to the land southward and eastward. Directions. — To enter Port Balanacan, pass about % mile north- ward from Pamuntangan Point and steer eastward until the yellow bluff previously mentioned bears 60° (59° mag.) ; steer for the bluff on this bearing until the west side of Salvaria Island in range with Pig Point, on the northern side of the inner anchorage, bears 19° (18° mag.) ; steer in on this range and anchor off the middle of the eastern side of Madumug Island in 11 fathoms, muddy bottom ; or continue, passing close to Salvaria Island, into the inner anchorage, anchoring in 6 or 7 fathoms, muddy bottom, southeastward of Pig Point. Antagtacan Point, the northern entrance to Port Balanacan, a little over 1 mile northward of Pamuntangan Point, is well wooded and 244 feet high. San Andres Islands are two small islands, each about 130 feet high, extending about 1 mile westward from Silangan Point. They are fringed with a narrow steep-to coral reef, bare at low water. There is no channel between them, and at extremely low tides the reef which connects them with Silangan Point is entirely exposed. RAGAY GULF, between Bondoc Point to the west and Cabarian Point to the east, 43 miles apart, runs 60 miles inland to the northwest, and, with the river Vinas, which enters the gulf at its head, almost divides the island of Luzon at this point. Bagay Gulf is, in general, deep and clear. The shores are fringed by narrow coral reefs interspersed with sand and gravel beaches. The hills rise rapidly from the shore, and are gen- erally wooded. The lower slopes and a few of the hilltops are covered with cogon and scattered trees. At the head of the gulf the land RAGAY GULF. 95 slopes more gradually for 500 to 800 yards and then rises rapidly in ridges and valleys to the higher hills inland. The waters at the head of the gulf are generally muddy, due to the sediment carried down by the rivers emptying there. The most important ports are Pusgo and Guinayangan on the west side of the gulf ; and Ragay Bay, Caima Bay, and Pasacao Anchorage on the east side; but anchorage may be taken up almost anywhere near the shore, but not too close in, as in places rocks awash lie off the shore reef. Burias Island, with the islands and shoals northward of it, divide the entrance to Ragay Gulf into two wide channels. At Arena Point, the western entrance point to Ragay Gulf, the shore line makes a sharp turn to northward and extends for 18 miles in a general northerly and northwesterly direction to Port Pusgo. A sharp clump of trees on the first knoll northwest of Arena Point is the most prominent landmark in this vicinity. Mount San Andres, 1,320 feet high, and another peak 2 miles to northward, are also promi- nent, their tops being covered with cogon. Sombocogon Bay, 3 miles northward of Arena Point, is much fre- quented by native coasters. It is of small extent, and a coral reef partly fills the head. Alibijaban Island lies 3% miles northeastward of Sombocogon Bay. The north and south ends of the island are both wooded and 160 and 65 feet high, respectively. The middle part is low and bordered by mangroves, which from a distance give it the appearance of two islands. Alibijaban Island is surrounded by a coral reef, which extends % mile southward and % mile northward. A part of the island is under cultivation, the natives coming over from San Andres on the mainland for the working season. Palad Reef, 5 miles northward of Alibijaban Island, lies with its longer axis in a northwest and southeast direction. A cay, probably awash on the highest tides, lies near the center of. the reef. The channel between the reef and the shore is 2 miles wide. Several banks with 5y 2 to 9 fathoms are shown ; otherwise it is deep and clear. Several detached coral shoals, with depths of from 1^4 to 4 fathoms, lie in an area 2 miles long and % mile wide parallel to the shore, with the north end 2 miles south-southwestward of Palad Cay. Port Pusgo (chart 4454) is a narrow inlet extending 5 miles to the northwest. The larger part of its area is shoal, having less than 2 fathoms. The entrance, carrying a depth of &y 2 fathoms, narrows to about 110 yards opposite a prominent point of mangroves. Well- protected anchorage in 4 fathoms, mud bottom, may be found about y 2 mile farther in. The barrio of Buhangin lies on the shore south- east of the anchorage, and the municipio of San Narcisco stands at the head of the port. Pusgo Beef with \y 2 fathoms lies in the approach to Port Pusgo, 1^4 miles south-southeastward of Pusgo Point. Gorda Point, \y± miles northwestward of Pusgo Point, is high and steep. The reef, which fringes the shore from the interior of Port Pusgo, continues around Gorda Point to the northwest, extending 100 to 400 yards from shore. Two shoals, covered by 2y 2 fathoms and y 2 fathom, lie 4^ and 5 miles, respectively, northwestward of Gorda Point and 1 mile offshore. Peris Bay, between Guinhalinan Point and Lian Point, extends 2 miles inland. The head of the bay is bordered by a shoal of mud 96 luzow. which considerably reduces the available space. Good anchorage in 4 to 6 fathoms, mud bottom, may be had in the northwest part of the bay. The Peris River, navigable for small boats for 7 or 8 miles, emp- ties into the head of the bay. A coral reef, which reaches a width of 14 mile off Lian Point, borders the north side of Peris Bay. Lian Point is very prominent and 300 feet high less than y 2 mile from shore. A shoal, with a least-known depth of 5y 2 fathoms and surrounded by deep water, lies 6^4 miles southeastward of Lian Point. A shoal with 2 fathoms over it lies 2 miles north of Lian Point and y 2 mile offshore. Capuluan Point, 5 miles north of Lian Point, is low and is bordered by mangroves ; 400 yards offshore a prominent rock, bare except at the highest tides, marks the outer end of the shore reef. A shoal with ^4 fathom least water lies 1 mile eastward of Capuluan Point, and there is a 1%-fathom shoal between it and the point. The coves on both sides of Capuluan Point are shoal and of no importance to navi- gation. Capuluan Reef lies 2 miles eastward of the point of the same name. The rocks are just covered at high water. The channel between the reef and the shoals off Capuluan Point is 1 mile wide, deep, and clear. From Capuluan Point the coast trends northwestward to the mouth of the Viiias River. As far as the town of Guinayangan the shore is fringed with mangroves and the hills rise almost from the water's edge. North of the town to the Viiias River the land is low and flat for about 500 yards and then rises abruptly to 700 feet in a series of narrow ridges. The Viiias River is shallow and of little use to navi- gation. Guinayangan is the largest town in Ragay Gulf. A pier at which lighters load lumber extends about 600 yards from shore. Good anchorage may- be found just off the pier in 3 fathoms, mud bottom. The Guinayangan and Pasacao cable lands near the town. Sibalun Island is a coral reef overgrown with trees, some of which are 40 to 50 feet high. At half tide the island is connected with the shore by a long, narrow sand bar. Acha Reef, with % fathom least water, lies 2 miles south-south- .eastward of a prominent zinc-roofed house on the shore north of Sibalun Island. Deep water surrounds the shoal, but shoal water extends over 1 mile from the shore northward, with y 2 fathom at its end. Care must be exercised when navigating in this vicinity, as the water is often muddy and the shoals not visible. Talcauayan Bay, between Ausan Point on the west and Mambulao Point on the east, extends 2y 2 miles northward. About half of its area is shoal. Good anchorage may be found just inside the entrance points in from 5 to 7 fathoms, mud bottom. From Mambulao Point the coast trends in a general southeasterly direction for 22 miles to Bantuin Point, with indentations to north- eastward forming Catabanga, Ragay, and Caima Bays, Between Mam- bulao Point and Quilbait Point, 3 miles southeastward, shoal water extends about % mile. The Quilbait River empties into the gulf on the north side of the point of the same name. Catabanga Bay, between Quilbait Point and Bagutayoc Point, 4 miles southeast, extends \y 2 miles inland. The shores are fringed with coral, and there is a 6%-fathom spot in the middle of the bay. RAGAY GULP. 97 The Catabanga River empties into the head of the bay. Well-pro- tected anchorage in from 6 to 8 fathoms, mud bottom,' may be found m the mouth of the river. Omon Point, the northwestern entrance point to Ragay Bay, lies 3 miles southeastward of Bagutayoc Point. It is high, clean, and steep-to. Otoe Point, the southeastern entrance to Ragay Bay, is the outer end of a small island, Saboon, which, with the adjacent main- land, is conspicuous on account of a chain of knolls or low hills that form their outline. Saboon Island is separated from the mainland by a shallow channel bare at low water. Shoal water extends % mile westward of the island, with a rock awash near the outer end of the bank. At the entrance points of Ragay Bay the shore recedes, greatly in- increasing the area of Ragay Bay, which is 3 miles wide between the entrance points and 2 miles deep. The Omon, Pacttlalin, Ragay, and Apali Rivers empty into the bay. These are all shallow, being nearly closed by sand bars at low water. There is good anchorage in Ragay Bay in from 6 to 10 fathoms of water. Caima Bay is a large open area between Saboon Island and Ban- tuin Point. Most of its shore is fringed with coral, and a thin line of mangroves extends along the beach. Good anchorage may be found in the cove southwestward of Binahian barrio in from 5 to 8 fathoms, mud bottom, and also near Bantuin Point in 8 fathoms. Bantuin Point appears as an island from a distance, as the narrow neck of land connecting it with the mainland is low. The point is high, with a peculiarly shaped sharp peak near its end. This peak is steep seaward. The point curves to northwestward and, with the islands Carabang and Galvaney lying off its end, affords protection against the southwest monsoon. Carabang Island, 195 feet high, lies 1 mile northwestward of Bantuin Point and is surrounded by deep water. Galvaney Island, 240 feet high, and a large rock 40 feet high, lie on the reef extending from Bantuin Point. They are steep-to on the gulf side, but the water is very shoal between them and the point. Four miles southeastward of Bantuin Point and about 1 mile in- land is a prominent peak, 1,620 feet high, with a white scar or spot on its side, visible from near Arena Point and from nearly all parts of the gulf northward. From Bantuin Point the coast trends southeast for 17 miles to Pasacao Anchorage. The. shore is steep-to, and the land rises rapidly to the first range of hills, which are over 1,000 feet high. The Tinal- mud River enters the gulf near Wagas Point, about 2 miles south- ward of the 1,620-foot peak. Bagulaya Point, Buri Point, and Tanuan Point are on this coast. The town of Dalapaon lies on the beach between the latter two points. There is an anchorage off the town, but necessarily close in on account of the great depth of water. Pasacao Anchorage (chart 4454) lies between Pasacao Point and Refugio Island. The cove is about 1 mile deep, but the shore is fringed by a reef, with sand and mud over it, which considerably lessens the available anchorage area. The anchorage is in 3 to 5 fathoms, mud bottom, but is exposed to the southwest. At times a choppy sea sets in and makes landing on the beach through the surf dangerous. The town of Pasacao lies at the head of the cove, in the valley leading through the high land to the town of Pamplona and 97172°— 19 7 98 LTJZOK. to* the Bicol Eiver valley. Eefugio Island, 200 feet high, is steep-to on the seaward side. A sunken rock lies off the shore reef about 175 yards north of Eefugio Island, and a reef makes 550 yards offshore opposite the island, leaving an available channel about 300 yards wide. From Pasacao Anchorage to Macoto Point the coast is high, steep- to, and generally bordered by a sand beach. Sibono Point is conspicu- ous on account of its two peaks standing out sharply from the higher' background. Tongon Point has a precipitous bluff 200 feet high on its south side, the north side being low. Between these two points is Jamuraon Bay, an open bight with the town of Jamuraon at its head. Anchorage may be had close to shore in front of the town in 3 to 6 fathoms, but outside of this shelf the bottom drops away steeply. Caurusan Point may be recognized by its pyramidal shape, the cogon on the south side of the extreme point and the steep valley southward of it. Coguit Point, a low brush covered point with a sandy beach, has a coral reef extending several hundred yards offshore. A conspicu- ous cogon hill lies between the point and the higher ridge back of the shore. Bedal Point, 2 miles southeastward of Coguit Point, is fringed by coral, and a coral reef awash lies 2 miles southward of it close to shore. This is the only danger along this coast northward of Pantao Bay. An outcrop of light-colored rock forming a vertical cliff about 118 feet high at the top of the cogon-covered ridge about 2y 2 miles northward of Pantao Bay is a good landmark for this vicinity. Pantao Bay, between Sinlian and Caunbalan points, affords good anchorage exposed to northwestward. Mount Pantao, 1,510 feet high, is easily recognized and forms a good leading mark for entering the bay. Caunbalan Point is fringed by a coral reef. The point is high, with a number of large rocks at the foot of the cliffs. The first cliff, 90 feet high, is locally known as Seleselehan Point. Apud Point is a low, rounding point covered with mangroves, brush, and scattered coconut trees. Apud Beef is a large rocky reef that bares over an area about 1 mile long north and south by y 2 mile wide, with another rock awash at low water over % mile northwest of the main reef. The channel between Apud Eeef and Apud Point is about y 3 mile wide, with a 2%-fathom shoal in midchannel north- ward of the point, to which it is connected by a ridge covered by somewhat deeper water. The channel westward of the 2%-fathom shoal has a depth of 8 fathoms. Fairly good protection is obtained behind Apud Eeef, but vessels should anchor well toward the point. Macoto Point, 5 miles southward of Apud Point, is bold and very prominent. The shore line consists of cliffs from 12 to 80 feet high. Three timbered hills on the point, highest 240 feet, and the low land back of the hills give the point the appearance of an island from northward or southward. A shoal with a least known depth of 2% fathoms lies almost 1 mile northwest of the point. Bagadamolag Islet lies southeast of the point just off the shore reef. Cagmanaba Bay, eastward of Macoto Point, affords protection from all seas, except from southward. A hill 105 feet high, close to the shore near the head of the bay, and Mount Caburauan, 1,540 feet high, 2 miles inland are useful marks for navigation in this vicinity. BURIAS. 99 Cabarian Point, the eastern entrance point to Ragay Gulf, is fringed by a coral reef about 200 yards wide. A 10-f athom bank lies 1 mile westward of the point. The point itself is low and wooded, but it may be readily identified by a 307-foot hill about y 2 mue northward and close to the coast. BURIAS ISLAND, lying in the entrance to Eagay Gulf, is 37 miles long northwest and southeast, 8 miles wide near the northwest end, and tapers to a narrow point at the southeast. The island is generally mountainous and thinly wooded. The coast is steep and generally bordered by coral reefs, with a few stretches of sand beach. The population is small, and the principal products are rice and hemp. Several islands and reefs lie of? the northern part of Burias Island. Templo Island, nearly 3 miles northwestward of Cueva Point, the northwest point of Burias, is 3, miles long northwest and southeast and % mile wide. There are detached rocks on the reef that borders its southern shore and also on the reef that extends y 2 mile to north- eastward from its north end. Sombrero, 1% miles west of the south end of Templo, consists of two islets close together on a reef which extends a mile northwest and southeast. The small one is 107 feet high, but the larger one is low and covered with brush. Arena Islet, 7 miles southeasterly from Arena Point, Bondoc Peninusula, lies on a circular reef about % mile in diameter. Shoal water extends y 2 mile northeast of the island and a bank with 8 fathoms over it 1 mile northward. Inaguaran Shoal, separated from Arena Islet by a deep channel over one mile wide, lies 1% miles northward of it. The least water found on it was d 1 /^ fathoms. Busin Island, off the north end of Burias, is 2 miles long, 1 mile wide, and 265 feet high. A coral reef borders the shore. The Tinalisayan Islets lie on a coral reef iy 2 miles northwest of the western end of Busin Island. The chan- nel between them and Busin Island has 7 fathoms of water. On the same bank lie several shoals and the little islet Tanguingui. The latter lies on a coral reef 1% miles north of Tinalisayan Islet, and 1 mile farther in the same direction is a 31^-fathom shoal surrounded by deep water. A detached shoah with iy 2 fathoms of water over it lies 2V 2 miles north of Colorada Point, the northern extremity of Burias. Anima Sola is a small island, 114 feet high, 4y 2 miles northeastward of Colo- rada Point. Port Busin (chart 4454) is formed by a channel between Busin and Burias Islands. The western entrance is narrow and crooked and is very dangerous for sailing vessels. A large white cliff on the western end of Busin Island makes a good landmark when approaching this entrance. Keeping this cliff on a 70° (69° mag.) bearing will clear the reef that makes out on the west side of the entrance. The northern entrance is preferable, being almost straight and its banks steep-to. This entrance may be easily recognized by Colorada Point, the north cape of Burias, which is higher than Busin Island and shows yellow patches among the trees that cover it. The coast near the entrance may also be known by the massive bluffs. To enter, round Colorada Point at a distance of % mile and keep in mid-chan- 1 00 LUZON. nel. The best anchorage is off San Pascual, about midway between the entrances, in 10 fathoms, mud bottom. Port Busin is the only ty- phoon anchorage on the north and west coasts of Burias Island. Be- tween Port Busin and Port Busainga, 4 miles to the southeast, the coast forms Laorente Bay. The bay is open, with coral reefs and shoals extending % mile offshore in the eastern part. Port Busainga (chart 4454) is an excellent typhoon anchorage for small vessels. The channel leading into the inner anchorage is about 100 yards wide at its narrowest point. A deep but contracted an- chorage for larger vessels is in 12 fathoms, mud bottom, about mid- way in the channel between South Point and Estero Point. To enter, bring Piedras Point to bear 270° (269° mag.). Steer for it until within 100 yards of the point and then follow a mid-channel course and anchor when the south tangent to Medio Island bears 253° (252° mag.). A rocky reef, bare at low water, extends 130 yards north of Medio Point. Vessels drawing up to 12 feet can pass into the lagoon by continuing the mid-channel courses until past Restinga Point. Then bring Cayman Point and South Boca Islet, at the entrance to the inlet, in range. Steer this range carefully to avoid the shoal 250 yards westward of Adentro Point. When past this shoal steer north- westward and anchor in 2 fathoms, mud bottom, about in the center of the lagoon. The larger of the Boca Islets is 56 feet high and wooded, the smaller one is 45 feet high and covered with cogon. They lie near the outer edge of the coral reef extending % mile offshore northward of Port Busainga. Dampalan Bay, about 5 miles southeast of Port Busainga, is almost filled with coral reefs. The locality of the bay, with its reefs, can be easily recognized by the junction of the cogon-covered hills southward with the higher-timbered hills northward of Bagabarco Point. Southeastward of Dampalan Bay the coral reefs widen out to about y 2 mile. At San Pinetan Point a coral reef extends 2 miles southeast- ward, and at Siargao Point a coral reef extends 2 miles northwest- ward. Between these reefs and between the reefs and the shore reef is an area in Nonoc Bay that affords anchorage in 13 to 14 fathoms mud. The junction between the cogon hills and higher-timbered hills should be brought to bear 225° (224° mag.) when not less than 2y 2 miles offshore. Enter on this course and anchor behind the reef either northward or southward of the entrance. The junction between cogon and timber is not well defined and great care should be used in entering the first time. The broad coral reef fringing the shore of Nonoc Bay continues around Siargao Point and as far as Madanlog Point. From Madanlog Point to Aguja Point, the southeast point of Burias Island, the coast is steep-to, with a narrow coral reef and sand beach. Port Boca Engano, about midway on this stretch of coast, is not rec- ommended as an anchorage. The water is deep, bottom hard, and little swinging room. A coral shoal lies in the entrance, and a mud- covered reef fills the head of the bay. The land back of the bay is low, affording no protection from the wind during a typhoon. To enter bring the bold bluff of Castillo Point to bear 235° (234° mag.), and steer for it until within about 275 yards of the point ; then run parallel to the shore and anchor in 16 fathoms, with the north tangent to Tres Marias Point bearing 90° (89° mag.). SOUTH COAST OP LUZON. 101 Aguja Point is bold and free from danger, the land sloping gradu- ally from Mount Sagnrun, 725 feet high, about 3 miles northwest of the point. From Cueva Point, the northwest point of Burias Island, the coast trends southward for 5 miles to Guinduganan Point. A 23^-fathom shoal lies y 2 mile southwest of Cueva Point and a l^-fathom shoal and a rock awash lie in the entrance to Alimango Bay. The coast is bordered by an irregular coral reef. There is an indifferent anchor- age in Alimango Bay, but no protection from the sea. From Guindu- ganan Point the coast trends southeast for 33 miles to Agupa Point. The shore is steep and bordered by coral reefs interspersed with sand and gravel beaches. There are several small bays which offer but. slight protection. Guinduganan Bay, just southward of the point of the same name, and Hog Bay, 6 miles farther along, are the most im- portant. Mount Enganoso, 1,403 feet high, the highest point on Burias Island, is about 12 miles from Aguja Point, and is the only good land- mark for night work along this coast. Nabasagan lies at the head of a small bay southwest of Mount Enganoso. There is a group of shoals Avith a rock awash at low water 1 mile from shore, westward of Mount Enganoso ; 2y 2 fathoms is shown y 2 mile northward, 3 fathoms y 2 mils westward, and 1 fathom y 2 mile southwestward from the rock awash. There is a 7-fathom channel between these shoals and the shore but there is no occasion for using it. Vessels should keep well off shore when navigating in this vicinity. Gorrion Islet lies Q/ 2 miles east-southeastward of Malapingal Point, the western point of Nabasagan Bay, and on the outer part of the shore reef, which extends over *4 mile from the point. Both the cove to northward of the islet and that to the southward are foul. From Gorrion Islet the reef extends along the coast to the southeastward for about 4 miles and is over y 2 mile wide in places, with shoals lying still farther offshore. The remainder of this coast, for 6 miles to Aguja Point, is steep and clear. Caution. — When approaching Burias Island from the westward in thick weather, such as occurs in the southwest monsoon, the southern part of the island may be hidden and the slope of Mount Enganoso may be mistaken for the end of the island, a mistake which has caused the loss of several vessels. SOUTH COAST OF LUZON. From Cabarian Point the coast trends east-northeast for about 6 miles to the head of Panganiran Bay. Solitario Island, 34 feet high, lies about 2 miles eastward of Cabarian Point and y 2 mile offshore, to which it is connected by a reef with very little water over it. Vessels should keep well southward of the islet to avoid the shoal water extending off this coast. Panganiran Bay is a large bay open to southward. Bagalayog Point is prominent and affords a small amount of protection to a vessel anchoring close eastward or westward of it. A number of small barrios are scattered along this coast, of which Magradongdong is the largest. Gatundulan Point has bright sand cliffs varying in height from 60 to 110 feet. The point is wooded with the exception of one small patch of cogon near the cliff on the southwest side. Sunken coral 102 LUZON. heads and a reef that bares extend about 220 yards off the point. Tinangonan Bay, eastward of Catundulan Point, has a flat sand beach that bares a considerable distance offshore. Pangpang Point, the east- ern entrance point, is composed of light-colored cliffs about 40 feet high, but otherwise is not very prominent. Donsol, on the left bank and near the mouth of the Donsol River, has a number of prominent, bright, galvanized-iron roofs. The mouth of the river is fronted by wide sand banks and fish traps are numerous i/ 2 mile off the town. The bar at the mouth of the river is shoal, only about 2 feet at low water, but deepens inside to 6 feet and more. A light is shown from a wooden frame structure on the east bank of the Donsol . River. Small boats usually land on the sand beach just northward of the light. From Donsol to Port Putiao the coast is low with a continuous sand beach. The Ogod River, emptying about iy 2 miles eastward of Donsol, is shoal at its mouth, but deepens to over 7 feet above the bridge on the Donsol-Pillar road. Dumaquit Point, the western en- trance point to Port Putiao, is covered with cogon and small trees and shows a level profile almost to the 30-foot vertical cliffs at its end. A shoal with a least known depth of 4 fathoms lies 1 mile south- southwest of the point and rocks awash at low water lie about 650 yards eastward in the entrance to Port Putiao. Port Putiao, between Dumaquit Point and Cutcut Point, extends 3% miles northward, the northern part being known as Pilar Bay. The shores of Port Putiao are foul, and the entire bay is shoal. The Malbug River, emptying into the northeast part of Pilar Bay, is an important means of communication, and with its branches drains a prosperous agricultural country. Pilar is the most important town on the bay. It may be approached as follows : When well out- side the line joining Dumaquit and Cutcut Points bring the point % mile northward of Tingco Point to bear 29° (28° mag.) and steer for it until Dona Ana Island bears 314° (313° mag.) ; steer for the island, and when Quidavid Point bears 186° (185° mag.) round to northward and bring the church in Pilar to bear 30° (29° mag.) ; hold this course and anchor when Punahuan Island, the small islet southwest of San Antonio, bears 80° (79° mag.). These courses carry about 8 feet at low water, and the nar- rowest part of the channel is eastward of Dona Ana Island with about 425 yards between the 6-foot curves. Port Paniatuan, between Cutcut Point and Bantigui Point, is nearly filled with banks and reefs. Mecapiot Bay, in the northwestern part of Port Paniatuan, is an excellent typhoon anchorage for ves- sels drawing up to 12 feet. To enter bring the east tangent of the point on which the town of Paniatuan stands to bear 20° (19° mag.) when well outside in order to clear the rocks awash at low water lying % mile southward of Cutcut Point. On this bearing a lightV colored cliff or bank on Quiragosnos Point will be on range with the point; hold the range until within 325 yards of the point; then change course to pass through the narrow part in mid-channel. Round Paniatuan Point, keeping close to the point, and anchor in 2 fathoms, sticky mud bottom, about 550 yards northwestward of the point. Bantigui Point is low, rocky, and wooded, with a shore composed of gravel and clay cliffs.. SOUTH COAST OP LUZON. 103 Sorsogon Bay is the largest and best harbor in southern Luzon and is a good refuge in case of a typhoon or colla and for effecting re- pairs. The entrance is divided into three channels by Malaumauan and Bagatao Islands. The channel between these two islands is the only one practicable for ordinary vessels; the others, between the islands and the coast, being narrow and shoal. The depth at the entrance is 10 to 20 fathoms, decreasing gradu- ally toward the head of the bay. The seaward faces of the islands on the north side of the channel are steep-to, and a vessel keeping in mid-channel is clear of all dangers. There are a number of towns on the shores of Sorsogon Bay, of which Sorsogon, the capital of Sor- sogon Province, Casiguran, and Castilla are the most important. Malattmatjn Island, at the western side of the main channel, is low, flat, wooded, and surrounded hy white sandy beaches. A long, narrow spit extends northward from the island, leaving a narrow channel between it and the shoal water off the mainland. A rocky shoal, bare in places at low water, extends l 1 /^ miles southwest of the island. The bottom eastward of the island shelves gradually with a depth of 4 fathoms about 450 yards from shore. A black buoy, li/s miles south of the south end of Malaumauan Island, marks the western edge of the main channel into Sorsogon Bay. Bagatao Island, forming the eastern side of the main entrance, is of moderate height and wooded. The eastern end is 415 feet high. The coasts, except those of the southeast side, are clean and bold. A bank of fine, black sand, with soundings of from 10 to 16 fathoms, extends about 3 miles southwest of Bagatao Island and offers an- chorage to vessels unable to reach the port. Bagatao light, visible 17 miles, is shown from a white cylindrical iron tower with gray trimmings on the rocky headland forming the southern point of the western end of Bagatao Island. Bagatao light bearing between 350° (349° mag.) and 46° (45° mag.) carries a vessel clear of all shoal water in the approach to Sorsogon Bay. Sorsogon light (fixed red) visible 6 miles, is exhibited from a white concrete pillar on the western end of Bagatao, Island % mile north of Bagatao light. A cable-mark buoy showing the location of the Sorsogon-Masbate cable is moored in shoal water on the northern side of the bay, well .out of the track of navigation. Large vessels can find good, sheltered anchorage northward of Baga-tao Island, abreast of a small sand beach immediately westward of Tinacos Island. Small vessels will find a good typhoon anchorage behind Sablayan Island. To enter bring Palinahuan Point to bear 316° (315° mag.) when well outside a line joining Macuhil Point and the north end of Sablayan Island and steer 136° (135° mag.) to an anchorage in mid-channel southwest of the sandy point. This chan- nel carries about 9 feet at low water. Magallanes Eock, awash at low water, lies 275 yards north of Macuhil Point and constitutes a serious danger to navigation in this vicinity. Anchorage may also be taken up anywhere in Sorsogon Bay according to draft. The town of Sorsogon lies on the north shore near the head of the bay. The water off it is very shoal, the 3-fathom curve in the direc- tion of the approach being nearly 3 miles from the town. There are ruins of two wharves which dry at low water. The hull of a sailing vessel is anchored 1 mile south of Sorsogon and used as a warehouse. 104 LUZON. An anchor light is kept on this hull at night, but the wreck lying about 220 yards off the stone pier is unmarked and constitutes a danger to launches at night. Sorsogon is connected with Manila by cable and telegraph and with Masbate by cable. Directions. — Vessels bound for Sorsogon should pass y 2 mile east- ward of the black buoy southward of Malumahuan Island and steer 17° (16° mag.) for \y 2 miles until y 2 mile west-northwestward of Sorsogon light; then steer 64° (63° mag.) for 3% miles, heading for Macuhil Point, until % mile south-southeastward of Lavampa Island. Then steer 38° (37° mag.) for V/ 2 miles until % mile north- ward of Macuhil Point, when a 66° (65° mag.) course leads a little southward of the town of Sorsogon. A depth of 2y 2 fathoms will be found about \y 2 miles southwestward from the town and vessels should proceed cautiously and anchor according to draft. The water shoals gradually toward the head of the bay, the 3 and 5 fathom curves being found 3 and 7 miles, respectively, from the town of Sorsogon, and the bottom is soft mud. Magallanes is a small port on a point of land abreast the east end of Bagatao Island. A narrow, deep channel leads to it from northward, but only 8 feet at low water can be carried across the bar southeast of Bagatao Island. From Bagatao Island the coast trends southward for 8 miles to Inararan Point and is mostly sand beach shelving off gradually into deep water. The shore line is broken by numerous shallow tidal sloughs that may be entered by small boats only at high water. The country back of the beach slopes gradually to the foothills of Mount Binatacan and Mount Culangalan, and being intersected by numerous ravines has the appearance of a roughly rolling country partly culti- vated and partly timbered. Bulan, the most important town on this part of the coast, is on the right bank of the Sabang River northward of Sabang Point. Steam- ers to and from Manila make frequent calls, but there is no dock and no supplies are available. Hemp and copra are the principal exports. A light is shown from a white frame structure back of the beach. Vessels bound for Bulan usually bring the light or the church to bear 75° (74° mag.) and anchor in 3 to 5 fathoms. Verde Hill, a green cogon covered hill 480 feet high, is 3 miles east- ward of Bulan and stands out prominently against the darker tim- bered hills back of it. Agnas Point is a conspicuous, flat-topped, cogon-covered bluff 120 feet high with almost vertical reddish slopes that are practically bare. The timber extends out within a short distance of the bluff and the skyline is ragged. ITtabe Bay, the bend in the shore line between Agnas Point and Sabang Point does not afford any protection. Anchorage may be had anywhere off this coast. Butag Bay, lying eastward of Agnas Point, is about % m il e wide and extends % mile northeastward. The head of the bay is shoal, but practically protected anchorage may be had in 7 to 10 fathoms, mud bottom, in the middle of the baj. The shores are wooded, and much of the lumber used along this coast comes from this vicinity. From Butag Bay the coast trends southeast for 5 miles to Sujac Point and then eastward for another 5 miles to Colasi Point at the entrance to Ticlin Strait. This part of Luzon is mountainous and heavily timbered. The summits of the main ridge are from 1 200 to SOUTH COAST OF LUZON. 105 2,000 feet high. Calomutan, 1,940 feet high, and Sujac, 1,645 feet high, are prominent summits and are easily recognized. There are several points along this coast that are useful as landmarks. Tagiran Point, about 1 mile northeast of Sujac Bay, is a flat-topped, cogon-covered peninsula 30 feet high, .projecting almost normal from the coast. Langao Point is a sloping cogon-covered point 20 feet high at the outer end and is composed of a dark-red conglomerate. Hamorauan Point is a bold reddish-brown bluff 70 feet high with a steep timbered slope rising above it. The curve in the shore line is small, but the low ground on either side makes the point stand out prominently. The bays between the several points along this coast are small and unim- portant. Sinangatan, Ginablan, and Babatgun afford a small amount of protection to launches and small craft. There are no dangers along this coast outside the points except for Hamorauan Reef and Calantas Bock. Hamorauan Reef is a continu- ous shoal of white sand covering an area about 550 yards square about V-i mile southwest of Colasi Point. The least water found, 2 fathoms, lies about % mile west-southwestward of Colasi Point. A shoal with a least depth of 43,4 fathoms lies % mile south of the 2-f athom spot. Calantas Sock consists of a pile of small rounded rocks projecting 4 or 5 feet above high water and are marked by a light. The shoal extends % mile southeastward to the wreck of the steamer Pharsalie, which forms a dangerous obstruction to navigation. A considerable area southward and westward of Calantas Rock has from 5 to 10 fathoms of water; northward it drops off steeply into 30 fathoms. Ticlin Strait (chart 4258) is the channel between the coast of Luzon and the islands Calintaan, Juac, and Ticlin. The tidal currents and eddies are very strong, and vessels should not attempt to go through on compass courses alone. Strong sets are especially to be looked for between Calantas Bock and Calayuan Point and Colasi Point and Burungan Island. To approach Ticlin Strait from westward bring the south tangent of Calayuan Point to bear 90° (89° mag.), and steer for it; when the sharp conical hill on Ticlin Island shows in mid-channel, Calantas Bock bearing 170° (169° mag.), distant % mile, change course to 40° (39° mag.), heading for the hill, and steer a mid-channel course, being careful to avoid a set to westward of Burungan Island if the current is running north. Calintaan and Juac Islands are hilly and covered with jungle and timber. Both have large lagoons and considerable mangrove. The inner shores are low and have coral beaches ; the outer ones are alter- nately rocky bluff and coral beach. Outside the reef the water is deep and the bottom clean. Juac Channel is deep, but narrow and of little use. Ticlin Island is 184 feet high. It is surrounded by a reef the great- est width of which is % mile. Magtimua Rock, slightly above water, lies % mile southeastward of Ticlin Island. The passage between Ticlin and Juac Islands is obstructed by rocks and is not safe. Matnog (chart 4258) is a small bay open eastward, fringed by a narrow reef, with 3 and 4 fathoms near the edge and 8 fathoms in the middle of the bay. When bound into Matnog bring the hill on Ticlin Island to bear 90° (89° mag.), and steer 270° (269° mag.); 106 LUZON. the channel between the reefs is not very wide. The harbor is small, but well protected from all directions except eastward. Small vessels anchor in 3 fathoms ^4 m il e from the beach. There are no appreciable currents in Matnog Bay. The white iron roof of the church in Matnog is prominent.- San Bernardino Islands are two small islets lying nearly 9 miles east- ward of the church at Bulusan. The south and larger island, on which the light is situated, is about % mile long north and south and y 8 mile wide. It is sparsely wooded and 160 feet high. Two large rocks, about 10 feet high, lie about 400 yards eastward of the southern islet. The northern islet is about 300 yards long and has two hills 75 and 100 feet high, very rugged and entirely bare. The rock for- merly shown on the chart as being approximately 1 mile north-north- westward of the light has been searched for unsuccessfully ; tide rips and overfalls were seen in this locality and passed through, but no depths of less than 10^ fathoms were found. San Bernardino Islands are on the southern end of a bank having soundings of from 10 to 20 fathoms and extending about 6 miles northeastward, sur- rounded by much deeper water. A group flashing light, visible 21 miles, is shown from a white tower on the summit of the southern island, eastern entrance to San Bernardino Strait. San Bernardino Strait, the passage between Luzon and Samar Is- lands, is of much importance, as it is used by most of the coasting vessels bound for the east coasts of these two islands, as well as by some of the vessels crossing the Pacific and by those trading between Manila and Australia. The strait is wide and deep and free from dangers, except a few near the shores. The channels eastward and westward of San Bernardino Islands are 5 and 9 miles wide, respec- tively, with depths of from 30 to 70 fathoms. Heavy seas and tide rips are encountered during the northeast monsoon, but they are not reported during the southwest monsoon. The tidal currents in the strait are strong, being reported to be 4 to 8 knots ; after passing the strait the currents spread out in either direction and lose their force. On the coast north of the strait the flood current divides somewhere westward of San Bernardino Islands, flowing northward off Gubat and southward into the strait. At San Bernardino Islands the tide is semidiurnal ; the mean high- water interval is 5 hours 33 minutes, and the mean low-water in- terval 11 hours 47 minutes. The mean range of tide during two months' observation was 2.6 feet and the maximum range about 4 feet. EAST COAST OF LUZON. CAPE ENGANO TO LAMON BAT. Port San Vicente is described on page 45. From Port San Vicente the coast trends easterly for 5 miles to Escarpada Point, the northeast point of Luzon. This coast is high and bordered by a reef with detached rocks. Palaui Island and ad- jacent islands and the eastern entrance to Port San Vicente are de- scribed on page 44. The shoal north of Escarpada Point is much more extensive than shown on most charts, extending in one place CAPE ENGANO TO LAMON BAY. 107 2 miles from shore, with depths of 7 to 10 fathoms, sand and rock bottom. From Escarpada Point the coast trends southeasterly for 12 miles to Iligan Point, the most easterly point in this vicinity; between these two points are numerous small coves, well sheltered but fit only for bancas. From Iligan Point the coast trends south-southwest and then curves gradually around eastward for 72 miles to Palanan Point, the eastern entrance of Palanan Bay. Three mountains, the respec- tive heights of which are 2,055, 3,399, and 3,917 feet, rise southward of Cape Engano at the distances of 11, 16, and 22 miles and form fine landmarks in clear weather. It is reported that the general trend of the coast is fairly well shown on the chart, but that the entire coast line from Iligan Point to Divilacan Bay is 4 to 8 miles to the westward of the true position. Occasional rocks and shoals are found, none extending more than ^ mile from the shore. The coast line forms a succession of small bays, all open to the sea from north- northeast to south-southwest, with small stretches of sand beach. Immediately back of the narrow strips of beach, steep, high moun- tains rise, showing no trails or passes available for transit into the interior. The whole appearance is that of an impenetrable barrier shutting off the east coast from the valley beyond. Divilacan Bay, north of Mount Moises (4,209 feet) , the highest and most eastern peak in this vicinity, is open northward ; the shores are fringed by reefs, and there is a depth of 7 to 9 fathoms in the center of the bay. Fairly well sheltered anchorage may be found westward of Gay Island. Port Dimalansan (chart 4265), southeast of Divilacan Bay, has Gay Island on the western side of the entrance and Estagno Island on the eastern, and penetrates 2y 2 miles southward ; it is about 250 yards wide at the narrowest part and has a least depth of 1% fathoms. The banks are steep and heavily wooded. Considerable experience would be necessary to enter this bay, but with local knowledge small craft would find perfect shelter. Aubarede Point is 7 miles southward of Estango Island, and forms the eastern side of Port Bicobian. Eocks and shoals extend nearly *4 niile south of the point. Port Bicobian (chart 4265) is an arm of the sea penetrating 2y 2 miles northward. At the head of the port there is a well-sheltered anchorage in a basin about 600 yards in diameter, having a depth of 10 fathoms, soft, sticky bottom. The plan of the port seems fairly correct, but two shoals near the western bank, halfway up the bay, do not appear on the plan. Several large rocks were found near the western side of the entrance, close inshore. Palanan Bay, lying southward of Port Bicobian, is semicircular in form, about 6 miles wide and 3 miles deep. A small river empties into the south side of the bay, and about y± mile east of it a reef extends in a northwesterly direction for about l/ 2 mile, behind which protection from the sea is found, with fair anchorage. Breakers extend about 1 mile northward and y 2 mile eastward of Palanan Point. This point is easily distinguished by the saddle shape of the high land. The coast between Palanan Bay and Inaguican Point, 158 miles southward, has not been surveyed, and the charts differ greatly. 108 LtrzoN. The general trend of the coast is south-southwest for 73 miles, south- west for 52 miles, and south-southeast for 47 miles. It is stated in the Derrotero to be clean and steep-to and free from dangers. From Cape Engafio to San Miguel Bay northeast winds prevail from October to March, the monsoon here beginning with north winds, which are of short duration and soon pass into the northeast; in January and February the east winds begin and terminate the mon- soon. The heaviest rains fall from October to January, and in October and other months of that part of the year typhoons some- times occur. In March and April, and sometimes in the early part of May, variable winds blow, bringing in the southwest monsoon; but the dry season, of which April and May are the driest months, is uninterrupted by rain. Thunderstorms occur from June to Novem- ber, most frequently in August. During the southwest monsoon the sea is calm, but the weather gets very boisterous during the mid- dle of the northeast monsoon. Dinapiqui Point, 43 miles southward of Palanan Point, is formed by a succession of six headlands, steep-to, without beach, affording no shelter. The general trend of the coast from Palanan seems to be properly charted. Successive open bights follow each other, with shoals here and there, close inshore. There are a few sandy strips of beach in the bottoms of the bights, but along the points high hills drop down to the water. In many places great caverns have been worn by the sea in the faces of these high rock masses. No shelter can be found along this stretch except for small native boats. Dilasac Bay (chart 4265), included between Dinapiqui and Tarigtig Points, is 10 miles wide and 7 miles deep. There are two bights in the southwestern part of the bay, and the western one forms a fine harbor which affords excellent anchorage, completely landlocked, in 5 fathoms, with soft sticky bottom. Off the eastern entrance point of this bight detached rocks extend nearly y^ mile northeastward. About 1 mile southwest from the eastern entrance point, is a danger- ous reef awash at low water; it is about 600 yards in extent northwest and southeast and about 350 yards in width. The narrow channel to the eastward of it is less than ^4 m il e wide and has 4 fathoms; the passage to the westward is wide and clear, and 6 fathoms will be found close to the northwest end of the reef. The 5-fathom anchor- age is off the southwest side of the reef about y± mile from it. The entrance to the anchorage presents no difficulty. A vessel should be steered midway between the two shores and hauled to the southward gradually to clear the shoal on the eastern side of the port. The rise and fall of the tide in this bight is about 8 feet. The eastern bight of Dilasac Bay is open during northeast monsoons and does not af- ford shelter. From Tarigtig Point the coast trends southwesterly for about 24 miles to Cape San Ildefonso. This coast appears free from off-lying dangers. Cape San Ildefonso is the southern extremity of San Ildefonso Penin- sula, which forms the eastern side of Casiguran Sound. Casiguran Sound (chart 4265) is a long arm of the sea extending for 10 miles in a northeast direction, beyond which is Casiguran Bay, a landlocked basin 5 miles long in a northeast and southwest direction and 2y 2 miles wide, which can be entered by a deep clear channel, % mile wide. The eastern shore of the sound is clean and steep-to, and CAPE ENGANO TO LAMON BAT. 109 can be approached to *4 mile, except near Cape San Ildefonso. The depth in the middle of the sound generally exceeds 35 fathoms. The western shore is much shoaler than the eastern and in many places anchorage can be had in 20 fathoms. It is not safe to go inside of 20 fathoms, as the water shoals rapidly in many places. Directions. — In entering Casiguran Sound, the eastern shore should be given a berth of about 1 mile until abreast the highest point of San Ildefonso Peninsula ; from here the low hill at the en- trance of the bay should be steered for. This usually shows very plainly against the higher hills in the background. The entrance to the bay is nearly % mile wide, deep, and free from danger. It is safe to approach either side to 50 yards with a vessel drawing 25 feet. Vessels of any draft will find the best anchorage in the northwest part of the bay. The depth in the middle of the bay is 20 to 22 fathoms, bottom soft clay or mud, decreasing toward the shore. The land at the head of the bay is low and heavily wooded. Shoal water extends a long way out, and the bank is very steep. The town of Casigtjean, which is small and poor, is about 2 miles back from the beach, at the head of the bay, and is not visible. Vessels desiring to communicate with the town should anchor in 15 fathoms, about y 2 mile from the shore, with Charleston Hill bearing 31° (31° mag.) . It is not advisable to go closer in, as the depths decrease rapidly. Fresh water can be obtained on the northeast side of the bay from a small mountain stream almost hidden by trees. Baler Bay (chart 4265), southward and westward of San Ildefonso Peninsula, can be recognized by the high land all around the bay and up the coast as far as Casiguran Bay. Encanto Point, at the entrance to the bay, has several islets and rocks that dry at low water extend- ing about 1 mile. Baler Bay may be entered on a 260° (259° mag.) course, keeping iy 2 miles from the south shore, the water gradually shoaling from 18 fathoms off the point of Los Confites Reef, to 4 fathoms off the reef, making out from the point to the eastward of the mouth of the Baler River. There is anchorage in from 8 to 10 fathoms, with the river mouth open and bearing about south. A green hill lies a little to the westward of the anchorage. The town of Baler is back from the shore and can not be seen when entering the anchorage. In the southeastern part of Baler Bay is a cove affording partial protection to small vessels ; to enter this cove bring a fresh-water stream in the bight to bear 149° (148° mag.) and stand in for it until in 5 fathoms, and anchor. This stream runs into the bay over a ledge of rock and can easily be picked up. Bearing about 40° (39° mag.) from this anchorage is a patch of rocks having 5 feet of water on them at low tide; these show dark on the surface of the water, and can be easily seen and avoided. The .cove will not safely accommodate a vessel more than 200 feet in length, and only offers partial protection from the northeast monsoons. The bottom of Baler Bay is sand and rock, and is poor holding ground. Between Encanto Point and Agria Point, the northern entrance to Dingalan Bay, the coast trends southwesterly for about 21 miles. There is a ledge reaching out to the eastward from Dibayabay Point, and an islet close inshore in the bight between Dibayabay and 110 LUZON. Distoring Points ; a second islet off Distoring Point ; a third islet be- tween Distoring and Dicapinisan Points ; and a fourth islet about 1 mile offshore, eastward from Dicapinisan Point. Bingalan Bay is about 10 miles wide between Agria and Deseada Points, and about 5 miles deep. The relative positions of the points about Dingalan Bay seem to be- fairly correct. The most distinctive mark for picking up the bay from seaward is a very plainly marked white band on the hills running down to the beach 5 or 6 miles to the southward of Deseada Point. Agria Point is bare, as is also the point just behind Los Carabaos Islets, this point at a distance having the appearance of a broad white roadway leading down to the beach. Anchorage may be found in the northern part of the bay, sheltered from the northeast winds, in 3 to 9 fathoms. Prueba Eock is a small, low rock rising from a small coral reef sur- rounded by deep water ; it lies about 1% miles from shore, off Prueba Point, about 15 miles south-southeastward from the southern entrance to Dingalan Pay. Inaguican Point, the northern entrance to Lamon Bay, is about 36 miles southwestward of Dingalan Bay. It is the most eastern point in this vicinity. It is low and heavily wooded, with large trees, grow- ing to a height of about 50 feet, and having the appearance of solid land when seen from a distance. The shore for 6^ miles northwest- ward, to the mouth of the Agos Eiver, is sandy. From Inaguican Point a sandy shore trends westerly for 2 miles to the mouth of Misua Creek, an estuary making into the lowlands around the point. During the northeast monsoon vessels having cargo for Infanta anchor 1 mile to the southward of the mouth of Misua Creek in 7 fathoms or at Port Lampon, 5 miles farther to the southwest. Tide rips are formed off Inaguican Point to the south- ward and the water is highly discolored, giving the appearance of reefs ; however, the waters in this vicinity are very bold and the point may be rounded close-to. The flood tide in this locality sets in from the northward and is quite strong off the point. Infanta (Binangonan de Lampon) is about Qy 2 miles northwestward of Inaguican Point and about 2 miles from shore. Vessels desiring to communicate with the town can find good anchorage during the south- west monsoon just southward of the mouth of the Agos Eiver in 6 or 8 fathoms, about y 2 mile from shore. POLTLLO ISLAND, eastward of Inaguican Point, from which it is separated by a channel 10 miles wide, is about 25 miles long north and south and from 6 to 15 miles wide. It is hilly and well wooded. Mount Malolo, 1,130 feet high, the highest point on the island, is near the western shore about 10 miles from the southern end of the island. It is the most prominent landmark and is the first object seen when approach- ing from the east or northeast. The north coast of Polillo is fringed by a wide coral reef which is steep-to. There are several breaks in this reef forming small bays which do not afford good anchorage. From offshore five hilltops, 300 POLILLO. Ill to 600 feet high, stand out prominently and serve to identify the coun- try generally. Minayit Point, the northeast point of Polillo Island, is easily recognized. It is a brown rock bluff 58 feet high and bare of trees, being separated from the wooded land back of it by a saddle only 20 feet high. Pinavisagan Bay affords some protection from westward and south- ward, and may be entered by steering 206° (205° mag.) for a cluster of trees on the eastern shoulder of the hill southwest of the bay. Bugwasan, Bonleo, and Matancan Bays do not afford anchorage even for launches. A break in the reef northwestward of Matancan Bay affords entrance to a good anchorage protected from heavy seas, the reef being awash about half tide. In entering, the eastern side of the channel, which is about 200 yards wide, should be favored. Pa- nampalan Point, the northwest point of Polillo Island, is a low mangrove area with a coral reef extending about V/ 2 miles northward. There is an intricate channel, obstructed by shoals, through this reef about 650 yards north of the mangroves shore. A round-topped tree, 58 feet high, on the eastern side of the point, and a conical-topped clump of trees, 60 feet high, on the western side, serve as landmarks for this locality. A shoal with a least-known depth of 1 fathom is \y 2 miles offshore west of the latter clump of trees. This shoal with a 2-f athom shoal lying y 2 mile off the edge of the reef northwestward of Panampalan Point are the only dangers on this part of the coast outside the shore reef. Lipata River has a fairly uniform depth of \y 2 to 2 fathoms for Sy 2 miles. The rocky parts of the banks are heavily wooded, with nipa palms in other places. Fresh water is encountered about 5 miles from its mouth. A moderate amount of clearing of overhanging and fallen trees would make the river navigable for launches. Pinagagan River consists of two salt-water bights, the western one being almost bare at low water. The southern bight affords a safe, landlocked shelter for small vessels not requiring more than 200 feet swinging radius. The entrance between the reefs is about 100 yards wide. In entering pass close to the spit (partly bare at all stages of the tide) which extends from the point between Pinagagan and Lipata Eivers. When about 100 yards west of the highest rock on the spit, head southeastward for the lowest gap on the west side of the river until the northerly edge of the mangrove on the east bank bears 91° (90° mag.) then head southeast by east to within 50 yards of the eastern shore, thence in mid-channel to an anchorage in 3 fathoms, sand and mud bottom. Panangatan Point is a prominent landmark. The shore northward is rock-bound, consisting of massive granite outcroppings. The coral reef almost disappears and the point is clean and steep-to. Hook Bay (chart 4265) is a small harbor of refuge about 1 mile east- ward of Panangatan Point. It affords excellent protection for small vessels, being surrounded by high hills and completely landlocked. It is about 350 yards wide at the entrance, and extends about 1 mile northward and thence % mile northwestward. When approaching from the southward the entrance is easily picked up, as the headland on the eastern side of the entrance is high and clearly defined against the background. Both sides of the entrance are fringed by well- marked coral reefs, narrowing the channel in one place to a width of 112 LUZON. a little over 100 yards. No vessel should attempt to enter at night or in very thick weather. Directions. — Bring the entrance to bear 1° (0° mag.) and head into the bay, keeping in mid-channel until the narrows are passed, then head up the middle of the bay and anchor in the widest part, here about ^4 mile wide between the 5-f athom curves, in 10 fathoms, muddy bottom. There is room in the northwest section of the bay for two vessels of about 500 tons. To enter this anchorage, pass Elbow Point fairly close on the port hand and round handsomely into the center of the bay and anchor in 8 fathoms, muddy bottom. Excellent anchorage may be found in the small bay westward of the western entrance point to Hook Bay. Vessels at this anchorage are protected from all winds from west through north to southeast. To reach this anchorage vessels should stand into the middle of the bay and anchor when the western entrance point to Hook Bay bears 91° (90° mag.) in 15 fathoms, muddy bottom. From Hook Bay the coast trends south-southeasterly for 11^ miles to the entrance to Polillo Harbor and is fringed by a narrow, steep-to reef. Off Salipsip Point, 8 miles from Hook Bay, the reef extends % mile, and 3 miles farther southeastward it extends about y 2 mile, with a rock awash near its outer edge. Nearly 3 miles south- ward of Hook Bay a small detached patch, covered by 1 fathom, lies about % mile from shore. Polillo (chart 4265) is a small, unimportant town on the eastern shore of a semicircular bay about 15 miles southeast of Panangatan Point. It is surrounded by a dilapidated wall, well overgrown by shrubbery. It contains a prominent church with an octagonal tower roofed with nipa, which is visible a long distance. The town is very poor and has few resources. The harbor formed by the bay is over 1 mile in extent and the available sheltered area is increased by a large reef which extends over 2 miles northward from Polillo Point. This reef, partly bare at low water, is as a rule steep-to and is marked by breakers and dis- colored water. The head of the harbor is foul and several dangerous detached shoals lie from y 2 to % mile -from the eastern shore. The shoalest and southern patch, covered by % fathom, lies about % mile from shore 1 mile north-northwestward of the church. This shoal can easily be picked up by the discolored water, but the others, which are covered by 2 and 2y 2 fathoms, can not be detected until the bot- tom is seen by looking directly down on it. The discolored water observed from offshore when entering Polillo Harbor is due to the discharge from small streams. A lighted range marks the clear passage into Polillo Harbor. The rear range is an inverted triangular-shaped day mark with a vertical stripe through the center placed on the old octagonal church tower in Polillo. The front range is a white triangular day mark, point up, with vertical stripe through the center, on a post with concrete base, on the beach 350 yards from the rear mark. In entering Polillo Harbor bring the day marks or lights in range bearing 145° (144° mag.) and hold this course until Polillo Point is abeam; then change to 154° (153° mag.) for about 1% miles, until the front range is abeam, and -anchor in 9 fathoms westward of the church. POLILIX). 113 Extending 5y 2 miles northwestward from Polillo Point is a large bank on which are several detached reefs and much foul ground. Panangatan Point, the western extremity of Polillo Island, bearing 1° (0° mag.), will carry a vessel well westward of all the dangers on this bank. The channel between the bank and the coast of Luzon is 7 miles wide, deep and clear. Yellow Bock, the outer reef, showing a yellow rock awash at low water, lies on the northwest part of the bank 7% miles northeastward of Inaguican Point. Union Eeef, with a least depth of 1^4 fathoms, lies about iy 2 miles southeastward of Yellow Kock, near the edge of the bank. Directions. — Vessels from the south should not bring Panangatan Point, the western extremity of Polillo Island, to bear westward of 1° (0° mag.) until Mount Malolo bears 97° (96° mag.), when it may be steered for. When the church tower bears 144° (143° mag.), it should be steered for, keeping a good lookout for the shoals on either side, and enter on the range. Agta Point, the southern extremity of Polillo Island, is low, heavily wooded, and fringed by a narrow, steep-to reef. At a distance of 1 mile southward from the point depths of over 20 fathoms are found. From about \y 2 miles west-northwestward of Agta Point a chain of detached reefs, with a least depth of 1% fathoms, extends nearly 1% miles south westward. The western side of these reefs may be avoided by keeping, the tangent to the land nothing westward of 1° (0° mag.), and the southern side may be avoided by keeping the tangent to the land eastward nothing eastward of 80° (79° mag.). Burdeos Bay is formed by Polillo, Palasan, Patnanongan, and sev- eral smaller islands. It affords a large area of available anchorage ground well protected from all winds and sea. The southern ap- proach is filled with shoals and reefs, among which there are several long and tortuous channels. The channel westward of Cataoyan Reef is very narrow and should not be attempted. The channel east- ward of Pacabalo Eeef is apparently safe, but the one between the reefs is most frequently used. The following directions were used by the survey party and may be useful. Directions. — About iy 2 miles from the south side of Patnanongan Island lies Minasawa Island; it is small, about 50 feet high, and is easily distinguished, being a brighter green than Patnanongan, which . is much higher. Bring Minasawa to bear 18° (17° mag.) before Agta Point bears anything southward of 271° (270° mag.) and steer for it until 4% miles from it and the southeastern point of Palasan Island bears 344° (343° mag.) ; then steer 331° (330° mag.) for 53,4 miles ; this course will carry 5 to 20 fathoms of water and will take a vessel safely between Cataoyan and Pacabalo Reefs. By the time the vessel is between these reefs, Coccoc Rocks will be sighted against the Polillo shore ; continue on this course until the Coccoc Rocks bear 282° (281° mag.) and then steer 1° (0° mag.) for 2% miles, heading for the eastern point of Palasan Island ; when the Coccoc Rocks bear 226° (225° mag.) steer 300° (299° mag.) for 4 miles, heading for Bini Island. Care should be taken in approaching Bini Island, as a coral reef, bare at low water, extends about y 2 mile southeastward from it. A similar reef makes off southward from Palasan Island, leaving a chan- nel about % mile wide between them. The tidal currents are strong 97172°— 19 8 114 LUZON. between these reefs. When y 2 mile from Bini Island and the south- westerly point of Palasan Island bears 71° (70° mag.), change course to 330° (329° mag.) and pass about 14 mile northeastward of Bini Island ; continue this course for 2 1 / 4: miles until the northwest point of Palasan Island bears 60° (59° mag.) and the eastern sides of Icol, Aniroag, and Anawan Islands are in range, bearing 37° (36° mag.)^ then steer 226° (225° mag.), which will take a vessel well clear of the reefs northward of San Rafael Island. When the north end of San Rafael Island bears 118° (117° mag.) head down the bay and anchor in 8 fathoms, mud bottom, when the north point of San Rafael bears 91° (90° mag.). It is recommended that a stranger should wait for low water when entering. Burdeos Bay may also be entered from the northeast. The channel between Icol and Cabaloa Islands is deep and clear. A 3^-fathom shoal lies in the eastern approach and the western end of Icol Island must be rounded close-to to avoid a.l^-fathom shoal in Burdeos Bay. The channel between Cabaloa Island and Polill'o is intricate, being narrowed to about 325 yards by reefs, and the strong tidal currents make it dangerous for large vessels. The narrow channels between Icol and Palasan and between Palasan and Patnanongan are deep and clear but subject to strong tidal currents, sometimes reaching at least 4 knots on spring tides. The north, east, and south shores of Palasan Island are fringed by wide coral reefs. The island itself is moderately high with a narrow mangrove fringe along the shore. Icol Island has a coral reef extend- ing off its northeast shore. Cabaloa Island is fringed by a coral reef that widens to % mile on the eastern side. A coral reef and shoal extends eastward and northeastward of Anirong Island almost to Anawan Island, leaving a channel about 100 yards wide close to the latter island. Anibawan Bay affords well-protected anchorage and is easy of ac- cess. When coming from Burdeos Bay, the channel between Ca- baloa and Anirong Islands is recommended. When approaching from northward or eastward the channel between Anawan and Bugnitay Islands should be used. A reef with two rocks awash at low spring tides lies about % mile westward of Bank Point. The water deepens rapidly on all sides of this reef, which is about 325 by 450 yards in extent. A shoal of about the same area, with a least known depth of 2% fathoms, lies y 2 mile north-northwestward of this reef. The best anchorage is westward of a north and south line drawn tangent to Cabungalunan Point, in from 6 to 17 fathoms, mud bottom. During stormy weather vessels of moderate draft can get well under the point and be free from all seas. If vessels desire to anchor near the Anibawan River, it should be noted that the mud flats extend y 2 mile eastward of the river mouth, coming up suddenly from 5 fathoms to 1 fathom. The Anibawan River has about 3 feet on the bar at low water, with 8 feet inside for about 2 miles, where a gradual reduction in depths commences. Overhang- ing trees and sunken logs impede free navigation of the river. Patnanongan Island, lying eastward of Burdeos Bay, is about 12 miles long, 5 miles wide, and 390 feet high. It is heavily wooded. The shores are fringed with coral and are lined with mangrove. The TJala Islands lies on a large reef separated from Patnanongan by a nar- row tortuous channel impracticable even for a small boat at low water. LAMON BAT. 115 Kalongkooan Island marks the northern edge of this reef and the Malaguinoan Islands the western edge. Ticlin Island, 36 feet high, and the little island, 80 fe«t high, lying iy 2 miles westward of the Mala- guinoan Islands, are both steep-to. A shoal with a depth of 4% fathoms lies y 2 mile southeast of the 80-foot island. A shoal with a depth of 1% fathoms lies % mile farther in the same direction. The area between Palasan, Patnanongan, and the Uala Islands fur- nishes protection from the sea, but is not a desirable place to anchor on account of the strong currents. East Ikikon and the Catakian Islands, eastward of Patnanongan Is- land, are very low and present no distinguishing features. The south- western point of the larger Catakian Island is sand beach, but -the remainder is rock and coral. The reef extends about 1 mile off the northern point of the island, leaving a narrow channel between it and East Ikikon. An anchorage protected from heavy seas, but not from the wind, may be found in a large area of 11 fathoms northwestward of Catakian Islands. Better protected anchorage may be found far- ther southward in 4 fathoms close to the island. The outer edge of the reef, on which East Ikikon lies, is about 6 miles northeastward of the Patnanongan shore and constitutes the outer limit of dangers off these islands. Jomalig Island, low and heavily wooded, is separated from Patnan- ongan Island by a deep channel about 3 miles wide, with the deepest water on the Jomalig side of the channel. It is surrounded by a coral reef, bare at low water, which extends about 1% miles from the east- ern part of the island and surrounds the Malanat Islets and Lantao Rock. The west end of the island is moderately high, abrupt, and wooded. The tops of the trees are about 100 feet high and visible about 10 miles. Malanat Islets are a group of three small islets and a number of rocks lying on the reef about % mile from the eastern end of Jomalig. The islets are wooded and 35, 42, and 56 feet high, respectively. Lantao Rock lies about 2 miles northward from the east end of Jo- malig, near the edge of the shore reef ; it is bare and 6 feet high. Lantao Islands are two small, bare rocky islets about 50 feet high, of a whitish appearance, lying close together about 4% miles northeast- ward of the east end of Jomalig, and appear as one island from some directions. LAMON BAT, between Inaguican Point northwest and Jesus Point southeast, is partly protected during the northeast monsoon by Polillo and several smaller islands. Balesin Island lies in the middle of the bay, and farther in are Cabalete, Baliscan, and Alabat Islands. Port Lampon, in the northwest part of the bay, is a small but well- sheltered port, except during southeasterly and southerly winds. It has a depth of 12 fathoms, sand and mud bottom at the entrance, decreasing gradually to iy 2 and 2 fathoms off the village on the small island *4 mile northward. From the port five lagoons run into the lowlands, forming Inagui- can Point, the largest of which, known as the Pulo River, is navigable for launches for 2% miles from its mouth to the village of Pulo, from which place a path leads to Infanta, 2% miles distant. Good anchor- 116 LUZON. age may be found in 5 to 7 fathoms inside Tacligan Point, the eastern entrance point. Directly opposite Tacligan Point is a mountain stream, affording good drinking water, which may be entered at half tide. Infanta is the nearest place in this vicinity where supplies of any kind can be obtained. A rock about 40 feet high lies ll 1 /^ miles southward of Port Lam- pon and about ^ mile from shore. It is connected with the mainland by a reef bare at low water. A reef extends over 300 yards eastward from the rock. Cabalete Island, about 24 miles southward of Inaguican Point, is heavily wooded; there is a ridge about 100 feet high close to the northern shore. Eeefs extend 1^4 miles from the southeast coast, and there are detached reefs, with 4 and 5 fathoms, 2y 2 miles from the same coast. The remainder of the island is fringed by reefs from 200 to 650 yards. The channel between Cabalete Island and Saley Point on the mainland is about 3 miles wide and over 50 fathoms deep in the middle. Vessels using this channel are advised to favor the Luzon shore. Saley Point, 26% miles southward of Inaguican Point, is the most easterly point between Port Lampon and Mauban. It is high, well wooded, and steep-to. About 6 miles northward of Saley Point is a large waterfall, pouring directly into the sea, under which small boats may be filled at half tide. Malazor Point, about 2% miles southwestward of Saley Point, is low and terminates in a wooded knoll higher than the rest of the point. A coral reef extends over 100 yards eastward and southward. From here the coast trends westward, forming a bight, on the western side of which is the town of Mauban. Mauban (chart 4265) is a small port of little commercial import- ance, copra being about the only article exported. No supplies are available. Good water can be obtained from a spring about 250 yards from the beach. The most conspicuous object in the town is a large galvanized-iron church, resembling a grain elevator, standing to the left of the center of the town alongside the ruins of an old stone church. Anchorage may be found in 6 fathoms, with the church bearing 288° (287° mag.) and the eastern tangent to Malazor Point 31° (30° mag.). From Mauban the coast trends southeasterly for 6% miles to Petisa Point, thence 10 miles farther in the same direction to Ati- monan. This coast is bold, with deep water close-to. The shores are generally sandy beaches fringed 'with coconut trees and backed by high, wooded hills over 1,700 feet high within a short distance. Twin peaks, 3% and 4% miles northwestward of Atimonan and 1% miles from the shores, 1,279 and 1,241 feet high, respectively, form conspicuous landmarks. Atimonan, the principal town in this vicinity and a regular port of call for coasting steamers, lies on the right bank at the mouth of the Atimonan River, about 16 miles southeastward of Mauban. It contains a large church, the tower of which, resembling a white lighthouse, can be seen from a position near the north end of Alabat Island; the rest of the town is nearly concealed by coconut trees. Considerable copra and some hemp is shipped. There is a good road to Lucena, on the south coast of Luzon. The Atimonan River is small and has a depth of from 7 to 9 feet on the bar at high water. LAMON BAT. 117 Anchorage may be found off the river mouth in 10 fathoms, muddy bottom, with the church bearing 180° (179° mag.). Small vessels may anchor closer in, but they should not go inside of 6 fathoms, as the water shoals rapidly after that and the bottom, of hard sand, is poor holding ground. During the northeast monsoon this anchorage is sometimes untenable; at such times vessels seek refuge at Port Alabat or Sangirin Bay. From Atimonan the coast trends east-southeastward for 12 miles to Laguio Point. This coast is fringed by a narrow reef and may be approached to within y 2 m ile at any place. The town of Gumaca lies in a bight just eastward of Laguio Point. Lopez Bay lies between Laguio Point and Roma Point. Lopez River empties into the head of the bay ; it is about 50 yards wide at the entrance and narrows down to 30 yards near the town of Lopez. Lorchas land at the town at high water. The head of Lopez Bay and the north shore are fringed by exten- sive coral reefs; the small islands, Niogan, Nagtaquin, and Manicnic, 80, 75, and 57 feet high, respectively, are on this reef close to shore. A shoal about 450 yards long in a northerly direction and having a least depth of 1% fathoms, lies 1 mile south-southeastward of Niogan Island and y 2 mile off the point of a reef extending from shore. Anchorage for deep-draft vessels may be found in the southern part of the bay in about 8 fathoms, mud bottom, about 1 mile off the en- trance to the Lopez River. Hondagua Harbor (chart 4273) is a secure anchorage, with good holding ground, in the northeast part of Lopez Bay. The Manila Railroad Co. has built a wharf with a depth of 30 feet alongside. They maintain a fixed red light on the wharf. Hondagua is con- nected with Manila by railroad, and a weekly steamer runs to ports on the east coast of Luzon between Polillo and Daet. Vessels going to the wharf at Hondagua should pass about y 2 mile southward of Niogan Island before heading for the wharf. Fresh water may be obtained at the wharf and provisions in limited quantities are available. Baliscan Island, lies 1% miles west-northwestward of the north point of Alabat Island, is small and steep-to, with the exception of a reef with depths of 2 to 5 fathoms extending about % mile southwest- ward. The island is a flat-topped rock, bare of vegetation, about 300 feet in extent, 20 feet high, and much underworn at its base by the action of the sea. A light visible 12 miles is shown from a white con- crete pillar on the island. The channels on either side are deep and clear. Balesin Island lies liy 2 miles north-northeastward of Cabalete Is- land. It is low, flat, and wooded, and the general height to the top of the trees is about 78 feet. Its northwestern, northern, and north- eastern parts are fringed with reefs bare at low water and foul ground exists westward and south westward from it. Tarlac B«ef, with a least known depth of 4% fathoms, lies 2^4 miles southwestward of the south end of Balesin Island. The reported position of Tarlac Reef is shown on the present charts as a 2-fathom shoal marked "Position doubtful," about 2% miles southward of Balesin Island. 118 LUZON. Alabat Island is about 20 miles long in a northwest and southeast direction, 8 miles wide, and is easily distinguished. It is heavily- wooded and has a ridge of moderate height running its whole length ; on it are five peaks from 1,083 feet to 1,384 feet high, resembling is- lands from a distance of 30 miles. The northwest coast of Alabat Island from Sangirin Point, the west extremity, to Gerardo Point, the north point of the island, trends northeastward and is fringed by a coral reef from 200 to 900 yards wide. Off Sangirin Point this reef extends about 540 yards westward; a smaller reef surrounds the north point of the island. The northeastern coast, from Gerardo Point to Silangan Point is, as far as known at the present time, clean and steep-to. Sangirin Bay (chart 4268) lies eastward of Sangirin Point. The village of the same name lies on the eastern shore of the bay. This bay affords a small, well-sheltered anchorage in 7 or 8 fathoms, mud bottom. The land forming Sangirin Point and that surrounding the bay is low. About y 2 mile southward of the mouth of the bay are two large reefs, bare at low water, which afford protection from southerly seas. Directions. — When about 1 mile from Sangirin Point bring the town to bear 46° (45° mag.) and steer for it around the west point of the bay, favoring the western shore, and anchor in 7 or 8 fathoms, muddy bottom, in the middle of the bay, about 350 yards from the head. Port Alabat (chart 4268), on the southwest side of Alabat Island and about 7 miles southeastward from Sangirin Point, is small, but has accommodations for three or four small vessels. It affords ex- cellent shelter from northward and eastward, but can hardly be recommended as a typhoon anchorage. It is formed by a small bight in the coast about 1 mile across between the east and west points. Long reefs of rocks and sand extend off these points ; about midway between these reefs and about y 2 mile from shore is a reef of sand and rocks connected with the reef off the south point, visible at low water. The shore of the port is low, with an extensive sand beach. Fresh water may be obtained from a small stream on the north side of the port ; boats can easily enter at high water. The town of Alabat is on the eastern side of the port. The most conspicuous building in the town is the convent, a large, white, wooden building, with galvanized-iron roof. The town is poor and offers few resources. Directions. — With the convent bearing 81° (80° mag.), a vessel can easily feel her way to an anchorage, the depth gradually decreas- ing from 18 fathoms south of the west point to 3 fathoms about % mile from shore. Silangan Pass (chart 4273) between the southeast end of Alabat Is- land and Eoma Point, Luzon, is over y 2 mile wide, but the navigable width is reduced to about 600 yards by the reefs fringing the shores on either hand. A light is shown 31 feet above- high water from a white concrete beacon erected on the edge of the reef northward of Roma Point. The depths in the pass are very irregular, 2^4 to 15 fathoms being found. There is a rock with a least depth of 3 fathoms lying near the middle of the pass in a position from which the church at Quezon bears 14° (13° mag.), distant % mile. This is believed to be the principal danger near mid-channel, but it is possible other LAMON BAT. 119 isolated rocks may exist. There is a dangerous shoal in the western approach to Silangan Pass, partly bare at extreme low water, lying with its southeastern edge 232° (231° mag.) 1% miles from the church at Quezon. Directions. — From westward, when about 2 miles from the village of Quezon, bring the southeast tangent to Alabat Island to bear 46° (45° mag.} and steer for it until the light on Koma Point bears 88° (87° mag.), when the course should be changed to 68° (67° mag.). When the pass begins to open, the course may be shaped as desired, giving the coast northward or southward a berth of at least y% mile. From eastward steer in for the middle of the pass on a 248° (247° mag.) course until the light on Roma Point bears 88° (87° mag.) and the southeast point of Alabat Island bears 46° (45° mag), when the course should be changed to 226° (225° mag.) and held for 2 miles. The peninsula between Lopez Bay and Calauag Bay, terminating in Roma Point, is covered with heavily wooded hills 200 to 500 feet high. The shore is fringed by a narrow reef, and anywhere between Roma Point and Dinampo Point, the western entrance to Calauag Bay, can be safely approached within y 2 mile. Calauag Bay is from 3 to 5 miles wide and extends 7 miles southeast- ward from Silangan Pass. The head of the bay is blocked by mud flats, partly bare at low water. A narrow boat channel, carrying a depth of about 2 feet of water at low tide, leads to the town of Calauag. Anchorage, sheltered from all except northwest winds, may be found in 5 fathoms, muddy bottom, 1% miles north-north- westward of Calauag Church. Port Apat (chart 4265), between Kugasinan and Dayap Points, is nearly closed by a reef, bare at low water, extending southeastward from Dayap Point. Apat Island, lying in the middle of the bay, is well wooded and the tops of the trees are about 75 feet high. It is clear on all sides except the western, from which a reef extends about 300 yards westward. Good anchorage may be found by steer- ing 61° (60° mag.) for the middle of Apat Island and anchoring when Kugasinan Point bears 181° (180^ mag.). Perfectly pro- tected anchorage for a small vessel may be found about 140 yards from the south side of Apat Island in 3 fathoms. To approach this anchorage, continue on the first course, round Lungib Point at a distance of about 200 yards, and anchor as previously directed. From Dayap Point, the northern entrance point to Port Apat, the coast trends northwestward for 11 miles to Pangao Point, thence northeastward for 7 miles to Dagdap Point. This coast, except in the immediate vicinity of Dagdap Point, is fringed with a low belt of mangroves. Like all mangrove shores, it is very irregular and indented by many small bights and by the two larger bays, Dayap and San Angel. From Dayap Point to Pangao Point the coast is fringed by reefs extending over 1 mile in places, and vessels bound for Apat and Calauag Bays are advised to give it a good berth. At Dagdap Point the shoreline changes its character; the fringe of mangrove is narrower and often disappears entirely, showing a sandy beach ; large rocks are also found outside of the mangrove. Dayap Bay, immediately northward from the point of the same name, is very small, almost blocked by reefs, and of no value to the navigator. 120 LUZON. Palupari Island, about 1 mile northwestward of Pangao Point, with which it is connected by a reef, is low, fringed with mangroves, and heavily wooded. The tops of the trees are about 80 feet high. Foul ground extends a long distance northward and northwestward from Palupari, and vessels rounding it are advised to give it a berth of 2% to 3 miles. San Angel Bay, eastward from Pangao Point, is shoal and of no value to navigation. A shoal on which the United States Army transport Simmer struck is reported 5 miles from Pangao Point and the same distance from Dagdap Point, with the north end of Alabat Island bearing 261° (260° mag.) and Balesin Island bearing 321° (320° mag.). A shoal with a least known depth of about 5 fathoms lies 8 miles north- ward from Pangao Point, and there is another shoal with a least known depth of Qy 2 fathoms about 5 miles northward of Dagdap Point. In the absence of a thorough survey of this vicinity naviga- tion should be conducted with caution. From Lagichic Point, the eastern entrance to San Angel Bay, the coast trends northeastward for 4 miles and thence northward for 2% miles to Dagdap Point." This elbow in the coast is nearly filled with a large coral reef, which bares about 3 miles at low water. There is a break, into which the Tinig River discharges, between the eastern side of this reef and the reef fringing the western side of Dagdap Point. Dagdap Point is the northern extremity of a long peninsula which forms the western side of Basiad Bay. It is heavily wooded, about 180 feet high to the tops of the trees, and very prominent. North- westward, northward, and northeastward from the point, an area about 2 miles wide, is marked " Not surveyed — reported foul," sur- rounded by a dotted line within which no vessel should venture. Basiad Bay contains numerous detached shoals ; its shores are gen- erally fringed with reefs, and the head of the bay is shoal with mud flats bare at low water. The Cabugon River, which empties into the head of the bay on the eastern side of Bagolayag Point, is the largest river in this vicinity; it has 1 fathom on its bar at low water and deeper water inside. Good, sheltered anchorage for small vessels may be found southward of a reef bare at low water near the head of the bay, midway between Bagolayag Point and the point at the mouth of the Basiad River, in 3 fathoms, soft mud bottom, with plenty of room to the southward in gradually shoaling water. This anchorage may be entered by passing either side of the reef, which bares, but in the absence of any aids to navigation should not be attempted by a stranger unless the dangers are previously marked. Puctol Point, the eastern entrance point to Basiad Bay, is formed by a prominent hill over 200 feet high. From here to Jesus Point, a distance of 11 miles, the coast trends northeasterly, with a curve north- ward, and is very irregular, being indented by numerous small, foul bays and fringed with wide reefs. The land at the back is hilly and heavily wooded. Vessels navigating this coast should keep at least 1 mile outside a line joining the several points. Janlo Island is a small, low mangrove island about 4% miles west- ward from Jesus Point and 1 mile from shore, with which it is con- nected by a reef bare at low water. LAMON BAY TO LAGONOY GULP. 121 LAMON BAY TO LAGONOY GULF. Jesus Point, the most northern land in this vicinity, is a round- topped wooded hill over 100 feet high, connected with the mainland by a low neck of mangrove swamp, giving the point the appearance of an island when first seen from west or east. It is fringed by a narrow reef, on which the sea breaks heavily at times. A shoal with a depth of 5% fathoms lies 2% miles north-northeastward of Jesus Point. A reef deepening gradually to 3Vi fathoms extends 1*4 miles northwest- ward from the first point west of Jesus Point. Between Jesus Point and Pinandungan Point, nearly 9 miles east- ward, the coast is very irregular, being indented by several bays and faced by a number of islands, reefs, and shoals. This coast is bluff, high, and heavily wooded. Navigators not intending to enter any of the bays in this vicinity are advised not to come inside of a line drawn from 2y 2 miles north- ward of Jesus Point to a position 2 miles northward of Tabusao Island. High Point, about 5y 2 miles east-southeastward of Jesus Point, forms the western entrance to Dahikan Bay. It is over 100 feet high, well wooded, and prominent. The northern and southern sides are fringed by a narrow reef, but the eastern extremity is clean and may be rounded at a distance of 200 yards. Dahikan Islands, comprising Entrance, Calalanag, Tabusao, and Palita Islands, he off the entrance to Dahikan Bay. Entrance Island lies close to the shore, about iy 2 miles westward of High Point. It is about 150 feet high and is well wooded. It is surrounded by reefs which fill the passage between it and the mainland. Calalanag Island lies nearly 2 miles northward of High Point. It is small, low, and well wooded and surrounded by a white sand beach except on the northern end, which is composed of black rock. Palita Island, about \y 2 miles northeastward of High Point, is low, wooded, and surrounded by a white sand beach. Tabusao, the most northern of the Dahikan Islands, lies nearly 2 miles west-northwestward of Pinandungan Point. It is low and wooded and surrounded by a white sand beach. Soundings of 2% and Zy 2 fathoms are found about 1% miles north-northwestward from Tabusao, and vessels using the channel between Tanao Island and the mainland are advised to keep about 2y 2 miles northward of Tabusao Island. Dahikan Bay affords good shelter for a. small vessel during typhoon weather in a pocket in the reef southward of High Point. The an- chorage area is very small, but the holding ground is good, and no sea can enter. The head of the bay is shoal and blocked by reefs, partly bare at low water. Directions. — To enter, pass midway between Entrance and Cala- lanag Islands and steer to pass about 400 yards eastward of High Point. When High Point bears 271° (270° mag.) round up for the head of the bight and anchor in about 4 fathoms, muddy bottom, when Samur Island, about 16 miles northeast, shows midway between the south end of Palita Island and the main and High Point and the west erid of Calalanag Island are in range. Small craft may anchor far- ther up the bight on the same range to Samur Island, but this should 122 LTTZON. not be done "unless the reefs are visible, and it will be necessary to moor fore and aft. A long, low point extends northward from the main and forms the eastern side of Dahikan Bay. Between this point and the point forming the western side of Port Mambulao are two large inlets which are blocked with mud and rocks and are of no value to navi- gation. Calambayanga Island is wooded, 230 feet high, and lies off the point forming the western side of Port Mambulao, with which it is connected by a reef bare at low water. Port Mambulao, at the head of which is the town of Mambulao, is nearly 2 miles wide at the entrance between Calambayanga Island and Pinandungan Point and extends Sy 2 miles southeastward. The depth at the entrance is 10 fathoms, decreasing gradually off the town to a depth of less than 1 fathom. The port is clean, easy of access, and affords a large area of good anchorage ground in any depth desired; bottom soft sand. Considerable swell rolls in with north- westerly winds, and it can not be recommended as a" typhoon shelter. Mambulao ships a good deal of hemp. No directions are needed. Pinandungan Point forms the eastern entrance point to Mambulao Bay. It is a bluff, wooded point fringed by a steep-to coral reef about 200 yards wide. Mangrove Point, about 1 mile eastward of Pinandungan Point, is a low, mangrove-covered point fringed by reefs nearly ^4 mile. Tanao Islands, comprising three small islands and a number of large rocks, are about 4 miles northward and northwestward of Pinandun- gan Point. Palumbato, the western island, is 49 feet high, bare and conspicuously flat on top. Tailon, the largest of the group, lies over iy 2 miles east-southeastward of Palumbato ; it is low, surrounded by white sand beach, and covered with bushes. A light is shown from a concrete pillar on Tailon Island. A ridge of shoals, over which the sea breaks in a northerly swell, extends between Palumbato and Tailon. Tanao Island, about y 2 mile southeastward of Tailon, is small, 57 feet high, and wooded, and is the most prominent of the group. The two 32-foot rocks lying northeastward of Tanao are black and prominent. These rocks, with Tanao and Tailon Islands, all stand on the same reef, which bares at low water; the south side of Tanao Island has very little reef off it with deep water close-to. There is a small shoal patch, covered by a least depth of 14 fathom, lying 1% miles south- eastward of Tanao Island. Calagua Islands include six principal islands and a number of smaller islets and rocks in the eastern approach to Lamon Bay. The principal islands, from west to east, are Maculabo, Samtjh, Tinaga, Guintinua, Ingalan, and Huag Islands. Most of the group are bold, but of no great height, except Maculabo, 814 feet high. The two largest of the group, Guintinua and Tinaga, are joined to each other and to several of the smaller ones, the chief of which are Huag, Cagbalisay, the two Siapas and the Balagbag Islands, by coral reefs bare at low water. There are deep channels between this group of connected islands and all of the other islands, except the Pinacuapan Islands. So far as known no good harbor exists in the entire group. Maculabo Island, the southwestern and most important island to the navigator, lies with its southern extremity 4% miles north-north- eastward of Pulandaga Point, the nearest point of the mainland of IAMON BAY TO LAGONOY GULP. 123 Luzon. It is 814 feet high, and is clean and steep-to, except for a narrow fringe of coral on its western side, which bares at low water. Thurston Rock is a small rock, about 10 feet high, lying 7 miles north-northwestward of the north end of Maculabo. Lima Rock, lying 4 miles northward of Thurston Rock, has a least depth of % fathom and is steep-to. The survey in this locality is not complete and mariners are advised for the present to avoid the locality north- ward of the Tanao Islands and Maculabo. Samur Island, 3y 2 miles north-northeastward of the north end of Maculabo, is a small, round-topped islet, 306 feet high, which forms a prominent landmark. Ingalan Island, 7y 2 miles eastward of the south end of Maculabo, is small, covered with grass, and 259 feet high. . It is clean and steep-to on all sides. In strong northeast winds good, protected anchorage may be found about % mile southwestward of the village of Banocboc on the south side of Guintinua Island. From this anchorage the west .end of Ingalan Island should bear 181° (180° mag.), and the south tangent to Guintinua Island 93° (92° mag.). Small vessels may anchor closer in, but they should proceed cautiously, as the shore reef is steep-to. Amalia, 92 feet high, and Paquita, 120 feet high, are two very small islets lying 4^ and 5% miles, respectively, eastward of the east end of Ingalan Island. These islets, so far as known, are clean and steep-to. Breakers are reported about 1 mile southeastward of Paquita Islet. Roses Reef lies about 1 mile westward of Amalia Islet and has two dangerous rocks, with a depth of 5% fathoms between them. These rocks, covered by % and % fathom, are % mile west-southwest- ward and 1 mile westward, respectively, from the center of Amalia Islet. To the north, west, and south of Roses Reef the depths in- crease rapidly to 20 fathoms or more, but eastward a coral bottom of unequal depths extends toward Amalia Islet. Matandumaten Rock is a bare perpendicular rock, about 300 feet in diameter and 145 feet high, 5 miles east-southeastward of Paquita Islet. Close to it on the northeast, east, and southwest sides are rocks 40 to 50 feet high and southwestward of it are rocks awash. Matandumaten forms a prominent landmark, being visible 15 to 18 miles, and may be passed in safety at a distance of y 2 mile. Tanao Pass, the channel between a line drawn from the Tanao Is- lands to the south end of Maculabo Island and the mainland of Luzon, is 4 miles wide at the narrowest point, between Tanao Island and Pinandungan Point, and contains much foul ground. Medio Reef, the most dangerous obstruction in Tanao Pass, is a large reef covered by a least depth of 3 fathoms, lying with its shoal- est part nearly 3 miles west-south westward of the south end of Macu- labo Island. The widest and best channel will be found southward of it. Directions. — Passing 3 miles northward of Jesus Point, steer 93° (92° mag.) for 6% miles, heading for the south end of Maculabo Island. When 1% miles southward of Paliunbato Island, the western Tanao Islet, steer 111° (110° mag.) for 8% miles, when the western ends of Maculbato and Samur Islands should be in range, bearing 21° (20° mag.). Then steer 94° (93° mag.) , with Mangrove Point astern 124 LUZON. for 4 or 5 miles, and then shape the course as desired. The latter course passes 1*4 miles southward of Medio Eeef and about the same distance northward of Parcale Reef. From Mangrove Point the coast trends in a general southeasterly direction for 25 miles to the mouth of the Daet River. From Man- grove Point to Bacacay Point, about 12 miles southeastward, the land is high, there are several prominent hills, and the entire section is heavily wooded. This coast is indented by a number of bays and the shores are fringed by a narrow steep-to coral reef. Between Bacacay Point and the Daet River the shores are low and sandy. . Gumaus Bay, lying between an unnamed point and Gumaus Point, 2% and 4% miles, respectively, from Pinandungan Point, is of mod- erate depth and clear, with the exception of a small shoal patch with a least depth of 2 fathoms lying over y 2 mile northwestward from Gumaus Point. There are no villages on the shore of this bay. Pulandaga Point, 2% miles southeastward of Gumaus Point, is 50 feet high, well wooded, and fringed by a narrow coral reef. Pulandaga Bay is a small cove lying on the west side of the point of the same name; its shores are fringed with coral. Anchorage for small vessels, partially protected during the northeast monsoon by the reef extending northward from Pulandaga Point, may be found toward the head of the bay in 5 fathoms. In the eastern part of the bay is a concrete pier extending into a depth of 15 or 16 feet. Between Pulandaga Point and Tanoban Point, lying 2>y 2 miles southeastward, from it, is a bay which is divided into two smaller bays, Paracale and Malaguit, by Longos Point, a wooded promontory 200 feet high. The town of Paracale and the village of Malaguit are on rivers of the same names which empty at the head of the bays also of the same names. Paracale River is of no value to navigation. Hydraulic dredging operations for gold are being carried on in Paracale River at present. Malaguit River mouth is wide, but choked by rocks. Good anchorage, protected during the southwest monsoon, may be found in either bay. Gumaus, Pulandaga, Paracale, and Malaguit Bays are open northeast- ward and are frequently unsafe during the northeast monsoon. Paracale Beef, a small reef with 4 fathoms, lies nearly 2 miles east- northeastward of Pulandaga Point. A small reef with iy 2 fathoms lies 3% miles eastward of Pulan- daga Point. Tanoban Point is a rounded wooded point 280 feet high. It is fringed by a reef, bare at low water, and shoal water extends y 2 mile eastward from it. Bacacay Point rises to a wooded hill 370 feet high, marked by a prominent bare spot about y 2 mile inland. It is fringed by a narrow, steep-to coral reef. A shoal patch with a least depth of 2% fathoms lies about 1 mile eastward of Bacacay Point. Indan Point is about %y 2 miles southeastward of Bacacay Point ; be- tween these two points the coast recedes southwestward, forming a long bight with sandy shores, which are wooded nearly to the water's edge. The Indan River empties on the western side of the point; it is very shoal and of no value to navigation. Shoal water extends more than 1 mile northerly and easterly from the mouth of the river, and Indan Point should be given a good berth. LAMON BAY TO LAGONOY GULP. 125 Quinamanuca Island lies 1% miles southeastward from Indan Point and about % mile from shore. It is small, low, and heavily wooded, which makes it show well against the low country between the beach and Mount Bacacay. It is fringed on the eastern side by coral, be- yond which shoal water extends nearly y 2 mile. Mariners are advised to give it a berth of at least 1 mile in passing. There is a shallow channel between it and the shore, but it is of no value to the navigator. Daet River empties about 8y 2 miles southeastward of Indan Point. Between these points shoal water extends off about 1% miles in places. A good range for a safe course along this coast is the southwest point of Canimo Island in line with the northeast tangent to Caringo Island, bearing 141° (140° mag.). Vessels leaving the Daet Biver for the westward are advised to hold this range until it becomes too faint to use; they will then find the vessel well up by the reef off Indan Point and heading for Maculabo. There is a small bank with a least depth of %y± fathoms lying 2% miles north-northwestward of the northwest point of Canimo Island. Another bank, larger in extent, with a least depth of 8 fathoms, lies £y 3 miles northwestward of the same point. Daet, the most important town in this vicinity, lies about 4 miles inland on the river of the same name. Mercedes, the port of Daet, and connected thereto by a light street railway, lies at the mouth of the Daet Biver. It is composed princi- pally of warehouses for hemp, rice, etc., with a small collection of native houses. It is not safe for vessels drawing more than 12 feet or over 180 feet long. The harbor is formed by the banks of the river, and a large reef across the mouth affords protection from the sea. The available navigable area is very small, and all vessels enter- ing are obliged to moor to the wharves. The best way to lie at the wharves during the northeast monsoon is with the vessel's head to seaward, as the wind often approaches the force of a gale. The cur- rent in the river is strong, sometimes reaching a velocity of 6 or 7 knots, and good anchors should be used offshore. Turning on an ebb tide should not be attempted, as the vessel is liable to become unmanageable. Pilotage is not compulsory, but advisable. Pilots are always on the lookout and will go out if the bar is passable. The best anchorage for vessels awaiting a pilot is marked by a black buoy. Begular steam communication is maintained with Manila and the ports of eastern Luzon, and considerable trade is carried on by sailing vessels with the ports in the immediate vicinity. Directions. — To approach the mouth of Daet Biver bring the top of a high conical mountain about 8 miles southward of Mercedes to bear 200° (199° mag.) and steer for it. Vessels awaiting .a pilot or not desirous of entering the river should anchor in 7 or 8 fathoms, sandy bottom, close northwestward of the anchorage buoy. Vessels entering the river should pass close westward of the channel buoys, and when nearly up to the last buoy round the sand spit to the west- ward sharply and moor the vessel according to wind and tide. Canimo Island, about 2 miles eastward of the mouth of the Daet Biver, is fringed by a narrow, steep-to coral reef. It is 606 feet high in the northern part, and the northern and eastern slopes are covered with cogon grass to the summit, while the rest of the island is heavily wooded. An occulting white light, visible 15 miles, is shown from the top of a concrete house on the northwestern extremity of Canimo 126 Luzosr. Island. Good anchorage, protected from all winds except from northward, may be found westward of Canimo. Canton Island is small, 355 feet high, and lies about 2 miles south- eastward of Canimo. On the summit of this island is a conspicuous tree and in the southeastern extremity is a prominent, sparsely wooded bluff, which forms a good landmark for vessels approaching San Miguel Bay. Apuao and Apuao Grande Islets and several smaller islets and rocks lie between Canton and Canimo Islands. Canton and the smaller islets are connected and surrounded by reefs, partly bare at low water, leaving a narrow channel between a small, black, rocky islet lying on the western edge of them and Canimo Island. Caringo Island, nearly 2 miles southward of Canton Island, forms the western entrance point of the main channel into San Miguel Bay. It is generally low and well wooded, but on its south side there is a bluff about 40 feet high. Its northeastern and eastern sides are fringed by a coral reef, parts of which bare about % mile. Quinapagyan Island, about 1% miles northwestward of Caringo Is- land and 1 mile eastward of Pambuan Point, Luzon, forms the eastern entrance point at the south end of Canimo Pass. It is low and heavily wooded and about % mile in extent. Sand Point, the western extremity, is a steep-to, prominent, sandy point. Malasugue Island, about midway between Quinapagyan and Caringo Islands, is small and low. The area bounded by the Apuao Islands, Canton, Quinapagyan, and Caringa Islands is foul and should not be entered without local knowledge. Canimo Pass (chart 4268) , the western channel into San Miguel Bay, lies between Luzon and Canimo and Quinapagyan Islands. It is the usual route taken by small coasting steamers between Daet and Naga. Strangers are advised to take a pilot, who may be obtained at either Daet or Naga. For southbound vessels there are no difficulties until nearing Quinapagyan Island, where the channel is narrowed by reefs from the mainland and by a large reef making out from the north side of Quinapagyan Island, with 6-foot soundings % mile northward of Sand Point. The greatest danger in this pass is, how- ever, a large, rocky reef, bare at extreme low water and does not give any signs of its existence at other times. This reef lies about 700 yards west-northwestward of Sand Point and is marked by a red buoy off its eastern edge. Directions. — Vessels from northward, from a position off Canimo light, should steer for Sand Point on a 159° (158° mag.) bearing; when drawing up toward Sand Point the vessel should be hauled southward to give Sand Point a berth of 200 or 250 yards. Colasi Point, a little open westward of Sand Point, clears some 8-foot spots oh the eastern side of the pass. San Miguel Bay is somewhat pear-shaped in general outline, extend- ing 18 miles southward from the entrance between Caringo and Si- ruma Islands and varying in width from 5y z miles at this entrance to 16 miles at greatest width about 4 miles from its head. The navi- gable width of the entrance is contracted by Bicol Rock, awash at half tide, slightly over 1 mile westward of the west end of Siruma Island. Depths of from 6 to 8 fathoms will be found in the middle of the bay, LAMON BAT TO LAGDNOY GULF. 127 decreasing gradually toward the shore. The southern part of the bay is very shoal. From Colasi Point, about 3% miles southward of Caringo Island, the west shore of the bay trends a little east of south for about 5 miles to Magsatangi Point and is heavily wooded and mountainous. The shore is steep-to, and except for reefs off Colasi Point may be ap- proached in safety within y 2 mile. The village of Colasi, on a bluff about 2 miles northward from Magsatangi Point, is small and not readily seen from the sea. Colasi Peak, close to the shore, about 4^ miles southward from Colasi Point, is a sharp, conical hill 1,275 feet high. This hill is only about one-half the height of the other peaks of the Colasi Hills, but it is conspicuously isolated from the rest of the high land and is read- ily identified from all directions except southeastward. Magsatangi Point, the most eastern point on the western side of San Miguel Bay, is formed by the slope of Colasi Peak. From Magsa- tangi Point the coast trends generally south-southwestward for 7 miles to the mouth of the Manga River. Projecting from the south side of Magsatangi Point is a hook of land nearly 1 mile in length, inclosing a shoal basin which dries at extreme low water. The con- spicuous part of this hook is Tacubtacuban Hill, a round-topped hill 340 feet high. The neck connecting this with the mainland and the curved hook projecting westward from its south side are low, narrow, sandy spits covered with mangrove; In heavy northwest winds good anchorage in 3 fathoms, muddy bottom, may be found y 2 mile south- ward of the western extremity of this hook. Anchorage for larger vessels will be found a little farther out in 4 fathoms, with Tacubta- cuban Hill in range with Colasi Point. The beach along this coast is generally rocky, though broken by occasional sand patches, and is timbered to the water's edge. From the mouth of the Manga River the coast takes an abrupt turn to the east-southeastward and stretches in gently curving sand beaches 5 miles to the mouth of the Bicol River. The village of Barceloneta lies at the foot of a fairly conspicuous bluff, showing red soil in places and elsewhere grass covered, just south of the Manga River. The country back of the coast is low and flat. Bicol River empties into San Miguel Bay about 5 miles from the western side and is navigable for small steamers drawing 9 feet to Naga, the capital of Ambos Camarines Province, an important town, 20 miles from the mouth of the river. A black buoy, 2y 2 miles off- shore, in 3 fathoms, marks the anchorage for vessels waiting to enter the Bicol River. Buoys and range beacons generally mark the best water across the bar and the entrance to the river. Without them the bar is impossible of navigation by a stranger. Pilotage is not com- pulsory, but is advisable. Pilots are always in attendance at the vil- lage of Cabusao, at the mouth of the river. The least depth in the best channel approaching the bar at mean high water is 8% feet. The bottom at this place is soft mud, and a vessel just touching will usually proceed without stopping. On the bar proper is a depth of 9 feet, sand bottom, at mean high water. From the mouth of the Bicol River the coast curves gradually east- ward to Tanglar Point. The beach is low, flat, and muddy, and land- ing is impossible except at high water or at the mouth of the Cala- 128 LUZON. banga Eiver, 5 miles eastward of the Bicol Eiver. The 2- fathom curve lies about iy 2 miles from shore. Tanglar Island, off the point of the same name, is small, bold, cov- ered with small trees, and has rocks along its northern shore. A very small, round islet lies ^ mile east of Tanglar Island. From Tanglar Point the coast trends northeastward for 6 miles to the mouth of the Kalwan Eiver. Kagsaa and Bogui Points, mid- way on this stretch, are the principal breaks in a muddy or sandy beach. Back from the shore the land rises in irregular hills covered partly with timber and partly with grass. These are the foothills of Mount Isarog. Mount Isarog, an extinct volcano, lies about 11 miles southeastward from Tanglar Point and is prominent. It rises to two peaks 6,255 and 6,482 feet high, respectively. Cauit Island is a small island 145 feet high lying abreast of Kagsao Point and about 1 mile from shore. It has a light-colored bluff on the bay side and slopes gradually toward the eastern shore. About % mile westward from Cauit Island is a sand shoal having a group of rocks awash at high water. Less than y^ mile southeastward of these rocks there is a submerged rock with 5 feet at low water; this rock is covered by a growth of seaweed and sometimes appears to be bare at low water. These rocks constitute the only serious danger to navigation in San Miguel Bay proper. Cabgan Island is a round-topped cone 170 feet high with an immense banyan tree on its summit. It is less than ^ mile in extent and lies y± mile south of the west end of Cauit Island. There is a small ware- house on Cabgan and a larger one on the mainland opposite. The area included between Cauit and Cabgan Islands and the mainland affords the only safe anchorage in the bay for vessels draw- ing less than 6 feet; the bottom is soft mud. The best anchorage is about midway between Cauit Island and the mainland with the rocks awash, showing midway between Cauit and Cabgan Islands. The passage between Cauit Island and Kagsao Point is clear and has 6 feet in it. From the Kalwan Eiver the coast trends north-northwest for 7 miles to Balocbaloc Point. For 4 miles the shore is low and mud bottom extends to the muddy or sandy beach ; the 3-f athom curve is about \y 2 miles from shore. For the last 3 miles the shore becomes more rocky and the bottom changes from mud to sand between 3 and 4 fathoms. Tinambac is a small town about I14 miles northward of the mouth of the Kalwan Eiver. It contains a church with a white cross, which is a good landmark when the light is right. Kagliliog Point, about % mile southward of Balocbaloc Point, is rocky and has a detached rock about 100 yards off its extremity. The bottom is rocky for some distance off, and this rock should not be ap- proached closer than y 2 mile. Balocbaloc Point, the southern entrance point of the Looc Eiver, is low and sandy and has a spit, covered at high water, extending y 2 mile northward. looc River, about iy 2 miles wide at the mouth, is the outlet of a large tidal lagoon. The shores of this lagoon are low and mostly mangrove covered ; its greatest depth is about 1 fathom at low water, over a muddy bottom. There is a small islet in the center. The Looc Eiver leaves this lagoon as a clean channel, 3 fathoms deep and % mile LAMON BAY TO LAGONOY GULF. 129 wide, through which the tidal currents run with great velocity. This channel gradually widens and shoals 1 mile from the lagoon and be- comes dangerously contracted by rocks on both sides. A channel carrying 10 feet at low water was developed, which, if well buoyed and entered for the first time in fine weather for the sake of local knowledge, would serve to take a vessel of that draft to an excellent harbor of refuge in the upper part of the river. This channel is im- possible for a stranger or in thick weather. From the Looc River the coast trends gradually northwest by west for &y 2 miles to San Miguel Island and is irregular, having several shoal bays and rocky points. The bottom off this shore is hard sand, with rocks close inshore, to a depth of between 3 and 4 fathoms, out- side of which the bottom becomes soft mud. Proceeding northward the 3-fathom curve, at first about iy 2 miles offshore, gradually ap- proaches the coast until outside of San Miguel Island, where the land is fairly steep-to ; a depth of 5 fathoms is found less than 14 mile from shore. San Miguel Island is low and well wooded. Its shores are rocky, and at the east end it is connected with the main by a sand bar, bare at low water. Off the northwest end detached rocks extend about 300 yards ; this point should not be approached closer than y 3 mile. Vessels may anchor in 3 fathoms, sandy bottom, fairly sheltered from winds from northwest through north to southeast, about % mile southeast of the southeast end of San Miguel Island. Large vessels should anchor in 5 fathoms, muddy bottom, % mile south of the same point. The ap- proaches to this anchorage are clean and the bottom shoals gradually. There is a small anchorage in 3 fathoms, bottom sand, mud, and rocks, eastward of the north end of the island, about halfway between the point and the shore. This anchorage should be approached cau- tiously, as there are rocks, bare at low water, some distance off the shore of the mainland. From San Miguel Island the coast trends northward for 2 miles to Quelun Point. About 1 mile westward of this point is a low, rocky islet with a few bushes on it, and % mile northwestward of this islet is a long detached reef with a least depth of 6 feet on it. The vicinity of this islet and Quelun Point is foul and should be avoided. Directions. — Vessels bound for the Bicol River should enter San Miguel Bay midway between Caringo and Siruma Islands and steer 189° (188° mag!) ; when Cauit Island bears 91° (90° mag.) they should anchor in 3 fathoms, in the vicinity of the anchorage buoy, to wait for the pilot, or for water on the bar, as may be necessary. Vessels bound for Cauit Landing (Cabgan Island) should, after entering the bay, bring the eastern end of Canton Island to bear 338° (337° mag.) and steer 158° (157° mag.) until the south side of Cabgan Island bears 91° (90° mag.), when it may be steered for. Siruma Bay, between Quelun and Siruma Points, is filled with islets and coral shoals for the greater part, of its area. There is a depth of 2y 2 fathoms at the entrance, decreasing gradually toward the head. The town of Siruma lies on the south shore, about 1 mile eastward from Quelun Point. Siruma Island, the eastern entrance point of San Miguel Bay, is a small, low, wooded island about 50 feet high. It is surrounded by 97172°— 19 9 130 LUZON. ei reef which extends nearly % mile westward. The eastern end of Siruma Island is connected by reefs with Siruma Point, a long, narrow point projecting westward from the mainland. An islet lies on the reef about 14 mile northward of the north end of Siruma Island. Bicol Eock, a small, rocky ledge which is covered at extreme high water, lies 1 ^ miles westward of the western end of Siruma Island. Between this rock and the reef extending westward from Siruma Island is a channel % mile wide and 8 fathoms deep. A rocky patch with a least depth of l 1 ^ fathoms lies % mile south- ward from the west end of Siruma Island. There are two shoals lying northwestward of Siruma Island which must be guarded against by vessels entering or leaving San Miguel Bay. One, with a least depth of 2y 2 fathoms, lies l 1 ^ miles westward of the north point of Siruma Island and the other, with a least depth of 3 fathoms, lies iy 2 miles northwestward of the same point. Sapenitan Bay, between ttiruma and Sapenitan Points, affords good anchorage, sheltered from all winds except those from north and northwest, in 4 to 6 fathoms, muddy bottom, about y 2 mile from the shore, between the mouths of two rivers which empty near the head of the bay. Sapenitan Point is low and wooded at the extremity, but is 352 feet high about 2 miles inland. It is surrounded by a wide reef, partly bare at low water. From Sapenitan Point to Quinabucasan Point, about 5 miles east- northeastward, the coast is very irregular and is indented by two deep bays, the western one of which extends 2 miles southeastward. The shores of this bay are fringed with coral reefs, leaving a deep pocket over 1 mile long and y 2 mile wide between them. The eastern bay is entirely rilled with reefs, upon which lie a number of small islets, the northwesternmost of which, lying about y 2 mile southeast- ward of Butauanan Island, is 50 feet high and marks the southeastern side of the channel between Butauanan Island and Quinabucasan Point. Butauanan Island, lying northwestward from Quinabucasan Point, from which it is separated by a deep, narrow, navigable channel hav- ing a least width of about 250 yards, is well wooded, and 763 feet high in its northern part. The northern coast of the island is clean and may be safely rounded at a distance of y 2 mile. The western side is fringed by a coral reef, which at its southern end extends nearly % mile westward. Shoal water, with one rock awash, extends over 1 mile westward of the south end of the island. In strong northeast winds good anchorage may be found in 12 fathoms about y 2 mile from the west side of Butauanan Island on the bearings: South end of Butauanan Island 130° (129° mag.) and the northwest point of the same island 334° (333° mag.). Another an- chorage used by coastwise steamers is in 9 fathoms, muddy bottom, about % mile southwestward from the south end of Butauanan Island. From this anchorage the 50-foot islet previously mentioned should bear 70° (69° mag.) and the northwest point of Butauanan Island 335° (334° mag.). When approaching, this anchorage from the northwestward vessels should give the south end of Butauanan Island LAMON BAY TO LAGONOY GULF. 131 a berth of about iy 2 miles to clear the shoal water extending 1 mile westward from that point. From Quinabucasan Point, the most northern point of Luzon in this vicinity, the coast trends in a general east-southeasterly direction for 40 miles to Caramoan Point, the northeastern extremity of the peninsula of the same name. This coast is very irregular in outline, being indented by deep bays' and faced by numerous islands, between which and the mainland are several well-protected anchorages. The land rises rapidly from the shore line and is, as a rule, heavily wooded. There are no towns of any importance on this coast. San Vicente Bay, 4% miles southeastward of Quinabucasan Point, is nearly blocked by reefs, and the only available anchorage is in the entrance, southward of the northern entrance point. Port Tambang, 4 miles southeastward of San Vicente Bay, is blocked by coral reefs almost to the entrance and is of no value to the navi- gator. Lamit Bay (chart 4271), with its northern entrance about 16 miles southeastward of Butauanan Island and the same distance westward from Sugar Loaf Point, is the best typhoon harbor on the east coast of Luzon. It is formed by Sibauan and several smaller islands west- ward, the Lamit Islands eastward, and a bight in the shore line south- ward. It has an average width of 2% miles and extends 4 miles southward; within this area there are a number of small islands, among which anchorage, protected from all winds and sea, may be found. Sibauan Island, with the small adjacent islands Paniqui, Dinug, Naglaous, and Salobot northward, and Cagbinunga and Pagbocavan Islands southward, forms the western side of Lamit Bay. Sibauan Island is well wooded and 165 feet high near the southern end. Salo- bot Island, the northeastern of the group, lies about % mile north- eastward of the northeast point of Sibauan ; it is very small, 90 feet high, and has a reef, with a rock awash at its extremity, projecting about Vi mile eastward. This reef forms the < western limit to the northern entrance to Lamit Bay. Paniqui Islands, the northeastern one of which is 202 feet high, are three small islands lying about % mile northward of Sibauan Island; they can be safely passed at a distance of V4 mile. Pagbocavan, the southern islet of the group forming the western side of Lamit Bay, lies with its southern ex- tremity over 1 mile southward of Sibauan. It is well wooded and 240 feet high. The south end, which terminates in a large, dark- brown rock, may be safely passed at a distance of V4 mile. The other islets of the group, previously mentioned, as well as several named and unnamed islets and rocks, do not require any detailed description, and their position will be best understood by reference to the chart. Aguada Eock is a small, rocky ledge with a least depth of 2 fath- oms surrounded by deep water, lying nearly iy 2 miles northward of Paniqui Islands. Except under the most favorable conditions it can not be picked up by the color of the water, and it breaks only in bad weather. Cimarron Islets are four small, high islets lying nearly 3 miles north-northwestward of the largest of the Paniqui Islands. The central and largest island, 160 feet high, presents a conical appear- ance from east or west, but from north or south it shows a short 132 LUZON. ridge. This group is the nearest danger to the track to and from Maqueda Channel, and the course pursued by steamers passes over 2 miles northward of it. Lamit Islands are two high, heavily wooded islands separated by a narrow, impassable channel. They are of very irregular shape; the northern island is 260 feet high and the southern 380 feet. The north shore of the northern island has bold, rocky points at either end, sloping downward to a low level % mile from the northwest point. Two small islets — Pawican, 60 feet high, and Puling, 50 feet high, both of which are clean and steep-to on their seaward sides, lie off the north end of the north island. There are a number of small islands in Lamit Bay, the principal ones of which are the Bani Islands, two in number, and Anchor Island. The western Bani Island lies about 1 mile southwestward of the northwest point of the northern Lamit Island, and Anchor Island lies about 1 mile southward of the western Bani Island. Good anchorage will be- found southward of the western Bani Island in about 8 fathoms, and also southward and southwestward of Anchor Island in 4 to 8 fathoms. Directions. — Vessels approaching Lamit Bay from westward should bring the opening between Pagbocavan Island and the main to bear 136° (135° mag.) and steer for it until the south end of Pagbocavan Island bears 125° (124° mag.), when the vessel should be hauled a little eastward to pass about !/4 mile southward of Pag- bocavan; continue eastward and anchor anywhere southward of a line drawn between Pagbocavan and Anchor Island in 4 to 8 fath- oms, sticky mud bottom. Vessels from eastward usually enter Lamit Bay by the north chan- nel. The water is deep close to Pawican Island, and it can be safely rounded at % mile or less and the next point south on Lamit Island passed at the same distance. By favoring this side of the channel the reefs extending from Salobot Island will also be passed at a safe distance. The west end of the western Bani Island can be rounded at a distance of i/4 mile and good anchorage will be found southward of it in 7 or 8 fathoms, muddy bottom, about ^4 mile from the shore; if desirable, anchorage may be taken up farther southward, but not farther eastward, as there is a wide reef project- ing from the eastern Bani Island, and also a shoal patch, with a least depth of 1 foot, % mile southward of the east end of the west- ern Bani Island. If proceeding to an anchorage nearer the head of the bay, pass about 14 mile eastward of Anchor Island and haul southwestward, where ample space will be found for many vessels in 4 to 8 fathoms, as previously described. Instead of passing east- ward of Anchor Island a southwesterly course may be continued from off the western Bani Island and the southwest point of Anchor Island rounded to an anchorage. From the latter point a long shoal projects, and the thoroughfare is still further obstructed by a coral shoal nearly abreast of the point and nearly in mid-channel, with % fathom least water, and rarely shows any evidence of its existence. There is also a small patch, with 2 fathoms least water, lying about y& mile northwestward of the southwest point of Anchor Island which further complicates this passage. Should the weather be such that there is difficulty in recognizing the above-described entrance, a vessel should continue westward LAMON BAY TO LAGONOY GULF. 133 passing either side of the Paniqui Islands at a distance of 14 mile, until the Cimarron Islets bear 1° (0° mag.), when the course should be changed to 181° (180° mag.) to pass % mile westward of Sibauan Island; when the south end of Pagbocavan bears 125° (124° mag.) the course should be changed to pass about % mile south of it, and the previous directions followed. Binagasbasan Bay is a large, irregular-shaped bay lying between Lamit Islands and Quinalasag Island. Malabungut Island, lying on the edge of the shore reef, forms the head of the bay. This bay is open northward and is of no value to navigation, the anchorage area being exposed and encumbered by shoal patches. Bacon Island, 80 feet high, lies in the middle of the entrance. Hervor Bock, with a depth of 2 feet at high-water springs, lies about 2y 2 miles northeasward of Cugun Point, the northeast ex- tremity of the northern Lamit Island. It is surrounded by deep water, and a light swell sets up a continuous and well-defined breaker. Quinalasag Island, with its northern extremity Sy 2 miles eastward of Cugun Point, makes a prominent landmark, as it is large, bold, heavily wooded, and irregularly shaped. Its ridges are much higher than those of the surrounding' country, rising in places to nearly 800 feet. On the northern side there are several indentations, among them Masamat Bay, which would serve as a good typhoon shelter for small craft. Bacacay Island is small, over 200 feet high, and lies immediately northward of the north point of Quinalasag Island, of which it appears to be an outlying point when seen from a distance from some directions. It forms an excellent landmark from eastward or west- ward, as it shows as twin peaks of nearly equal height. Projecting northward from it is a narrow dike-like ledge of rocks, the outer end of which, fa mile north of the island, can be closely approached, as there are no outlying submerged rocks. Quinalasag Passage, southward of Lamit, Malabungut, and Quinala- sag Islands, connects Lamit and Sisiran Bays. It is too shoal and obstructed by reefs to be used by anything but small boats. Sisiran Bay (chart 4271), south and southeast of Quinalasag Island, affords good sheltered anchorage in 4 to 5 fathoms, in a bight on the southeast side of Quinalasag Island, and also in 7 fathoms southwest- ward of Tinajuagan Point,, the eastern entrance point. The best channel into Sisiran Bay is between Quinalasag Island and Laja Island, a dark, bare rock, 20 feet high, lying in the middle of the entrance. There is a shoal which breaks in bad weather, with a least known depth of 414 fathoms, between Laja Island and Tinajuagan Point. Caramoan Peninsula is the name given to that portion of Luzon lying between the Pacific and Lagonoy Gulf. It is 10 miles wide between Sisiran Bay and the head of Lagonoy Gulf, and extends about 15 miles eastward, terminating in" a broad point facing Maqueda Chan- nel. It is high and mountainous and well wooded. Tagun Bay lies between Tinajuagan Point and Lahuy Island. The long tongue of land terminating in Tinajuagan Point, which sepa- rates Sisiran Bay from Tagun Bay, is formed of broad ridges covered with grass, with narrow, steep, wooded valleys between them. Broad coral reefs fringe the western shore of the bay and also obstruct its head. On the eastern side of the bay navigation is less dangerous 134 LUZON. than on the western, as deep water can be carried closer to the islands and projecting points. If desired, anchorage can be found off the rocky bluff point on the west coast of Lahuy Island, a little over 2 miles south of Sugar Loaf Point. There are two small channels con- necting the head of Tagun Bay with the Maqueda Channel, but they are too narrow and tortuous, in the absence of landmarks or aids to navigation, to be of any practical value. Lahuy Island, with its northeast end 12^ miles north-northwest- ward of the northeast extremity of the Caramoan Peninsula, is about 5 miles long, north and south, and about 1 mile wide. There are a number of small islets and rocks lying off its western and northern sides and on the eastern side it is fringed by a wide reef, which near the northern end of the island extends nearly 2 miles eastward and surrounds Cotivas and Basot Islands. The interior of Lahuy is hilly ; a ridge about 400 feet high extends north and south in the southern half, while the northern half is composed of a number of peaks cov- ered with grass and a few trees. The northwestern part of the island terminates in a very conspicuous round-topped, steep, wooded peak, 325 feet high, known as the Sugar Loaf. The northern shore is formed by sandy beaches and rocky cliffs alternately, and there are a number of small rocks lying off the northeast point. Immediately northward of Sugar Loaf Point are two large rocks, 50 and 79 feet high, respectively. Ocata Island lies about y 2 mile northward from Lahuy Island. It is 81 feet high ; the northern coast is rocky ; the southern, sandy. A light, visible 12 miles, is shown from a white concrete pillar on the summit of Ocata Island. About 200 yards westward of the southern part of the island there is a rock, covered by y 2 fathom and surrounded by deep water. About y 2 mile eastward of the north end of Ocata Island there are three rocks, each about 3 feet high, and 14 m il e southeastward of the same point there is a rock 7 feet high. Masnou Island, lying 31/4 miles northwestward of S.ugar Loaf Point, is covered with grass and 87 feet high. Black Islet is a bare rock, about 50 yards in extent and 30 feet high, lying nearly 1 mile southeastward of Masnou Island. The channel between them is % mi l e wide and that between Black Islet and Sugar Loaf Point is over 2y 2 miles wide. Both are deep and clear; the northern channel between Masnou Island and Black Islet is the one generally used by coasting steamers. Molar Rock, lying % mile north-northwestward of Masnou Island, is about 20 yards in extent and about 20 feet high. About % m il e north-northwestward from Molar Rock is a sunken rock, on which the sea breaks heavily in bad weather. About y± mile southeastward of Molar Kock is a small rock 15 feet high ; between this rock and Mas- nou Island are sunken rocks, on which the sea frequently breaks. Cotivas and Basot Islands, about 1 mile eastward of the northern part of Lahuy Island, lie close together and from a distance appear as one island. Basot is the most eastern island in this vicinity ; its northeastern side is clear and may be safely passed at a distance of 1 mile; its shores are sandy beaches and rocky. cliffs alternately. In the northern part of Basot there is a grassy peak 155 feet high and in the southern part a flat-topped hill 168 feet high. Basot Island is covered with grass, while Cotivas Island, lying immediately west LAMON BAY TO LAGONOY GULP. 135 ward of the south end of it, is covered with trees. A coral reef ex- tends % mile from the west coast of Basot Island, leaving a fairly good anchorage, known as Pocket Bay, exposed to northeast winds, between it and Lahuy Island. Lucsuhin Islands are several islands and rocks lying on a great reef between Lahuy Island and the Caramoan Peninsula. They are moderately high and covered with bushes, trees, and coconut palms. When seen from seaward they appear as one, but at high water a boat can pass between them. Northward and southwestward of the reef upon which they lie, parts of which are awash and bare at low water, are narrow, tortuous channels with depths of from 2>y 2 to 12 fathoms, leading into Tagun Bay. In the absence of good landmarks and of any aids to navigation no directions for these channels can be given, and they should not be attempted without local knowledge. Solodon Islet, the southeasternmost of the Lucsuhin Islands, is a large, barren rock, 91 feet high, and has a few bushes on its top ; its sides are steep and rocky. It forms a useful landmark for entering Tabgon Anchorage. About 1 mile eastward of Solodon Islet is a 6-fathom shoal on which the sea has been seen to break in heavy weather. From Tinajuagan Point the coast trends southeasterly for 12 miles to Yopoquit Point. This coast is faced by wide reefs, parts of which bare at low water and which at one point extend off 3 miles. The islands Quinabugan, Cocos, and Haponan, and a large number of small, high, unnamed islets and rocks, which do not require any special description, lie on these reefs. Cocos Islet, mentioned because it is used as a range for entering Tab- gon Anchorage and the best channel into Tagun Bay, lies on the above-mentioned reefs, 1y 2 miles southeastward of Tinajuagan Point and about 1% miles from the mainland. It is small, regular in shape, coming to a rounded summit 12T feet high, and is entirely covered with coconut palms. Tabgon lies on the shore about 9 miles southeastward of Tinajuagan Point, at the foot of a prominent hill 617 feet high. This hill, the highest in this vicinity, is very steep on the south side and has a ridge extending east and west; its southern side is covered with grass and the northern side is heavily wooded. The reef in front of the village extends over 1 mile. Tabgon is a port of call for some of the smaller coastwise steamers. Tabgon Anchorage (chart 4268) is about \y 2 miles northeastward from the village of Tabgon and westward and southwestward from Puling Island. It affords a fairly large anchorage area completely protected from outside seas, but exposed to northerly and north- westerly winds, and in a heavy blow it gets somewhat choppy in the more exposed parts. The depths are from 4 to 12 fathoms over a mud and sand bottom. Directions for entering will follow the description of the dangers at the entrance. Haponan Island, lying about 2 miles eastward of Tabgon Village, is the most eastern island lying on the reefs which skirt the shore be- tween Tinajuagan Point and Yopoquit Point. Keefs extend 1/2 mile northeastward and. form part of the south side of the channel into Tabgon Anchorage. Haponan is composed of a number of small peaks, highest 202 feet; they are covered with grass, bushes, and 136 luzon. coconut palms. The shore is alternately sandy beaches and rather low, rocky points. Puling Island, lying northward of Haponan Island, is fringed by a reef on its northern side, which forms part of the south side of the channel into Tabgon Anchorage. Puling, the highest island in this vicinity, is 298 feet high ; it is well wooded except where it has been cleared on the northern part of the top and forms a good landmark from seaward. There is a narrow, deep channel between Puling and Haponan, but it is seldom used, the northern channel being considered preferable. South Islet is a small islet about 28 feet high, covered with trees, lying about 220 yards northward of Puling Island, near the edge of the reef. North Islet, lying about 500 yards northward of South Islet, on the southern edge of the reef surrounding the Lucsuhin Islands, is very small, 14 feet high, and is covered with grass and small bushes. These two islets mark the channel into Tabgon Anchorage which passes between them and is about 300 yards wide between the 5 -fathom curves. From Yopoquit Point the coast trends east-southeastward with a bend southward, forming Port Caramoan, for 4^ miles to Caramoan Point. Yopoquit Point is fringed by a reef over y 2 mile wide ; this reef gradually narrows to the coast about 2 miles southeastward. Port Caramoan is used as a landing place for the town of Caramoan during the southwest monsoon. The village of Paniman stands at the head of the port. Malarad Islands are a group of small, high islets and rocks, partly wooded, with steep rocky sides, lying off Port Caramoan. For over 2 miles northward of Malarad Islands the bottom is very irregular, with depths of from Sy 2 to 21 fathoms. In heavy northeast weather the sea breaks on some of the shoaler patches, and this area should be navigated with caution. Caramoan Point, the northeast extremity of the peninsula of the same name, is about 400 feet high. It has steep, rocky bluffs about 50 feet high and is very bold and steep-to. The interior back of the point is covered by innumerable small, heavily wooded peaks 600 to 1,000 feet high, the highest of which, a round-topped, heavily wooded peak, about 4 miles westward of Caramoan Point, is easily recognized and forms a good landmark. Directions for Tabgon Anchorage.— Vessels bound into Tabgon Anchorage should, while still outside the danger line mentioned above, bring Puling Island to bear 267° (266° mag.) and steer for it. When about i/ 2 mile southward of Solodon Islet bring the south side of the North Islet, lying on the north side of the channel, in range with the south side of Cocos Islet, bearing 279%° (278%° mag.). When on this range the 48-foot island eastward of Cocos Islet appears to be a lower prolongation of Cocos extending north- ward and the 5-foot rock westward of Cocos is entirely shut in. Stand in on this range, keeping a good lookout. for the reefs on both sides. Thie range will clear them, but it is advisable, after passing the reef point on the south side, to open the range a little southward thereby giving the reefs northward a wider berth. As the two islets are approached haul westward to pass midway between them ; as soon as they are abeam haul a little southward, as there is a reef covered by LAMON BAY TO LAGONOY GULF. 137 iy 2 fathoms lying about 400 yards southwestward of North Islet, and a reef with rocks awash extends about 200 yards westward of South Islet. Anchorage may be found anywhere inside, but about the best place is west or southwest of Puling Island, close enough to clear the reef westward, which is about 14 mile in extent, covered by a least depth of % fathom, and lies about 700 yards westward of the west side of Puling Island. In the northeast monsoon vessels may anchor close to Puling Island, the water being deeper there than farther from shore. From Caramoan Point the coast trends southeasterly for &y 2 miles to Rungus Point, which forms the southeastern extremity of the Caramoan Peninsula. It is very rugged and irregular and is cut into by a number of small bays with sandy beaches and rocky bluffs. Several small islets and rocks lie about % m il e or l ess from shore. The rock on which the Elcano was wrecked lies almost % mile north- eastward of Batobato Point. The interior is hilly, rising to heights of from 300 to 700 feet a short distance inland. There are no shel- tered anchorages on this coast except Pitogo Bay, which is some- times used as a harbor of refuge for small vessels. Catanaguan Islands are two small islands lying about 2% miles east- ward of Caramoan Point. They are surrounded by deep water, with a deep, narrow channel between them. The northern island, about 85 feet high, is covered with bushes and grass ; the northern part ends in a sharp point. About 400 yards northward of this island is a small rock about 3 feet high, and about 200 yards eastward of the island is a similar rock. . A small, detached shoal, with a least depth of 51/^ fathoms, lies about y 2 mile westward of the northern island. The southern island, about 102 feet high, is covered with trees and bushes; the shore line consists of sandy beaches and rocky points. Off the south end of the island is a bare, pyramidal rock, 72 feet high, which shows very plainly from east or west. A small, detached shoal, with a least depth of 3 fathoms, with deep water all around, lies about % mile west-south westward from the south point of the south- ern island. Taebun Channel, separating the Catanaguan Islands from the Cara- moan Peninsula, is about 1 mile wide at the narrowest point. It is deep and is frequently used by vessels bound for the east coast of Luzon. Pitogo Bay (chart 4268) is a very small, well-sheltered anchorage, facing Taebun Channel, about 1 mile southward of Caramoan Point. A bight in the shore line, with Pitigo Island in front of it, forms the harbor. It is surrounded with high, * irregular hills covered with trees ; the locality is hard to identify from a distance. There are two entrances, one on either side of Pitigo Island. The northern entrance is generally used, the southern one being nearly blocked by reefs, leaving a narrow, deep, impracticable channel between them. Masters of vessels who use Pitogo Bay in bad weather state that a vessel can get far enough around behind Pitigo Island to get good protection from northeast winds and seas. The swinging room is very limited and it would probably be necessary to moor. Small steamers can find good shelter in typhoon weather in the northern bi